Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
B15-0252_Arch Specs_1437166620.pdf
AIA® Document A201TM – 2007 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 1 ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has added information needed for its completion. The author may also have revised the text of the original AIA standard form. An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the author and should be reviewed. This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification. ELECTRONIC COPYING of any portion of this AIA® Document to another electronic file is prohibited and constitutes a violation of copyright laws as set forth in the footer of this document. for the following PROJECT: (Name and location or address) «Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse RenovationTown of Vail» «1709 Sunburst Dr Vail, CO 81657 » THE OWNER: (Name, legal status and address) «Town of Vail »« » «75 S Frontage Rd Vail, CO 81657 » THE ARCHITECT: (Name, legal status and address) «Zehren and Associates, Inc. »« » «P.O. Box 1976 Avon, CO 81620 » TABLE OF ARTICLES 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 2 OWNER 3 CONTRACTOR 4 ARCHITECT 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 8 TIME 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 2 INDEX (Topics and numbers in bold are section headings.) Acceptance of Nonconforming Work 9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3 Acceptance of Work 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.3 Access to Work 3.16, 6.2.1, 12.1 Accident Prevention 10 Acts and Omissions 3.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.8, 3.18, 4.2.3, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 10.2.5, 10.2.8, 13.4.2, 13.7, 14.1, 15.2 Addenda 1.1.1, 3.11 Additional Costs, Claims for 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 6.1.1, 7.3.7.5, 10.3, 15.1.4 Additional Inspections and Testing 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 12.2.1, 13.5 Additional Insured 11.1.4 Additional Time, Claims for 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 8.3.2, 15.1.5 Administration of the Contract 3.1.3, 4.2, 9.4, 9.5 Advertisement or Invitation to Bid 1.1.1 Aesthetic Effect 4.2.13 Allowances 3.8, 7.3.8 All-risk Insurance 11.3.1, 11.3.1.1 Applications for Payment 4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.10, 11.1.3 Approvals 2.1.1, 2.2.2, 2.4, 3.1.3, 3.10.2, 3.12.8, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 4.2.7, 9.3.2, 13.5.1 Arbitration 8.3.1, 11.3.10, 13.1, 15.3.2, 15.4 ARCHITECT 4 Architect, Definition of 4.1.1 Architect, Extent of Authority 2.4, 3.12.7, 4.1, 4.2, 5.2, 6.3, 7.1.2, 7.3.7, 7.4, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.8, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1 Architect, Limitations of Authority and Responsibility 2.1.1, 3.12.4, 3.12.8, 3.12.10, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.10, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 5.2.1, 7.4, 9.4.2, 9.5.3, 9.6.4, 15.1.3, 15.2 Architect’s Additional Services and Expenses 2.4, 11.3.1.1, 12.2.1, 13.5.2, 13.5.3, 14.2.4 Architect’s Administration of the Contract 3.1.3, 4.2, 3.7.4, 15.2, 9.4.1, 9.5 Architect’s Approvals 2.4, 3.1.3, 3.5, 3.10.2, 4.2.7 Architect’s Authority to Reject Work 3.5, 4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1 Architect’s Copyright 1.1.7, 1.5 Architect’s Decisions 3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.2.14, 6.3, 7.3.7, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 13.5.2, 15.2, 15.3 Architect’s Inspections 3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5 Architect’s Instructions 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 13.5.2 Architect’s Interpretations 4.2.11, 4.2.12 Architect’s Project Representative 4.2.10 Architect’s Relationship with Contractor 1.1.2, 1.5, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.9.2, 3.9.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3.7, 12, 13.4.2, 13.5, 15.2 Architect’s Relationship with Subcontractors 1.1.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 11.3.7 Architect’s Representations 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1 Architect’s Site Visits 3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5 Asbestos 10.3.1 Attorneys’ Fees 3.18.1, 9.10.2, 10.3.3 Award of Separate Contracts 6.1.1, 6.1.2 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work 5.2 Basic Definitions 1.1 Bidding Requirements 1.1.1, 5.2.1, 11.4.1 Binding Dispute Resolution 9.7, 11.3.9, 11.3.10, 13.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6.1, 15.3.1, 15.3.2, 15.4.1 Boiler and Machinery Insurance 11.3.2 Bonds, Lien 7.3.7.4, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Bonds, Performance, and Payment 7.3.7.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.3.9, 11.4 Building Permit 3.7.1 Capitalization 1.3 AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 3 Certificate of Substantial Completion 9.8.3, 9.8.4, 9.8.5 Certificates for Payment 4.2.1, 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.3 Certificates of Inspection, Testing or Approval 13.5.4 Certificates of Insurance 9.10.2, 11.1.3 Change Orders 1.1.1, 2.4, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.8.2.3, 3.11, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 5.2.3, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.2, 7.3.2, 7.3.6, 7.3.9, 7.3.10, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 9.10.3, 10.3.2, 11.3.1.2, 11.3.4, 11.3.9, 12.1.2, 15.1.3 Change Orders, Definition of 7.2.1 CHANGES IN THE WORK 2.2.1, 3.11, 4.2.8, 7, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 11.3.9 Claims, Definition of 15.1.1 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 3.2.4, 6.1.1, 6.3, 7.3.9, 9.3.3, 9.10.4, 10.3.3, 15, 15.4 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims 15.4.1 Claims for Additional Cost 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 6.1.1, 7.3.9, 10.3.2, 15.1.4 Claims for Additional Time 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 6.1.1, 8.3.2, 10.3.2, 15.1.5 Concealed or Unknown Conditions, Claims for 3.7.4 Claims for Damages 3.2.4, 3.18, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.1.1, 11.3.5, 11.3.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.6 Claims Subject to Arbitration 15.3.1, 15.4.1 Cleaning Up 3.15, 6.3 Commencement of the Work, Conditions Relating to 2.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12.6, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 6.2.2, 8.1.2, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 11.1, 11.3.1, 11.3.6, 11.4.1, 15.1.4 Commencement of the Work, Definition of 8.1.2 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration 3.9.1, 4.2.4 Completion, Conditions Relating to 3.4.1, 3.11, 3.15, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 8.2, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10, 12.2, 13.7, 14.1.2 COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND 9 Completion, Substantial 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, 12.2, 13.7 Compliance with Laws 1.6, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 9.6.4, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.3, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3, 15.2.8, 15.4.2, 15.4.3 Concealed or Unknown Conditions 3.7.4, 4.2.8, 8.3.1, 10.3 Conditions of the Contract 1.1.1, 6.1.1, 6.1.4 Consent, Written 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.3.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.3.1, 13.2, 13.4.2, 15.4.4.2 Consolidation or Joinder 15.4.4 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 1.1.4, 6 Construction Change Directive, Definition of 7.3.1 Construction Change Directives 1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1.1, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.3, 9.3.1.1 Construction Schedules, Contractor’s 3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.5.2 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts 5.4, 14.2.2.2 Continuing Contract Performance 15.1.3 Contract, Definition of 1.1.2 CONTRACT, TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE 5.4.1.1, 11.3.9, 14 Contract Administration 3.1.3, 4, 9.4, 9.5 Contract Award and Execution, Conditions Relating to 3.7.1, 3.10, 5.2, 6.1, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 11.4.1 Contract Documents, Copies Furnished and Use of 1.5.2, 2.2.5, 5.3 Contract Documents, Definition of 1.1.1 Contract Sum 3.7.4, 3.8, 5.2.3, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 9.1, 9.4.2, 9.5.1.4, 9.6.7, 9.7, 10.3.2, 11.3.1, 14.2.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.4, 15.2.5 Contract Sum, Definition of 9.1 Contract Time 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 5.2.3, 7.2.1.3, 7.3.1, 7.3.5, 7.4, 8.1.1, 8.2.1, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 14.3.2, 15.1.5.1, 15.2.5 Contract Time, Definition of 8.1.1 CONTRACTOR 3 Contractor, Definition of 3.1, 6.1.2 AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 4 Contractor’s Construction Schedules 3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.5.2 Contractor’s Employees 3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3, 11.1.1, 11.3.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1 Contractor’s Liability Insurance 11.1 Contractor’s Relationship with Separate Contractors and Owner’s Forces 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 6, 11.3.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.4 Contractor’s Relationship with Subcontractors 1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.18.1, 3.18.2, 5, 9.6.2, 9.6.7, 9.10.2, 11.3.1.2, 11.3.7, 11.3.8 Contractor’s Relationship with the Architect 1.1.2, 1.5, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.3, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3.7, 12, 13.5, 15.1.2, 15.2.1 Contractor’s Representations 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.8.2 Contractor’s Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 3.3.2, 3.18, 5.3, 6.1.3, 6.2, 9.5.1, 10.2.8 Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents 3.2 Contractor’s Right to Stop the Work 9.7 Contractor’s Right to Terminate the Contract 14.1, 15.1.6 Contractor’s Submittals 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.4, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.3, 11.4.2 Contractor’s Superintendent 3.9, 10.2.6 Contractor’s Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.5, 7.3.7, 8.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.3 Contractual Liability Insurance 11.1.1.8, 11.2 Coordination and Correlation 1.2, 3.2.1, 3.3.1, 3.10, 3.12.6, 6.1.3, 6.2.1 Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications 1.5, 2.2.5, 3.11 Copyrights 1.5, 3.17 Correction of Work 2.3, 2.4, 3.7.3, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 12.1.2, 12.2 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents 1.2 Cost, Definition of 7.3.7 Costs 2.4, 3.2.4, 3.7.3, 3.8.2, 3.15.2, 5.4.2, 6.1.1, 6.2.3, 7.3.3.3, 7.3.7, 7.3.8, 7.3.9, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 10.3.6, 11.3, 12.1.2, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.5, 14 Cutting and Patching 3.14, 6.2.5 Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Contractors 3.14.2, 6.2.4, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 11.1.1, 11.3, 12.2.4 Damage to the Work 3.14.2, 9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 11.3.1, 12.2.4 Damages, Claims for 3.2.4, 3.18, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.1.1, 11.3.5, 11.3.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.6 Damages for Delay 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1.6, 9.7, 10.3.2 Date of Commencement of the Work, Definition of 8.1.2 Date of Substantial Completion, Definition of 8.1.3 Day, Definition of 8.1.4 Decisions of the Architect 3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 15.2, 6.3, 7.3.7, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1, 15.2 Decisions to Withhold Certification 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.7, 14.1.1.3 Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance, Rejection and Correction of 2.3, 2.4, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.5, 9.5.1, 9.5.2, 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.1 Definitions 1.1, 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.5, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 3.12.3, 4.1.1, 15.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.1, 9.1, 9.8.1 Delays and Extensions of Time 3.2, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.5, 15.2.5 Disputes 6.3, 7.3.9, 15.1, 15.2 Documents and Samples at the Site 3.11 Drawings, Definition of 1.1.5 Drawings and Specifications, Use and Ownership of 3.11 Effective Date of Insurance 8.2.2, 11.1.2 Emergencies 10.4, 14.1.1.2, 15.1.4 Employees, Contractor’s 3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3.3, 11.1.1, 11.3.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1 Equipment, Labor, Materials or 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 Execution and Progress of the Work 1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2, 2.2.3, 2.2.5, 3.1, 3.3.1, 3.4.1, 3.5, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12, 3.14, 4.2, 6.2.2, 7.1.3, 7.3.5, 8.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3.1, 15.1.3 AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 5 Extensions of Time 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3, 7.4, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3, 15.1.5, 15.2.5 Failure of Payment 9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.6, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 Faulty Work (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) Final Completion and Final Payment 4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.8.2, 9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.1, 11.3.5, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Financial Arrangements, Owner’s 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4 Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance 11.3.1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1 Governing Law 13.1 Guarantees (See Warranty) Hazardous Materials 10.2.4, 10.3 Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers 5.2.1 Indemnification 3.17, 3.18, 9.10.2, 10.3.3, 10.3.5, 10.3.6, 11.3.1.2, 11.3.7 Information and Services Required of the Owner 2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2.2, 3.12.4, 3.12.10, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 11.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.3 Initial Decision 15.2 Initial Decision Maker, Definition of 1.1.8 Initial Decision Maker, Decisions 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5 Initial Decision Maker, Extent of Authority 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5 Injury or Damage to Person or Property 10.2.8, 10.4 Inspections 3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.5 Instructions to Bidders 1.1.1 Instructions to the Contractor 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.8.1, 5.2.1, 7, 8.2.2, 12, 13.5.2 Instruments of Service, Definition of 1.1.7 Insurance 3.18.1, 6.1.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 11 Insurance, Boiler and Machinery 11.3.2 Insurance, Contractor’s Liability 11.1 Insurance, Effective Date of 8.2.2, 11.1.2 Insurance, Loss of Use 11.3.3 Insurance, Owner’s Liability 11.2 Insurance, Property 10.2.5, 11.3 Insurance, Stored Materials 9.3.2 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11 Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy 9.9.1 Intent of the Contract Documents 1.2.1, 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 7.4 Interest 13.6 Interpretation 1.2.3, 1.4, 4.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 15.1.1 Interpretations, Written 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 15.1.4 Judgment on Final Award 15.4.2 Labor and Materials, Equipment 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 Labor Disputes 8.3.1 Laws and Regulations 1.5, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1.1, 11.3, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4 Liens 2.1.2, 9.3.3, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 15.2.8 Limitations, Statutes of 12.2.5, 13.7, 15.4.1.1 Limitations of Liability 2.3, 3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.10, 3.17, 3.18.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 6.2.2, 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 10.2.5, 10.3.3, 11.1.2, 11.2, 11.3.7, 12.2.5, 13.4.2 Limitations of Time 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2.7, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4.1, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 11.1.3, 11.3.1.5, 11.3.6, 11.3.10, 12.2, 13.5, 13.7, 14, 15 Loss of Use Insurance 11.3.3 Material Suppliers 1.5, 3.12.1, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 5.2.1, 9.3, 9.4.2, 9.6, 9.10.5 Materials, Hazardous 10.2.4, 10.3 Materials, Labor, Equipment and 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 1.5.1, 3.4.1, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and Procedures of Construction 3.3.1, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 9.4.2 AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 6 Mechanic’s Lien 2.1.2, 15.2.8 Mediation 8.3.1, 10.3.5, 10.3.6, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6, 15.3, 15.4.1 Minor Changes in the Work 1.1.1, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1, 7.4 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13 Modifications, Definition of 1.1.1 Modifications to the Contract 1.1.1, 1.1.2, 3.11, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 5.2.3, 7, 8.3.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 11.3.1 Mutual Responsibility 6.2 Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of 9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3 Nonconforming Work, Rejection and Correction of 2.3, 2.4, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.1 Notice 2.2.1, 2.3, 2.4, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.2, 3.12.9, 5.2.1, 9.7, 9.10, 10.2.2, 11.1.3, 12.2.2.1, 13.3, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1, 14.2, 15.2.8, 15.4.1 Notice, Written 2.3, 2.4, 3.3.1, 3.9.2, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 5.2.1, 9.7, 9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 12.2.2.1, 13.3, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4.1 Notice of Claims 3.7.4, 10.2.8, 15.1.2, 15.4 Notice of Testing and Inspections 13.5.1, 13.5.2 Observations, Contractor’s 3.2, 3.7.4 Occupancy 2.2.2, 9.6.6, 9.8, 11.3.1.5 Orders, Written 1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9.2, 7, 8.2.2, 11.3.9, 12.1, 12.2.2.1, 13.5.2, 14.3.1 OWNER 2 Owner, Definition of 2.1.1 Owner, Information and Services Required of the 2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2.2, 3.12.10, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.3.2, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 11.3, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.3 Owner’s Authority 1.5, 2.1.1, 2.3, 2.4, 3.4.2, 3.8.1, 3.12.10, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.9, 5.2.1, 5.2.4, 5.4.1, 6.1, 6.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 9.3.1, 9.3.2, 9.5.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.3, 11.3.10, 12.2.2, 12.3, 13.2.2, 14.3, 14.4, 15.2.7 Owner’s Financial Capability 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4 Owner’s Liability Insurance 11.2 Owner’s Relationship with Subcontractors 1.1.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 9.6.4, 9.10.2, 14.2.2 Owner’s Right to Carry Out the Work 2.4, 14.2.2 Owner’s Right to Clean Up 6.3 Owner’s Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts 6.1 Owner’s Right to Stop the Work 2.3 Owner’s Right to Suspend the Work 14.3 Owner’s Right to Terminate the Contract 14.2 Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications and Other Instruments of Service 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.5, 2.2.5, 3.2.2, 3.11, 3.17, 4.2.12, 5.3 Partial Occupancy or Use 9.6.6, 9.9, 11.3.1.5 Patching, Cutting and 3.14, 6.2.5 Patents 3.17 Payment, Applications for 4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.8.5, 9.10.1, 14.2.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Payment, Certificates for 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 Payment, Failure of 9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.6, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 Payment, Final 4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.8.2, 9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.1, 12.3, 13.7, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Payment Bond, Performance Bond and 7.3.7.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.4 Payments, Progress 9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3, 15.1.3 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9 Payments to Subcontractors 5.4.2, 9.5.1.3, 9.6.2, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 14.2.1.2 PCB 10.3.1 Performance Bond and Payment Bond 7.3.7.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.4 Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws 2.2.2, 3.7, 3.13, 7.3.7.4, 10.2.2 PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION OF 10 Polychlorinated Biphenyl 10.3.1 Product Data, Definition of 3.12.2 AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 7 Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7 Progress and Completion 4.2.2, 8.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 14.1.4, 15.1.3 Progress Payments 9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3, 15.1.3 Project, Definition of 1.1.4 Project Representatives 4.2.10 Property Insurance 10.2.5, 11.3 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10 Regulations and Laws 1.5, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4 Rejection of Work 3.5, 4.2.6, 12.2.1 Releases and Waivers of Liens 9.10.2 Representations 3.2.1, 3.5, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.10.1 Representatives 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.9, 4.1.1, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.10, 5.1.1, 5.1.2, 13.2.1 Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 3.3.2, 3.18, 4.2.3, 5.3, 6.1.3, 6.2, 6.3, 9.5.1, 10 Retainage 9.3.1, 9.6.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor 3.2, 3.12.7, 6.1.3 Review of Contractor’s Submittals by Owner and Architect 3.10.1, 3.10.2, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2, 5.2, 6.1.3, 9.2, 9.8.2 Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples by Contractor 3.12 Rights and Remedies 1.1.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.15.2, 4.2.6, 5.3, 5.4, 6.1, 6.3, 7.3.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.4, 14, 15.4 Royalties, Patents and Copyrights 3.17 Rules and Notices for Arbitration 15.4.1 Safety of Persons and Property 10.2, 10.4 Safety Precautions and Programs 3.3.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 5.3, 10.1, 10.2, 10.4 Samples, Definition of 3.12.3 Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7 Samples at the Site, Documents and 3.11 Schedule of Values 9.2, 9.3.1 Schedules, Construction 3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.5.2 Separate Contracts and Contractors 1.1.4, 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.7, 6, 8.3.1, 12.1.2 Shop Drawings, Definition of 3.12.1 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7 Site, Use of 3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1 Site Inspections 3.2.2, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 3.7.4, 4.2, 9.4.2, 9.10.1, 13.5 Site Visits, Architect’s 3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5 Special Inspections and Testing 4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.5 Specifications, Definition of 1.1.6 Specifications 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.2.2, 1.5, 3.11, 3.12.10, 3.17, 4.2.14 Statute of Limitations 13.7, 15.4.1.1 Stopping the Work 2.3, 9.7, 10.3, 14.1 Stored Materials 6.2.1, 9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4 Subcontractor, Definition of 5.1.1 SUBCONTRACTORS 5 Subcontractors, Work by 1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.1, 4.2.3, 5.2.3, 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6.7 Subcontractual Relations 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6, 9.10, 10.2.1, 14.1, 14.2.1 Submittals 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 7.3.7, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.3 Submittal Schedule 3.10.2, 3.12.5, 4.2.7 Subrogation, Waivers of 6.1.1, 11.3.7 Substantial Completion 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, 12.2, 13.7 Substantial Completion, Definition of 9.8.1 Substitution of Subcontractors 5.2.3, 5.2.4 Substitution of Architect 4.1.3 Substitutions of Materials 3.4.2, 3.5, 7.3.8 AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 8 Sub-subcontractor, Definition of 5.1.2 Subsurface Conditions 3.7.4 Successors and Assigns 13.2 Superintendent 3.9, 10.2.6 Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.7, 8.2, 8.3.1, 9.4.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.3 Surety 5.4.1.2, 9.8.5, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 14.2.2, 15.2.7 Surety, Consent of 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Surveys 2.2.3 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience 14.3 Suspension of the Work 5.4.2, 14.3 Suspension or Termination of the Contract 5.4.1.1, 14 Taxes 3.6, 3.8.2.1, 7.3.7.4 Termination by the Contractor 14.1, 15.1.6 Termination by the Owner for Cause 5.4.1.1, 14.2, 15.1.6 Termination by the Owner for Convenience 14.4 Termination of the Architect 4.1.3 Termination of the Contractor 14.2.2 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14 Tests and Inspections 3.1.3, 3.3.3, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 10.3.2, 11.4.1, 12.2.1, 13.5 TIME 8 Time, Delays and Extensions of 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.5, 15.2.5 Time Limits 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 11.1.3, 12.2, 13.5, 13.7, 14, 15.1.2, 15.4 Time Limits on Claims 3.7.4, 10.2.8, 13.7, 15.1.2 Title to Work 9.3.2, 9.3.3 Transmission of Data in Digital Form 1.6 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12 Uncovering of Work 12.1 Unforeseen Conditions, Concealed or Unknown 3.7.4, 8.3.1, 10.3 Unit Prices 7.3.3.2, 7.3.4 Use of Documents 1.1.1, 1.5, 2.2.5, 3.12.6, 5.3 Use of Site 3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1 Values, Schedule of 9.2, 9.3.1 Waiver of Claims by the Architect 13.4.2 Waiver of Claims by the Contractor 9.10.5, 13.4.2, 15.1.6 Waiver of Claims by the Owner 9.9.3, 9.10.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.2.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.6 Waiver of Consequential Damages 14.2.4, 15.1.6 Waiver of Liens 9.10.2, 9.10.4 Waivers of Subrogation 6.1.1, 11.3.7 Warranty 3.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.4, 12.2.2, 13.7 Weather Delays 15.1.5.2 Work, Definition of 1.1.3 Written Consent 1.5.2, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.3.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.4.1, 13.2, 13.4.2, 15.4.4.2 Written Interpretations 4.2.11, 4.2.12 Written Notice 2.3, 2.4, 3.3.1, 3.9, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 5.2.1, 8.2.2, 9.7, 9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 14, 15.4.1 Written Orders 1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9, 7, 8.2.2, 12.1, 12.2, 13.5.2, 14.3.1, 15.1.2 AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 9 ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS § 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS § 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents are enumerated in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement) and consist of the Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the Contract Documents do not include the advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, other information furnished by the Owner in anticipation of receiving bids or proposals, the Contractor’s bid or proposal, or portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements. § 1.1.2 THE CONTRACT The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (1) between the Contractor and the Architect or the Architect’s consultants, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or a Sub-subcontractor, (3) between the Owner and the Architect or the Architect’s consultants or (4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect’s duties. § 1.1.3 THE WORK The term “Work” means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor’s obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. § 1.1.4 THE PROJECT The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner and by separate contractors. § 1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules and diagrams. § 1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services. § 1.1.7 INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE Instruments of Service are representations, in any medium of expression now known or later developed, of the tangible and intangible creative work performed by the Architect and the Architect’s consultants under their respective professional services agreements. Instruments of Service may include, without limitation, studies, surveys, models, sketches, drawings, specifications, and other similar materials. § 1.1.8 INITIAL DECISION MAKER The Initial Decision Maker is the person identified in the Agreement to render initial decisions on Claims in accordance with Section 15.2 and certify termination of the Agreement under Section 14.2.2. § 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS § 1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results. AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 10 § 1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. § 1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words that have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. § 1.3 CAPITALIZATION Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those that are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of numbered articles or (3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects. § 1.4 INTERPRETATION In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as “all” and “any” and articles such as “the” and “an,” but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. § 1.5 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE § 1.5.1 The Architect and the Architect’s consultants shall be deemed the authors and owners of their respective Instruments of Service, including the Drawings and Specifications, and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights, including copyrights. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and material or equipment suppliers shall not own or claim a copyright in the Instruments of Service. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect’s or Architect’s consultants’ reserved rights. § 1.5.2 The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce the Instruments of Service provided to them solely and exclusively for execution of the Work. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the copyright notice, if any, shown on the Instruments of Service. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and material or equipment suppliers may not use the Instruments of Service on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner, Architect and the Architect’s consultants. § 1.6 TRANSMISSION OF DATA IN DIGITAL FORM If the parties intend to transmit Instruments of Service or any other information or documentation in digital form, they shall endeavor to establish necessary protocols governing such transmissions, unless otherwise already provided in the Agreement or the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 2 OWNER § 2.1 GENERAL § 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner’s approval or authorization. Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1, the Architect does not have such authority. The term “Owner” means the Owner or the Owner’s authorized representative. § 2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor within fifteen (15) days after receipt of a written request, information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of or enforce mechanic’s lien rights. Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site, and the Owner’s interest therein. § 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER § 2.2.1 Prior to commencement of the Work, the Contractor may request in writing that the Owner provide reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract. Thereafter, the Contractor may only request such evidence if (1) the Owner fails to make payments to the Contractor as the Contract Documents require; (2) a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum; or (3) the Contractor identifies in writing a reasonable concern regarding the Owner’s ability to make payment when due. The Owner shall furnish such evidence as a condition precedent to commencement or continuation of the Work or the portion of the Work affected by a material change. After the Owner furnishes the evidence, the Owner shall not materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor. Intentionally omitted. AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 11 § 2.2.2 Except for permits and fees that are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, including those required under Section 3.7.1, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. § 2.2.3 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work. § 2.2.4 The Owner shall furnish information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness. The Owner shall also furnish any other information or services under the Owner’s control and relevant to the Contractor’s performance of the Work with reasonable promptness after receiving the Contractor’s written request for such information or services. § 2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor one copy of the Contract Documents for purposes of making reproductions pursuant to Section 1.5.2. § 2.3 OWNER’S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK If the Contractor fails to correct Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Section 12.2 or repeatedly fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Section 6.1.3. § 2.4 OWNER’S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a ten (10)-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies, including the Owner’s expenses and compensation for the Architect’s additional services made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR § 3.1 GENERAL § 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Contractor shall be lawfully licensed, if required in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. The Contractor shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Contractor with respect to all matters under this Contract. The term “Contractor” means the Contractor or the Contractor’s authorized representative. § 3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect’s administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons or entities other than the Contractor. § 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR § 3.2.1 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 12 § 3.2.2 Because the Contract Documents are complementary, the Contractor shall, before starting each portion of the Work, carefully study and compare the various Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.2.3, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work, and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. It is recognized that the Contractor’s review is made in the Contractor’s capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. § 3.2.3 The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, but the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. § 3.2.4 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions the Architect issues in response to the Contractor’s notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall make Claims as provided in Article 15. If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations. If the Contractor performs those obligations, the Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents, for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents, or for nonconformities of the Contract Documents to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities. § 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES § 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor’s best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for, and have control over, construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters. If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and, except as stated below, shall be fully and solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. If the Contractor determines that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe, the Contractor shall give timely written notice to the Owner and the Architect and shall not proceed with that portion of the Work without further written instructions from the Architect. If the Contractor is then instructed to proceed with the required means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures without acceptance of changes proposed by the Contractor, the Owner Contractor shall be solely responsible for any loss or damage arising solely from those Owner-required means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. § 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor’s employees, Subcontractors, Sub-Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for, or on behalf of, the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors or Sub-Subcontractors. § 3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work. § 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS § 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. § 3.4.2 Except in the case of minor changes in the Work authorized by the Architect in accordance with Sections 3.12.8 or 7.4, the The Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner, after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order or Construction Change Directive. AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 13 § 3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor’s employees and other persons carrying out the Work. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not properly skilled in tasks assigned to them. § 3.5 WARRANTY The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless the Contract Documents require or permit otherwise. The Contractor further warrants that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and will be free from defects, except for those inherent in the quality of the Work the Contract Documents require or permit. Work, materials, or equipment not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective. The Contractor’s warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, alterations to the Work not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. § 3.6 TAXES The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor that are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. § 3.7 PERMITS, FEES, NOTICES AND COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS § 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, theThe Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit as well as for other permits, fees, licenses, and inspections by government agencies necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work that are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and legally required at the time bids are received or negotiations concluded. § 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work. § 3.7.3 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction. § 3.7.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If the Contractor encounters conditions at the site that are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, that differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall promptly provide notice to the Owner and the Architect before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than twenty-one (21) days after first observance of the conditions. The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and, if the Architect determines that they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall promptly notify the Owner and Contractor in writing, stating the reasons. If either party disputes the Architect’s determination or recommendation, that party may proceed as provided in Article 15. § 3.7.5 If, in the course of the Work, the Contractor encounters human remains or recognizes the existence of burial markers, archaeological sites or wetlands not indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately suspend any operations that would affect them and shall notify the Owner and Architect. Upon receipt of such notice, the Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume the operations. The Contractor shall continue to suspend such operations until otherwise instructed by the Owner but shall continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains or features. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence of such remains or features may be made as provided in Article 15. § 3.8 ALLOWANCES § 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 14 but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection. § 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, .1 Allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all required taxes, less applicable trade discounts; .2 Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but not in the allowances; and .3 Whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect (1) the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Section 3.8.2.1 and (2) changes in Contractor’s costs under Section 3.8.2.2. § 3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner with reasonable promptness. § 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT § 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. § 3.9.2 The Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the name and qualifications of a proposed superintendent. The Architect may reply within 14 days to the Contractor in writing stating (1) whether the Owner or the Architect has reasonable objection to the proposed superintendent or (2) that the Architect requires additional time to review. Failure of the Architect to reply within the 14 day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. Intentionally omitted. § 3.9.3 The Contractor shall not employ a proposed superintendent to whom the Owner or the Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not change the superintendent without the Owner’s consent, which shall not unreasonably be withheld or delayed. The superintendent has been identified as John Fitzgerald and will not be changed, barring special circumstances approved by the Owner. If a change becomes necessary, or Owner requests a change due to non-performance, Contractor is to propose replacement candidates for Owner and Architect Consideration and approval. § 3.10 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES § 3.10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner’s and the Architect’s information a the Contractor’s construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall not exceed time limits current underin the Contract Documents, shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project, shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work. § 3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare a submittal schedule, promptly after being awarded the Contract and thereafter as necessary to maintain a current submittal schedule, and shall submit the schedule(s) for the Architect’s approval. The Architect’s approval shall not unreasonably be delayed or withheld. The submittal schedule shall (1) be coordinated with the Contractor’s construction schedule, and (2) allow the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. If the Contractor fails to submit a submittal schedule, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in Contract Sum or extension of Contract Time based on the time required for review of submittals. § 3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted toapproved by the Owner and the Architect. § 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one (1) copy of the Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to indicate field changes and selections made during construction, and one copy of approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar required submittals. These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work as a record of the Work as constructed. AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 15 § 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES § 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. § 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. § 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples that illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. § 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. Their purpose is to demonstrate the way by which the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents for those portions of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittals. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Section 4.2.7. Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals that are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. § 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve and submit to the Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate contractors. § 3.12.6 By submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor represents to the Owner and the Architect that the Contractor has (1) reviewed and approved them, (2) determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so and (3) checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. § 3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect. § 3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals. except that theThe Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect’s approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and (1) the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Architect’s approval thereof. § 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. In the absence of such written notice, the Architect’s approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions. § 3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services that constitute the practice of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials or equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents, the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed design professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional’s written approval when submitted to the Architect. The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 16 to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the services, certifications and approvals performed or provided by such design professionals, provided the Owner and the Architect have specified to the Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Pursuant to this Section 3.12.10, the Architect will review, approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance and design criteria specified in the Contract Documents. § 3.13 USE OF SITE The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. § 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING § 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly. All areas requiring cutting, fitting and patching shall be restored to the condition existing prior to the cutting, fitting and patching, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents. § 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering such construction, or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the Owner or a separate contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor; such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor’s consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. § 3.15 CLEANING UP § 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor’s tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials from and about the Project. § 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and the Owner shall be entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor, which reimbursement may be deducted from any payment due to the Contractor. § 3.16 ACCESS TO WORK The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. § 3.17 ROYALTIES, PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and the Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents, or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or the Architect. However, if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a copyright or a patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Architect. § 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION § 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, the Architect, the Architect’s consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), but only to the extent caused by the negligent or willful acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 17 reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity that would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 3.18. § 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor, or a Subcontractor, or a Sub- Subcontractor under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. ARTICLE 4 ARCHITECT § 4.1 GENERAL § 4.1.1 The Owner shall retain an architect lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. That person or entity is identified as the Architect in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. § 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without the prior written consent of the Owner, ContractorOwner and the Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. § 4.1.3 If the employment of the Architect is terminated, the Owner shall employ a successor architect as to whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the Architect. § 4.2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT § 4.2.1 The Architect will shall provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents and will be an Owner’s representative during construction until the date the Architect issues the final Certificate for Payment. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents. § 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction, or as otherwise agreed with the Owner, to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and to determine in general if the Work observed is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will not have control over, charge of, or responsibility for, the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor’s rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents, except as provided in Section 3.3.1. § 4.2.3 On the basis of the site visits, the Architect will keep the Owner reasonably informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and report to the Owner (1) known deviations from the Contract Documents and from the most recent construction schedule submitted by the Contractor, and (2) defects and deficiencies observed in the Work. The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. § 4.2.4 COMMUNICATIONS FACILITATING CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially authorized, the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communicate with each other through the Architect about matters arising out of or relating to the Contract. Communications by and with the Architect’s consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner. § 4.2.5 Based on the Architect’s evaluations of the Contractor’s Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. § 4.2.6 The Architect has authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable, the Architect will have the authority to require inspection or testing of AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 18 the Work in accordance with Sections 13.5.2 and 13.5.3, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. § 4.2.7 The Architect will shall review and approve, or take other appropriate action upon, the Contractor’s submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect’s action will be taken in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness while allowing sufficient time in the Architect’s professional judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Architect’s review of the Contractor’s submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the any of its obligations under Sections 3.3, 3.5 and 3.12. The Architect’s review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or, unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect, of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. The Architect’s approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. § 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may authorize minor changes in the Work as provided in Section 7.4. The Architect will investigate and make determinations and recommendations regarding concealed and unknown conditions as provided in Section 3.7.4. § 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion; issue Certificates of Substantial Completion pursuant to Section 9.8; receive and forward to the Owner, for the Owner’s review and records, written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor pursuant to Section 9.10; and issue a final Certificate for Payment pursuant to Section 9.10. § 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect’s responsibilities at the site. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of such project representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract Documents. § 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under, and requirements of, the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect’s response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. § 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of, and reasonably inferable from, the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith.Intentionally omitted. § 4.2.13 The Architect’s decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents.Intentionally omitted. § 4.2.14 The Architect will review and respond to requests for information about the Contract Documents. The Architect’s response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. If appropriate, the Architect will prepare and issue supplemental Drawings and Specifications in response to the requests for information. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS § 5.1 DEFINITIONS § 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term “Subcontractor” is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term “Subcontractor” does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor. AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 19 § 5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term “Sub-subcontractor” is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub- subcontractor. § 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK § 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each principal portion of the Work. The Architect Owner may reply within fourteen (14) days to the Contractor in writing stating (1) whether the Owner or the Architect has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity or (2) that the Architect Owner requires additional time for review. Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply within the fourteen (14)-day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. § 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or the Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection. § 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by the difference, if any, occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor’s Work. However, no increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required. § 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not substitute a Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected if the Owner or the Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitution. § 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS By appropriate written agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor’s Work, which the Contractor, by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement that may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors. § 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTSIntentionally omitted. § 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner, provided that .1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements that the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor in writing; and .2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under bond relating to the Contract. When the Owner accepts the assignment of a subcontract agreement, the Owner assumes the Contractor’s rights and obligations under the subcontract. AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 20 § 5.4.2 Upon such assignment, if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days, the Subcontractor’s compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension. § 5.4.3 Upon such assignment to the Owner under this Section 5.4, the Owner may further assign the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity. If the Owner assigns the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity, the Owner shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all of the successor contractor’s obligations under the subcontract. ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS § 6.1 OWNER’S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS § 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner’s own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner, the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided in Article 15. § 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site, the term “Contractor” in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement. § 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner’s own forces and of each separate contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with other separate contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules. The Contractor shall make any revisions to the construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner until subsequently revised. § 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner’s own forces, the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the same rights that apply to the Contractor under the Conditions of the Contract, including, without excluding others, those stated in Article 3, this Article 6 and Articles 10, 11 and 12. § 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY § 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor’s construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. § 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor’s Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner’s or separate contractor’s completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor’s Work, except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable. § 6.2.3 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for costs the Owner incurs that are payable to a separate contractor because of the Contractor’s delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction. The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs the Contractor incurs because of a separate contractor’s delays, improperly timed activities, damage to the Work or defective construction. § 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage the Contractor wrongfully causes to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Section 10.2.5. § 6.2.5 The Owner and eachEach separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Section 3.14. AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 21 § 6.3 OWNER’S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP If a dispute arises among the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible. ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK § 7.1 GENERAL § 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract, by Change Order, or Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. § 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor and Architect; a Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor; an order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone. § 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contractor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, or Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work. § 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS § 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner, the Contractor and the Architect stating their agreement upon all of the following: .1 The change in the Work; .2 The amount of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum; and .3 The extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time. § 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES § 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and the Architect, directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. § 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order. § 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods: .1 Mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation; .2 Unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; .3 Cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee; or .4 As provided in Section 7.3.7. § 7.3.4 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally contemplated are materially changed in a proposed Change Order or Construction Change Directive so that application of such unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or the Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. § 7.3.5 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect Owner of the Contractor’s agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. § 7.3.6 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the Contractor’s agreement therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 22 § 7.3.7 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the Architect Owner shall determine the method and the adjustment on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, an amount for overhead and profit as set forth in the Agreement, or if no such amount is set forth in the Agreement, a reasonable amount. In such case, and also under Section 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect Owner may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this Section 7.3.7 shall be limited to the following: .1 Costs of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance, fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, and workers’ compensation insurance; .2 Costs of materials, supplies and equipment, including cost of transportation, whether incorporated or consumed; .3 Rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor or others; .4 Costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use or similar taxes related to the Work; and .5 Additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change. § 7.3.8 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change that results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the ArchitectOwner. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase, if any, with respect to that change. § 7.3.9 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner, the Contractor may request payment for Work completed under the Construction Change Directive in Applications for Payment. The Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs and certify for payment the amount that the Architect determines, in the Architect’s professional judgment, to be reasonably justified. The Architect’s interim determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order, subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a Claim in accordance with Article 15. § 7.3.10 When the Owner and the Contractor agree with a determination made by the Architect Owner concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and the Architect will prepare a Change Order. Change Orders may be issued for all or any part of a Construction Change Directive. § 7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK Intentionally omitted. The Architect has authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes will be effected by written order signed by the Architect and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor. ARTICLE 8 TIME § 8.1 DEFINITIONS § 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work. § 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement. § 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 9.8. § 8.1.4 The term “day” as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. § 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION § 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement Contract the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 23 § 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing, prematurely commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required by Article 11 to be furnished by the Contractor and Owner. The date of commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the effective date of such insurance. § 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. § 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME § 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or the Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner; or by changes ordered in the Work; or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor’s control; or by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and arbitration; or by other causes that the Architect determines may justify delay, then the Contractor may request an extension in the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine. § 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15. § 8.3.3 This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION § 9.1 CONTRACT SUM The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement Contract and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. § 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES Where the Contract is based on a stipulated sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect, before the first Application for Payment, a schedule of values allocating the entire Contract Sum to the various portions of the Work and prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor’s Applications for Payment. § 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT § 9.3.1 At least ten (10) days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment prepared in accordance with the schedule of values, if required under Section 9.2, for completed portions of the Work. Such application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor’s right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers, and shall reflect retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents. § 9.3.1.1 As provided in Section 7.3.9, such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work that have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives, or by interim determinations of the Architect, but not yet included in Change Orders. § 9.3.1.2 Applications for Payment shall not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor does not intend to pay a Subcontractor or material supplier, unless such Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay. § 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner’s title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner’s interest, and shall include the costs of applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site. AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 24 § 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment, subject to any warranty provided in the Contract Documents. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor’s knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor, materials and equipment relating to the Work. § 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT § 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven (7) days after receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor and the Owner in writing of the Architect’s reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Section 9.5.1. § 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect’s evaluation of the Work and the data comprising the Application for Payment, that, to the best of the Architect’s knowledge, information and belief, the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However, the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on- site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor’s right to payment, or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. § 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION § 9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect’s opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 9.4.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application for Payment, the Architect will shall notify the Contractor and the Owner as provided in Section 9.4.1. If the Contractor and the Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect’s opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2, because of .1 defective Work not remedied; .2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor; .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or equipment; .4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; .5 damage to the Owner or a separate contractor; .6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or .7 repeated failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously withheld. § 9.5.3 If the Architect withholds certification for payment under Section 9.5.1.3, the Owner may, at its sole option, issue joint checks to the Contractor and to any Subcontractor or material or equipment suppliers to whom the Contractor failed to make payment for Work properly performed or material or equipment suitably delivered. If the AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 25 Owner makes payments by joint check, the Owner shall notify the Architect and the Architect will reflect such payment on the next Certificate for Payment. § 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS § 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Architect. § 9.6.2 The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor no later than seven (7) days after receipt of payment from the Owner the amount to which the Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of the Subcontractor’s portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner. § 9.6.3 The Architect willshall, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor. § 9.6.4 The Owner has the right to request written evidence from the Contractor that the Contractor has properly paid Subcontractors and material and equipment suppliers amounts paid by the Owner to the Contractor for subcontracted Work. If the Contractor fails to furnish such evidence within seven (7) days, the Owner shall have the right to contact Subcontractors to ascertain whether they have been properly paid. Neither the Owner nor the Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor, except as may otherwise be required by law. § 9.6.5 Contractor payments to material and equipment suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Sections 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and 9.6.4. § 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum, payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors and suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials, or both, under contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner. Nothing contained herein shall require money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor, shall create any fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust or shall entitle any person or entity to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision. § 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven (7) days after receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven (7)days after the date established in the Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by binding dispute resolution, then the Contractor may, upon seven (7) additional days’ written notice to the Owner and Architect, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable costs of shut-down, delay and start-up, plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents. § 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION § 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. § 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 26 § 9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect’s inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor’s list, which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, the Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect. In such case, the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion. § 9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will shall prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion that shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. § 9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. Upon such acceptance and consent of surety, if any, the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to such Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE § 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer as required under Section 11.3.1.5 and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Project. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and the Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, retainage, if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and the Contractor or, if no agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect. § 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, the Contractor and the Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work. § 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT § 9.10.1 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect’s knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect’s on-site visits and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect’s final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Section 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor’s being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled. § 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner’s property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least thirty (30) days’ prior written notice has been given to the Owner, (3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 27 by the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, if any, to final payment and (5), if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys’ fees. § 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. § 9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from .1 liens, Claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled; .2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; or .3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents. Intentionally omitted. § 9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY § 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. § 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY § 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to .1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby; .2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under care, custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor’s Subcontractors or Sub- subcontractors; and .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. § 10.2.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss. § 10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities. § 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. § 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 28 by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3, except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or the Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.18. § 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor’s organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor’s superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and the Architect. § 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to cause damage or create an unsafe condition. § 10.2.8 INJURY OR DAMAGE TO PERSON OR PROPERTY If either party suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible, written notice of such injury or damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding twenty-one (21) days after discovery. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter. § 10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS § 10.3.1 The Contractor is responsible for compliance with any requirements included in the Contract Documents regarding hazardous materials. If the Contractor encounters a hazardous material or substance not addressed in the Contract Documents and if reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner and the Architect in writing. § 10.3.2 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s written notice, the Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such material or substance is found to be present, to cause it to be rendered harmless. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and the Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of such material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of such material or substance. The Contractor and the Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner. If either the Contractor or the Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection. When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner and the Contractor. By Change Order, the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased in the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable additional costs of shut-down, delay and start-up. § 10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Subcontractors, Architect, Architect’s consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Section 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), except to the extent that such damage, loss or expense is due to the fault or negligence of the party seeking indemnityIntentionally omitted. § 10.3.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under this Section 10.3 for materials or substances the Contractor brings to the site unless such materials or substances are required by the Contract Documents. The Owner shall be responsible for materials or substances required by the Contract Documents, except to the extent of the Contractor’s fault or negligence in the use and handling of such materials or substances. § 10.3.5 The Contractor shall indemnify the Owner for the cost and expense the Owner incurs (1) for remediation of a material or substance the Contractor brings to the site and negligently handles, or (2) where the Contractor fails to AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 29 perform its obligations under Section 10.3.1, except to the extent that the cost and expense are due to the Owner’s fault or negligence. § 10.3.6 If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liable by a government agency for the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred. § 10.4 EMERGENCIES In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor’s discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Article 15 and Article 7. ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS § 11.1 CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY INSURANCE § 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor’s operations and completed operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: .1 Claims under workers’ compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts that are applicable to the Work to be performed; .2 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of the Contractor’s employees; .3 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than the Contractor’s employees; .4 Claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage; .5 Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property, including loss of use resulting therefrom; .6 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damage arising out of ownership, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle; and; .7 Claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations; and .8 Claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.18. § 11.1.2 The insurance required by Section 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. Coverages, whether written on an occurrence or claims-made basis, shall be maintained without interruption from the date of commencement of the Work until the date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment, and, with respect to the Contractor’s completed operations coverage, until the expiration of the period for correction of Work or for such other period for maintenance of completed operations coverage as specified in the Contract Documents. § 11.1.3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of each required policy of insurance. These certificates and the insurance policies required by this Section 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least thirty (30) days’ prior written notice has been given to the Owner. An additional certificate evidencing continuation of liability coverage, including coverage for completed operations, shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Section 9.10.2 and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of such coverage until the expiration of the time required by Section 11.1.2. Information concerning reduction of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate, or both, shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness. § 11.1.4 The Contractor shall cause the commercial liability coverage required by the Contract Documents to include (1) the Owner, the Architect and the Architect’s consultants as additional insureds for claims caused in whole or in part by the Contractor’s negligent acts or omissions during the Contractor’s operations; and (2) the Owner as an additional insured for claims caused in whole or in part by the Contractor’s negligent acts or omissions during the Contractor’s completed operations. AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 30 § 11.2 OWNER’S LIABILITY INSURANCE The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner’s usual liability insurance. § 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE § 11.3.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner Contractor shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance written on a builder’s risk “all-risk” or equivalent policy form in the amount of the initial Contract Sum, plus value of subsequent Contract Modifications and cost of materials supplied or installed by others, comprising total value for the entire Project at the site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles. Such property insurance shall be maintained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has been made as provided in Section 9.10 or until no person or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Section 11.3 to be covered, whichever is later. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors Subcontractors in the Project. § 11.3.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an “all-risk” or equivalent policy form and shall include, without limitation, insurance against the perils of fire (with extended coverage) and physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, earthquake, flood, windstorm, falsework, testing and startup, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect’s and Contractor’s services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss. § 11.3.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by the Contract and with all of the coverages in the amount described above, the Owner shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. The Contractor may then effect insurance that will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner. If the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or maintain insurance as described above, without so notifying the Contractor in writing, then the Owner shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto.Intentionally omitted. § 11.3.1.3 If the property insurance requires deductibles, the Owner Contractor shall pay costs not covered because of such deductibles. § 11.3.1.4 This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site, and also portions of the Work in transit. § 11.3.1.5 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Section 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance company or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or use by endorsement or otherwise. The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or companies and shall, without mutual written consent, take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that would cause cancellation, lapse or reduction of insurance. § 11.3.2 BOILER AND MACHINERY INSURANCE The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents or by law, which shall specifically cover such insured objects during installation and until final acceptance by the Owner; this insurance shall include interests of the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work, and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds.Intentionally omitted. AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 31 § 11.3.3 LOSS OF USE INSURANCE The Owner, at the Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner’s property due to fire or other hazards, however caused. The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner’s property, including consequential losses due to fire or other hazards however caused. § 11.3.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or other special causes of loss be included in the property insurance policy, the Owner shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order. § 11.3.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or both, at or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project, or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the construction period, the Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with the terms of Section 11.3.7 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance. All separate policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. § 11.3.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Owner shall file with the Contractor a copy of each policy that includes insurance coverages required by this Section 11.3. Each policy shall contain all generally applicable conditions, definitions, exclusions and endorsements related to this Project. Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire, and that its limits will not be reduced, until at least 30 days’ prior written notice has been given to the Contractor.Intentionally omitted. AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 32 § 11.3.7 WAIVERS OF SUBROGATION The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, and (2) the Architect, Architect’s consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this Section 11.3 or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the Architect, Architect’s consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and the subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees of any of them, by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged. § 11.3.8 A loss insured under the Owner’s property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11.3.10. The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar manner. § 11.3.9 If required in writing by a party in interest, the Owner as fiduciary shall, upon occurrence of an insured loss, give bond for proper performance of the Owner’s duties. The cost of required bonds shall be charged against proceeds received as fiduciary. The Owner shall deposit in a separate account proceeds so received, which the Owner shall distribute in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or as determined in accordance with the method of binding dispute resolution selected in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. If after such loss no other special agreement is made and unless the Owner terminates the Contract for convenience, replacement of damaged property shall be performed by the Contractor after notification of a Change in the Work in accordance with Article 7. § 11.3.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to the Owner’s exercise of this power; if such objection is made, the dispute shall be resolved in the manner selected by the Owner and Contractor as the method of binding dispute resolution in the Agreement. If the Owner and Contractor have selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution, the Owner as fiduciary shall make settlement with insurers or, in the case of a dispute over distribution of insurance proceeds, in accordance with the directions of the arbitrators. Intentionally omitted. § 11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND § 11.4.1 The Owner shall have the right to requirerequires the Contractor to furnish bonds covering faithful performance of the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipulated in bidding requirements or specifically required in the Contract Documents on the date of execution of the Contract. § 11.4.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall authorize a copy to be furnished. ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK § 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK § 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect’s request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if requested in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for the Architect’s examination and be replaced at the Contractor’s expense without change in the Contract Time. § 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered that the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, costs of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be at the Owner’s expense. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, such costs and the cost of correction shall be at the Contractor’s expense unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs. AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 33 § 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK § 12.2.1 BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections, the cost of uncovering and replacement, and compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the Contractor’s expense. § 12.2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION § 12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.5, if, within one yeartwo (2) years after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Section 9.9.1, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the onetwo (2)-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architectas directed, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.4. § 12.2.2.2 The onetwo (2)-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual completion of that portion of the Work. § 12.2.2.3 The onetwo (2)-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2. § 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work that are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. § 12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether completed or partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor’s correction or removal of Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations the Contractor has under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the onetwo (2)-year period for correction of Work as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor’s liability with respect to the Contractor’s obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. § 12.2.6 The rights and remedies of the Owner under this Contract are in addition to any other rights and remedies provided by law. The expiration of this Contract shall in no way limit the Owner’s legal or equitable remedies, or the period in which such remedies may be asserted, for work negligently or defectively performed. § 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK If the Owner prefers to accept Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS § 13.1 GOVERNING LAW AND VENUE The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located except that, if the parties have selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution, the Federal Arbitration Act shall govern Section 15.4 and venue for any legal action arising out of this Contract shall be in Eagle County, Colorado. AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 34 § 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS § 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Except as provided in Section 13.2.2, neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other. If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. § 13.2.2 The Owner may, without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to a lender providing construction financing for the Project, if the lender assumes the Owner’s rights and obligations under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate such assignment. § 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual, to a member of the firm or entity, or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended; or if delivered at, or sent by registered or certified mail or by courier service providing proof of delivery to, the last business address known to the party giving notice. § 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES § 13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. § 13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, the Architect or the Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach there under, except as may be specifically agreed in writing. § 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS § 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work shall be made as required by the Contract Documents and by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations or lawful orders of public authorities. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of (1) tests, inspections or approvals that do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded, and (2) tests, inspections or approvals where building codes or applicable laws or regulations prohibit the Owner from delegating their cost to the Contractor. § 13.5.2 If the Architect, the Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection or approval not included under Section 13.5.1, the Architect willshall, upon written authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such costs, except as provided in Section 13.5.3, shall be at the Owner’s expense. § 13.5.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval under Sections 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses shall be at the Contractor’s expense. § 13.5.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect. § 13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Architect will shall do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing. § 13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work. AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 35 § 13.6 INTEREST Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located.Intentionally omitted. § 13.7 TIME LIMITS ON CLAIMS The Owner and Contractor shall commence all claims and causes of action, whether in contract, tort, breach of warranty or otherwise, against the other arising out of or related to the Contract in accordance with the requirements of the final dispute resolution method selected in the Agreement within the time period specified by applicable law, but in any case not more than 10 years after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work. The Owner and Contractor waive all claims and causes of action not commenced in accordance with this Section 13.7.Intentionally omitted. § 13.8 CONTRACTOR-OWNER RELATIONSHIP In performing its obligations under this Agreement, the Contractor shall be deemed an independent contractor and not an agent or employee of the Owner. § 13.9 AGREEMENT TERMS If any term, covenant or condition of the Contract Documents, or the application thereof to any persons or circumstance shall to any extent be invalid or unenforceable, then the remainder of the Construction Documents or the application of the term, covenant, or condition to persons or circumstances other than those as to which it is held invalid or unenforceable shall not be affected thereby, and each term, covenant and condition of the Construction Documents shall be valid and enforceable to the fullest extent permitted by law. § 13.10 GOVERNMENTAL IMMUNITY The Owner and its officers, attorneys and employees, are relying on, and do not waive or intend to waive by any provision of this Contract, the monetary limitations or any other rights, immunities, and protections provided by the Colorado Governmental Immunity Act, C.R.S. § 24-10-101, et seq., as amended, or otherwise available to the Owner and its officers, attorneys or employees. § 13.11 ANNUAL APPROPRIATION Consistent with Article X, § 20 of the Colorado Constitution, any financial obligation of the Owner not performed during the current fiscal year is subject to annual appropriation, shall extend only to monies currently appropriated, and shall not constitute a mandatory charge, requirement, debt or liability beyond the current fiscal year. ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT § 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR § 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of thirty (30) consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, for any of the following reasons: .1 Issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction that requires all Work to be stopped; .2 An act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency that requires all Work to be stopped; .3 Because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1, or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents; or .4 The Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly, upon the Contractor’s request, reasonable evidence as required by Section 2.2.1. § 14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if, through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, repeated suspensions, delays or interruptions of the entire Work by the Owner as described in Section 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion, or 120 days in any 365-day period, whichever is lessIntentionally omitted. § 14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Section 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists, the Contractor may, upon seven days’ written notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 36 executed, including reasonable overhead and profit, costs incurred by reason of such termination, and damagesIntentionally omitted. § 14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of sixty (60) consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor, or a Subcontractor, or a Sub-Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract with the Contractor because the Owner has repeatedly failed to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven (7) additional days’ written notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Section 14.1.3. § 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE § 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor .1 repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials; .2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors; .3 repeatedly disregards applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of a public authority; or .4 otherwise is guilty of substantial a breach of a provision of the Contract Documents. § 14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist, the Owner, upon certification by the Initial Decision Maker that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor’s surety, if any, seven (7) days’ written notice, terminate employment of the Contractorthis Contract and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety: .1 Exclude the Contractor from the site and take possession of all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor; .2 Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4; and .3 Finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon written request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work. § 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.2.1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finishedIntentionally omitted. § 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Initial Decision Maker, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. § 14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE § 14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. § 14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspension, delay or interruption as described in Section 14.3.1. Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit. No adjustment shall be made to the extent .1 that performance is, was or would have been so suspended, delayed or interrupted by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible; or .2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract. § 14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE § 14.4.1 The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract for the Owner’s convenience and without cause. § 14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner’s convenience, the Contractor shall .1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice; AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 37 .2 take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work; and .3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice, terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts and purchase orders. § 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner’s convenience, the Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment for Work executed, and costs incurred by reason of such termination, along with reasonable overhead and profit on the Work not executed. ARTICLE 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES § 15.1 CLAIMS § 15.1.1 DEFINITION A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, payment of money, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term “Claim” also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. § 15.1.2 NOTICE OF CLAIMS Claims by either the Owner or the Contractor must be initiated by written notice to the other party and to the Initial Decision Maker with a copy sent to the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker. Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later. § 15.1.3 CONTINUING CONTRACT PERFORMANCE Pending final resolution of a Claim, except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Section 9.7 and Article 14, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Architect will prepare Change Orders and issue Certificates for Payment in accordance with the decisions of the Initial Decision Maker. § 15.1.4 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COST If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, written notice as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Section 10.4. § 15.1.5 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL TIME § 15.1.5.1 If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, written notice as provided herein shall be given. The Contractor’s Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work. In the case of a continuing delay, only one Claim is necessary. § 15.1.5.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time, could not have been reasonably anticipated and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. § 15.1.6 CLAIMS FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract. This mutual waiver includes .1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing, business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons; and .2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and reputation, and for loss of profit except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work. This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages due to either party’s termination in accordance with Article 14. Nothing contained in this Section 15.1.6 shall be deemed to preclude an award of liquidated damages, when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Intentionally omitted. AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 38 § 15.2 INITIAL DECISION § 15.2.1 Claims, excluding those arising under Sections 10.3, 10.4, 11.3.9, and 11.3.10, shall be referred to the Initial Decision Maker for initial decision. The Architect will serve as the Initial Decision Maker, unless otherwise indicated in the Agreement. Except for those Claims excluded by this Section 15.2.1, an initial decision shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation of any Claim arising prior to the date final payment is due, unless thirty (30) days have passed after the Claim has been referred to the Initial Decision Maker with no decision having been rendered. Unless the Initial Decision Maker and all affected parties agree, the Initial Decision Maker will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner. § 15.2.2 The Initial Decision Maker will review Claims and within ten (10) days of the receipt of a Claim take one or more of the following actions: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party, (2) reject the Claim in whole or in part, (3) approve the Claim, (4) suggest a compromise, or (5) advise the parties that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim if the Initial Decision Maker lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Initial Decision Maker concludes that, in the Initial Decision Maker’s sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Initial Decision Maker to resolve the Claim. § 15.2.3 In evaluating Claims, the Initial Decision Maker may, but shall not be obligated to, consult with or seek information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Initial Decision Maker in rendering a decision. The Initial Decision Maker may request the Owner to authorize retention of such persons at the Owner’s expense. § 15.2.4 If the Initial Decision Maker requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data, such party shall respond, within ten (10) days after receipt of such request, and shall either (1) provide a response on the requested supporting data, (2) advise the Initial Decision Maker when the response or supporting data will be furnished or (3) advise the Initial Decision Maker that no supporting data will be furnished. Upon receipt of the response or supporting data, if any, the Initial Decision Maker will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part. § 15.2.5 The Initial Decision Maker will render an initial decision approving or rejecting the Claim, or indicating that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim. This initial decision shall (1) be in writing; (2) state the reasons therefor; and (3) notify the parties and the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker, of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The initial decision shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and, if the parties fail to resolve their dispute through mediation, to binding dispute resolution. § 15.2.6 Either party may file for mediation of an initial decision at any time, subject to the terms of Section 15.2.6.1. § 15.2.6.1 Either party may, within 30 days from the date of an initial decision, demand in writing that the other party file for mediation within 60 days of the initial decision. If such a demand is made and the party receiving the demand fails to file for mediation within the time required, then both parties waive their rights to mediate or pursue binding dispute resolution proceedings with respect to the initial decision. § 15.2.7 In the event of a Claim against the Contractor, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if any, of the nature and amount of the Claim. If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor’s default, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety’s assistance in resolving the controversy. § 15.2.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic’s lien, the party asserting such Claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines. AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 13:39:02 on 06/02/2015 under Order No.8915219575_1 which expires on 09/03/2015, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1282960205) 39 § 15.3 MEDIATION § 15.3.1 Claims, disputes, or other matters in controversy arising out of or related to the Contract except those waived as provided for in Sections 9.10.4, 9.10.5, and 15.1.6 shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to binding dispute resolution. § 15.3.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Mediation Procedures in effect on the date of the Agreement. A request for mediation shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the mediation. The request may be made concurrently with the filing of binding dispute resolution proceedings but, in such event, mediation shall proceed in advance of binding dispute resolution proceedings, which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing, unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order. If an arbitration is stayed pursuant to this Section 15.3.2, the parties may nonetheless proceed to the selection of the arbitrator(s) and agree upon a schedule for later proceedings. § 15.3.3 The parties shall share the mediator’s fee and any filing fees equally. The mediation shall be held in the place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereofIntentionally omitted. § 15.4 ARBITRATION § 15.4.1 If the parties have selected arbitration as the method for binding dispute resolution in the Agreement, any Claim subject to, but not resolved by, mediation shall be subject to arbitration which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Arbitration Rules in effect on the date of the Agreement. A demand for arbitration shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the arbitration. The party filing a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration is permitted to be demanded. § 15.4.1.1 A demand for arbitration shall be made no earlier than concurrently with the filing of a request for mediation, but in no event shall it be made after the date when the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. For statute of limitations purposes, receipt of a written demand for arbitration by the person or entity administering the arbitration shall constitute the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim. § 15.4.2 The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. § 15.4.3 The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to the Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. § 15.4.4 CONSOLIDATION OR JOINDER § 15.4.4.1 Either party, at its sole discretion, may consolidate an arbitration conducted under this Agreement with any other arbitration to which it is a party provided that (1) the arbitration agreement governing the other arbitration permits consolidation, (2) the arbitrations to be consolidated substantially involve common questions of law or fact, and (3) the arbitrations employ materially similar procedural rules and methods for selecting arbitrator(s). § 15.4.4.2 Either party, at its sole discretion, may include by joinder persons or entities substantially involved in a common question of law or fact whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration, provided that the party sought to be joined consents in writing to such joinder. Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of any claim, dispute or other matter in question not described in the written consent. § 15.4.4.3 The Owner and Contractor grant to any person or entity made a party to an arbitration conducted under this Section 15.4, whether by joinder or consolidation, the same rights of joinder and consolidation as the Owner and Contractor under this Agreement.Intentionally omitted. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SUMMARY 011000 - 1 SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Access to site. 4. Coordination with occupants. 5. Work restrictions. 6. Specification and drawing conventions. 7. Miscellaneous provisions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Identification: Vail Clubhouse Renovations and Additions. 1. Project Location: 1775 Sunburst Drive, Vail, Colorado, 81657. B. Owner: Town of Vail. 1. Owner's Representative: Greg, Hall, Director of Public Works, Town of Vail Public Works, 1309 Elkhorn Drive, Vail, CO 81657. C. Architect: Timothy Losa, AIA, Zehren and Associates, Inc., PO Box 1976, Avon, CO 81620. D. Architect's Consultants: The Architect has retained the following design professionals who have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents: 1. Civil Engineer, Tom Marcin, Marcin Engineering PO Box 1062, Avon, CO 81620. 2. Structural Engineering, Hannes Spaeh, Monroe and Newell Consulting Engineers, Inc., PO Box 1597, Avon, CO 81620 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SUMMARY 011000 - 2 3. Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing Engineering, Stan Humphries, Architectural Engineering Consultants, Inc., PO Box 8489, Avon, CO 81620. 4. Landscape Architect, Zehren and Associates, Inc., PO Box 1976, Avon, CO 81620. 5. Interior Design, Zehren and Associates, Inc., PO Box 1976, Avon, CO 81620 E. Deferred Building Permit Documents prepared by Contractor's Consultants: The Contractor shall retain the following design professionals who can prepare designated portions of the Contract Documents: 1. Structural Engineer, Prefabricated wood roof trusses. 2. Fire Sprinkler Engineering. 3. Fire Alarm Design. 4. Audio-Visual, Security, Communications Design. F. Contractor: Chris Evans; Evans Chaffee Construction Group. G. Construction Manager: Chris Penney, NV5. 1. Construction Manager has been engaged for this Project to serve as an advisor to Owner and to provide assistance in administering the Contract for Construction between Owner and Contractor, according to a separate contract between Owner and Construction Manager. H. Consultants retained by the Owner: 1. Geotechnical Engineer. 2. Commissioning Agent. 3. Photovoltaic Consultant. 1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: 1. A 21,860 square foot renovation and addition to the Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse including new gold cart storage, commercial kitchens , restaurant, bar and community function (banquet) areas. The Occupancy Classification is A-2 (Assembly) and Construction Type in Type VB – Sprinklered. B. Type of Contract: 1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SUMMARY 011000 - 3 1.5 ACCESS TO SITE A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as indicated on the Contractor’s Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section. B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Limits: Limit site disturbance, including earthwork and clearing of vegetation, to 40 feet (12.2 m) beyond building perimeter; 10 feet (3 m) beyond surface walkways, patios, surface parking, and utilities less than 12 inches (300 mm) in diameter; 15 feet (4.5 m) beyond primary roadway curbs and main utility branch trenches; and 25 feet (7.6 m) beyond constructed areas with permeable surfaces (such as pervious paving areas, stormwater detention facilities, and playing fields) that require additional staging areas in order to limit compaction in the constructed area. 2. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways and loading areas, and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. 1.6 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and adjacent building(s) during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated. 1. Maintain access to existing walkways and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and approval of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Notify Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of activities that will affect Owner's operations. B. Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and limited occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 1. The Owner anticipates Limited Occupancy of the “Cart Barn” portion of the Work, north of Ramp 030 and east of Hallway 029. 2. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied prior to Owner acceptance of the completed Work. 3. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before limited Owner occupancy. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SUMMARY 011000 - 4 4. Before limited Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of Work. 5. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of Work. 1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated or required. C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Construction Manager and Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions. D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner. 1. Notify Construction Manager and Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. E. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet (8 m) of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes. F. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site is not permitted. 1.8 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SUMMARY 011000 - 5 B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings. 3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 011000 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ALLOWANCES 012100 - 1 SECTION 012100 - ALLOWANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances. 1. Certain items are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when direction will be provided to Contractor. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order. B. Types of allowances include the following: 1. Lump-sum allowances. 2. Unit-cost allowances. 3. Quantity allowances. 4. Contingency allowances. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012200 "Unit Prices" for procedures for using unit prices. 1.3 SELECTION AND PURCHASE A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work. B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work. C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ALLOWANCES 012100 - 2 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance. B. Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor time and cost for installation of allowance items that include installation as part of the allowance. C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to coordinate installation. 1.7 LUMP-SUM UNIT-COST AND QUANTITY ALLOWANCES A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner or selected by Architect under allowance and shall include taxes, freight, and delivery to Project site. B. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance. C. Unused Materials: Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted. 1. If requested by Architect, retain and prepare unused material for storage by Owner. Deliver unused material to Owner's storage space as directed. 1.8 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES A. Use the contingency allowance only as directed by Architect for Owner's purposes and only by Change Orders that indicate amounts to be charged to the allowance. B. Contractor's overhead, profit, and related costs for products and equipment ordered by Owner under the contingency allowance are included in the allowance and are not part of the Contract Sum. These costs include delivery, installation, taxes, insurance, equipment rental, and similar costs. C. Change Orders authorizing use of funds from the contingency allowance will include Contractor's related costs and reasonable overhead and profit margins. D. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the contingency allowance to Owner by Change Order. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ALLOWANCES 012100 - 3 1.9 ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, prepare a Change Order proposal based on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work-in-place where applicable. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins. 1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance. 2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead costs and other margins claimed. 3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change Orders related to unit-cost allowances. 4. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent quantity survey, measure, or count. B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. 1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents. 2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower- priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work. END OF SECTION 012100 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 UNIT PRICES 012200 - 1 SECTION 012200 - UNIT PRICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders. 2. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for general testing and inspecting requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Unit price is an amount incorporated in the Agreement, applicable during the duration of the Work as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment, or services, or a portion of the Work, added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if the scope of Work or estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, applicable taxes, overhead, and profit. B. Measurement and Payment: See individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections. C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor. D. List of Unit Prices: A schedule of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 UNIT PRICES 012200 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012200 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ALTERNATES 012300 - 1 SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement. 2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates. C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ALTERNATES 012300 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012300 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 1 SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012100 "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance. 2. Section 012300 "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate. 3. Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms. 2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 2 b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from ICC-ES. j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor through Construction Manager of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 3 1.6 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed unless otherwise indicated. C. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after the Notice of Award. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 4 c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. d. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. e. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. f. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. g. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. i. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. j. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012500 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 1 SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after the Contract award. 1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue through Construction Manager supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Construction Manager are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request or 20 days, when not otherwise specified, after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 2 finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. e. Quotation Form: Use CSI Form 13.6D, "Proposal Worksheet Summary," and Form 13.6C, "Proposal Worksheet Detail." Or forms acceptable to Construction Manager. B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Construction Manager. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. 7. Proposal Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.6A, "Change Order Request (Proposal)," with attachments CSI Form 13.6D, "Proposal Worksheet Summary," and Form 13.6C, "Proposal Worksheet Detail" or forms acceptable to Construction Manager. 1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS A. Allowance Adjustment: See Section 012100 "Allowances" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of allowances. B. Unit-Price Adjustment: See Section 012200 "Unit Prices" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect measured scope of unit-price work. 1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Construction Manager will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 3 1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Work Change Directive: Construction Manager may issue a Work Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Work Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Work Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Work Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012600 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 1 SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012100 "Allowances" for procedural requirements governing the handling and processing of allowances. 2. Section 012200 "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements governing the use of unit prices. 3. Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 4. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 2 2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect through Construction Manager at earliest possible date, but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum. a. Include separate line items under principal subcontracts for Project closeout requirements in an amount totaling five percent of the Contract Sum and subcontract amount. 4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required, include evidence of insurance. 6. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities. 8. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 3 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and Construction Manager and paid for by Owner. 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. C. Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Architect by the 28th day of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month. 1. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment seven days prior to due date for review by Architect. D. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702/CMa and AIA Document G703 or forms acceptable to Construction Manager and Owner. Submit forms for approval with initial submittal of schedule of values. E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Construction Manager will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment. 3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. 4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration. F. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. 1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials. 2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials. 3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following: a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applications for Payment. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 4 b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment. c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment. G. Transmittal: Submit scanned, signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Construction Manager. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. H. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. 5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms, acceptable to Owner. I. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Combined Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final) incorporating Work of multiple contracts, with indication of acceptance of schedule by each Contractor. 5. Products list (preliminary if not final). 6. Schedule of unit prices. 7. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 8. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 9. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 10. Copies of building permits. 11. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 12. Initial progress report. 13. Report of preconstruction conference. 14. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 15. Performance and payment bonds. 16. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 5 J. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. K. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 3. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 4. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 5. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment,” if required. 6. Evidence that claims have been settled. 7. Final liquidated damages settlement statement, if required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012900 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1 SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. Requests for Information (RFIs). 4. Project meetings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Section 017300 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract. 4. Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements" for coordinating the Work with Owner's Commissioning Authority. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Owner, Construction Manager, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 2 site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times. 1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. C. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste. 1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property. 1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 3 required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity. 1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components. b. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings by multiple contractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review. c. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation. e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls. f. Indicate required installation sequences. g. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows: 1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work. 2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components. 3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment. 4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. 5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items. 6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following: a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems. b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 4 7. Electrical Work: Show the following: a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) in diameter and larger. b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire- alarm locations. c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor control center locations. d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines. 8. Fire-Protection System: Show the following: a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads. 9. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit. 10. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints according to requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." C. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the following requirements: 1. File Preparation Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as original Drawings. 2. File Preparation Format: DWG Version ,operating in Microsoft Windows operating system. 3. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using Portable Data File (PDF) format. 4. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in preparing coordination digital data files. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to Drawings. b. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of AIA Document C106. 1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs) A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 5 B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect and Construction Manager. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches. C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716 or Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, acceptable to Architect. 1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. D. Architect's and Construction Manager's Action: Architect and Construction Manager will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect or Construction Manager after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures." Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 6 a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect and Construction Manager in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response. E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Use CSI Log Form 13.2B or Software log with not less than the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect and Construction Manager. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's and Construction Manager's response was received. F. On receipt of Architect's and Construction Manager's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect and Construction Manager within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response. 1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner, Construction Manager, and Architect, within three days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. 1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority, , Construction Manager, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 7 b. Phasing. c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Lines of communications. f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. g. Procedures for RFIs. h. Procedures for testing and inspecting. i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. j. Distribution of the Contract Documents. k. Submittal procedures. l. Preparation of record documents. m. Use of the premises and existing building. n. Work restrictions. o. Working hours. p. Owner's occupancy requirements. q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. r. Procedures for moisture and mold control. s. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. t. Construction waste management and recycling. u. Parking availability. v. Office, work, and storage areas. w. Equipment deliveries and priorities. x. First aid. y. Security. z. Progress cleaning. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect, Construction Manager , and Owner's Commissioning Authority of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility requirements. k. Time schedules. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 8 l. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written instructions. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 30 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion. 1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority, Construction Manager, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following: a. Preparation of record documents. b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final inspection for acceptance. c. Submittal of written warranties. d. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data. e. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts. f. Requirements for demonstration and training. g. Preparation of Contractor's punch list. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and for final payment. i. Submittal procedures. j. Coordination of separate contracts. k. Owner's partial occupancy requirements. l. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 9 m. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls. 4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. E. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular intervals. 1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority, Construction Manager, and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Resolution of component conflicts. 4) Status of submittals. 5) Deliveries. 6) Off-site fabrication. 7) Access. 8) Site utilization. 9) Temporary facilities and controls. 10) Progress cleaning. 11) Quality and work standards. 12) Status of correction of deficient items. 13) Field observations. 14) Status of RFIs. 15) Status of proposal requests. 16) Pending changes. 17) Status of Change Orders. 18) Pending claims and disputes. 19) Documentation of information for payment requests. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 10 a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 013100 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1 SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Startup construction schedule. 2. Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Construction schedule updating reports. 4. Daily construction reports. 5. Site condition reports. 6. Special reports. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 2. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project. C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. D. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. E. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 2 1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date. 2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity. 3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date. F. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format: 1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated. 2. PDF electronic file. 3. Two paper copies. B. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities. C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period. D. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days. 1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float. E. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment. F. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at monthly intervals. G. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions. H. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event. I. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 3 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and reporting, with capability of producing CPM reports and diagrams within 24 hours of Owner’s request. B. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's construction schedule, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports. 2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule. 3. Discuss constraints, including area separations, interim milestones and partial Owner occupancy. 4. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products. 5. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 6. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 7. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting agencies. 8. Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures, including commissioning activities. 9. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. 10. Review procedures for updating schedule. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice of Award to date of final completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following: Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 4 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule. 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's and Construction Manager's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items and final completion. C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Section 011000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 2. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Section 011000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 3. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Uninterruptible services. c. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. d. Use of premises restrictions. e. Seasonal variations. f. Environmental control. 4. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. c. Purchases. d. Mockups. e. Fabrication. f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries. h. Installation. i. Tests and inspections. j. Adjusting. k. Curing. D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 5 E. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues: 1. Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered Requests for Information. 3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 4. Notations on returned submittals. 5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time. F. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished. G. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules. 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE) A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format. B. Startup Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for the Notice of Award. Outline significant construction activities for the first 90 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work. 1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 60 days after date established for the Notice of Award. a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule. 2. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the startup network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths. 1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Mobilization and demobilization. c. Purchase of materials. d. Delivery. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 6 e. Fabrication. f. Utility interruptions. g. Installation. h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. i. Testing and commissioning. j. Punch list and final completion. k. Activities occurring following final completion. 2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. 3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. 4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges. E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. F. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 2. Description of activity. 3. Main events of activity. 4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 5. Early and late start dates. 6. Early and late finish dates. 7. Activity duration in workdays. 8. Total float or slack time. 9. Average size of workforce. 10. Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the schedule of values). G. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Identification of activities that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 7 2.3 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or snow. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (see special reports). 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Work Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized. B. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 2.4 SPECIAL REPORTS A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day(s) of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Scheduling Consultant: Engage a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting using CPM scheduling. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 8 1. In-House Option: Owner may waive the requirement to retain a consultant if Contractor employs skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and reporting techniques. Submit qualifications. 2. Meetings: Scheduling consultant shall attend all meetings related to Project progress, alleged delays, and time impact. B. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals corresponding to applications for payment, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. C. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Construction Manager, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 013200 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - 1 SECTION 013233 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Preconstruction photographs. 2. Periodic construction photographs. 3. Final completion construction photographs. 4. Periodic construction video recordings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012200 "Unit Prices" for procedures for unit prices for extra photographs. 2. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation. 3. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel. 4. Section 024119 "Selective Structure Demolition" for photographic documentation before selective demolition operations commence. 5. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for photographic documentation before site clearing operations commence. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph. Indicate elevation or story of construction. Include same information as corresponding photographic documentation. B. Digital Photographs: Submit image files within three days of taking photographs. 1. Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of 8 megapixels. 2. Format: Minimum 3200 by 2400 pixels, in unaltered original files, with same aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped, date and time stamped, in folder named by date of photograph, accompanied by key plan file. 3. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file metadata tag: a. Name of Project. b. Name and contact information for photographer. c. Name of Contractor. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - 2 d. Date photograph was taken. e. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction. f. Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan. 1.4 USAGE RIGHTS A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner for unlimited reproduction of photographic documentation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor size of 8 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 3200 by 2400 pixels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. Photographer: Engage a qualified photographer to take construction photographs. B. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted. 1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic location. C. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software. 1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image. 2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same manner as those submitted to Architect and Construction Manager. D. Preconstruction Photographs: Before commencement of demolition, take photographs of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points, as directed by Construction Manager. 1. Flag construction limits before taking construction photographs. 2. Take 20 photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting the Work. 3. Take 20 photographs of adjoining property to accurately record physical conditions at start of construction. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - 3 4. Take additional photographs as required to record settlement or cracking of adjacent structures, pavements, and improvements. E. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take 8 photographs weekly, with timing each month adjusted to coincide with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select same vantage points each week to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. F. Architect Directed Construction Photographs: From time to time, Architect will instruct photographer about number and frequency of photographs and general directions on vantage points. Select actual vantage points and take photographs to show the status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. END OF SECTION 013233 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1 SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the schedule of values. 2. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals." B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals." C. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 2 corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts and Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule. a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals. 4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format: a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's and Construction Manager's final release or approval. g. Scheduled date of fabrication. h. Scheduled dates for purchasing. i. Scheduled dates for installation. j. Activity or event number. 1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. 1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings. b. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of AIA Document C106, Digital Data Licensing Agreement or Agreement form acceptable to Owner and Architect. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 3 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. 4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. 5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 15 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor. D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A). 3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use software-generated form from electronic project management software or electronic form acceptable to Owner, containing the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 4 e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. h. Category and type of submittal. i. Submittal purpose and description. j. Specification Section number and title. k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. l. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. n. Related physical samples submitted directly. o. Indication of full or partial submittal. p. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. r. Other necessary identification. s. Remarks. 5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file metadata: a. Project name. b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. c. Manufacturer name. d. Product name. E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect. F. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal. G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. I. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1. Post electronic submittals greater than 8 MB as PDF electronic files directly to Project Share file site specifically established for Project. a. Notify Architect via email of posting. b. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 2. Submit electronic submittals smaller than 8 MB via email as PDF electronic files. a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 3. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information. 4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 6 5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm), but no larger than 30 by 42 inches (750 by 1067 mm). 3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item. 3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record. 4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality- control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 7 b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit two sets of Samples. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project record sample. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three samples that show approximate limits of variations. E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated. 2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space. 5. Submit product schedule in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation." H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section 012900 "Payment Procedures." Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 8 I. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements." J. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." K. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data." L. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified. M. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. N. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. O. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. P. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Q. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. R. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. S. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. T. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: 1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 9 7. Limitations of use. U. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. V. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. W. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. X. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. 2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 10 C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action. B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect. D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. END OF SECTION 013300 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 013516 - 1 SECTION 013516 - ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes special procedures for alteration work. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Alteration Work: This term includes remodeling, renovation, repair, and maintenance work performed within existing spaces or on existing surfaces as part of the Project. B. Consolidate: To strengthen loose or deteriorated materials in place. C. Design Reference Sample: A sample that represents the Architect's prebid selection of work to be matched; it may be existing work or work specially produced for the Project. D. Dismantle: To remove by disassembling or detaching an item from a surface, using gentle methods and equipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing of items unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. E. Match: To blend with adjacent construction and manifest no apparent difference in material type, species, cut, form, detail, color, grain, texture, or finish; as approved by Architect. F. Refinish: To remove existing finishes to base material and apply new finish to match original, or as otherwise indicated. G. Repair: To correct damage and defects, retaining existing materials, features, and finishes. This includes patching, piecing-in, splicing, consolidating, or otherwise reinforcing or upgrading materials. H. Replace: To remove, duplicate, and reinstall entire item with new material. The original item is the pattern for creating duplicates unless otherwise indicated. I. Replicate: To reproduce in exact detail, materials, and finish unless otherwise indicated. J. Reproduce: To fabricate a new item, accurate in detail to the original, and from either the same or a similar material as the original, unless otherwise indicated. K. Retain: To keep existing items that are not to be removed or dismantled. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 013516 - 2 L. Strip: To remove existing finish down to base material unless otherwise indicated. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Pedestrian and Vehicular Circulation: Coordinate alteration work with circulation patterns within Project building(s) and site. Some work is near circulation patterns and adjacent to restricted areas. Circulation patterns cannot be closed off entirely and in places can be only temporarily redirected around small areas of work. Access to restricted areas may not be obstructed. Plan and execute the Work accordingly. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Preconstruction Documentation: Show preexisting conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements that are to remain, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by Contractor's alteration work operations. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Specialist Qualifications: An experienced firm regularly engaged in specialty work similar in nature, materials, design, and extent to alteration work as specified in each Section and that has completed a minimum of five recent projects with a record of successful in-service performance that demonstrates the firm's qualifications to perform this work. 1. Field Supervisor Qualifications: Full-time supervisors experienced in specialty work similar in nature, material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supervisors shall be on-site when specialty work begins and during its progress. Supervisors shall not be changed during Project except for causes beyond the control of the specialist firm. B. Safety and Health Standard: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6. 1.7 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF SALVAGED MATERIALS A. Existing Materials to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling from construction work. Where permitted by Architect, items may be dismantled and taken to a suitable, protected storage location during construction work and reinstalled in their original locations after alteration and other construction work in the vicinity is complete. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions that affect the Work by use of measured drawings and preconstruction photographs. B. Discrepancies: Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with removal and dismantling work. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 013516 - 3 C. Owner's Removals: Before beginning alteration work, verify in correspondence with Owner that the all items have been removed: D. Size Limitations in Existing Spaces: Materials, products, and equipment used for performing the Work and for transporting debris, materials, and products shall be of sizes that clear surfaces within existing spaces, areas, rooms, and openings, including temporary protection, by 12 inches (300 mm) or more. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PROTECTION A. Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building, building site, plants, and surrounding buildings from harm resulting from alteration work. 1. Use only proven protection methods, appropriate to each area and surface being protected. 2. Provide temporary barricades, barriers, and directional signage to exclude the public from areas where alteration work is being performed. 3. Erect temporary barriers to form and maintain fire-egress routes. 4. Erect temporary protective covers over walkways and at points of pedestrian and vehicular entrance and exit that must remain in service during alteration work. 5. Contain dust and debris generated by alteration work, and prevent it from reaching the public or adjacent surfaces. 6. Provide shoring, bracing, and supports as necessary. Do not overload structural elements. 7. Protect floors and other surfaces along hauling routes from damage, wear, and staining. B. Temporary Protection of Materials to Remain: 1. Protect existing materials with temporary protections and construction. Do not remove existing materials unless otherwise indicated. 2. Do not attach temporary protection to existing surfaces except as indicated as part of the alteration work program. C. Comply with each product manufacturer's written instructions for protections and precautions. Protect against adverse effects of products and procedures on people and adjacent materials, components, and vegetation. D. Utility and Communications Services: 1. Notify Owner, Architect, authorities having jurisdiction, and entities owning or controlling wires, conduits, pipes, and other services affected by alteration work before commencing operations. 2. Disconnect and cap pipes and services as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as required for alteration work. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 013516 - 4 3. Maintain existing services unless otherwise indicated; keep in service, and protect against damage during operations. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities. E. Existing Drains: Prior to the start of work in an area, test drainage system to ensure that it is functioning properly. Notify Architect immediately of inadequate drainage or blockage. Do not begin work in an area until the drainage system is functioning properly. 1. Prevent solids such as adhesive or mortar residue or other debris from entering the drainage system. Clean out drains and drain lines that become sluggish or blocked by sand or other materials resulting from alteration work. 2. Protect drains from pollutants. Block drains or filter out sediments, allowing only clean water to pass. 3.2 PROTECTION FROM FIRE A. General: Follow fire-prevention plan and the following: 1. Comply with NFPA 241 requirements unless otherwise indicated. 2. Remove and keep area free of combustibles, including rubbish, paper, waste, and chemicals, unless necessary for the immediate work. a. If combustible material cannot be removed, provide fire blankets to cover such materials. B. Heat-Generating Equipment and Combustible Materials: Comply with the following procedures while performing work with heat-generating equipment or combustible materials, including welding, torch-cutting, soldering, brazing, removing paint with heat, or other operations where open flames or implements using high heat or combustible solvents and chemicals are anticipated: 1. As far as practicable, restrict heat-generating equipment to shop areas or outside the building. 2. Do not perform work with heat-generating equipment in or near rooms or in areas where flammable liquids or explosive vapors are present or thought to be present. Use a combustible gas indicator test to ensure that the area is safe. 3. Use fireproof baffles to prevent flames, sparks, hot gases, or other high-temperature material from reaching surrounding combustible material. 4. Prevent the spread of sparks and particles of hot metal through open windows, doors, holes, and cracks in floors, walls, ceilings, roofs, and other openings. C. Fire-Control Devices: Provide and maintain fire extinguishers, fire blankets, and rag buckets for disposal of rags with combustible liquids. Maintain each as suitable for the type of fire risk in each work area. Ensure that nearby personnel and the fire-watch personnel are trained in fire- extinguisher and blanket use. 3.3 PROTECTION DURING APPLICATION OF CHEMICALS A. Protect motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building, building site, plants, and surrounding buildings from harm or spillage resulting from applications of chemicals and adhesives. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 013516 - 5 B. Cover adjacent surfaces with protective materials that are proven to resist chemicals selected for Project unless chemicals being used will not damage adjacent surfaces as indicated in alteration work program. Use covering materials and masking agents that are waterproof and UV resistant and that will not stain or leave residue on surfaces to which they are applied. Apply protective materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply liquid masking agents or adhesives to painted or porous surfaces. When no longer needed, promptly remove protective materials. C. Do not apply chemicals during winds of sufficient force to spread them to unprotected surfaces. D. Neutralize alkaline and acid wastes and legally dispose of off Owner's property. E. Collect and dispose of runoff from chemical operations by legal means and in a manner that prevents soil contamination, soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping, or water penetration into building interior. 3.4 GENERAL ALTERATION WORK A. Have specialty work performed only by qualified specialists. B. Ensure that supervisory personnel are present when work begins and during its progress. C. Record existing work before each procedure (preconstruction), and record progress during the work. Use digital preconstruction documentation photographs. D. Perform surveys of Project site as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from alterations. E. Notify Architect of visible changes in the integrity of material or components whether from environmental causes including biological attack, UV degradation, freezing, or thawing or from structural defects including cracks, movement, or distortion. 1. Do not proceed with the work in question until directed by Architect. END OF SECTION 013516 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1 SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality- assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, Commissioning Authority, Construction Manager, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect . C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 2 1. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies constructed at testing facility to verify performance characteristics. D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop. G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s). J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 3 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required. 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service. 1.6 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 4 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 5 G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following: 1. Contractor responsibilities include the following: a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements. 2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect and Commissioning Authority, through Construction Manager, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. K. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect and Construction Manager seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that will be employed during the construction at Project. 4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 6 a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup. 6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated. 1.8 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 7 E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, Commissioning Authority, Construction Manager, and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect, Commissioning Authority, Construction Manager, and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality- control services required by the Contract Documents. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses. 1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, Commissioning Authority, Construction Manager, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 8 1.9 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency and/or a special inspector as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows: 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Architect, Commissioning Authority, Construction Manager, and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect and Commissioning Authority, through Construction Manager, with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's, Commissioning Authority's, and Construction Manager's reference during normal working hours. 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300 "Execution." Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 9 B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION 014000 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 REFERENCES 014200 - 1 SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 REFERENCES 014200 - 2 B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. 1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States." B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. AABC - Associated Air Balance Council; www.aabc.com. 2. AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association; www.aamanet.org. 3. AAPFCO - Association of American Plant Food Control Officials; www.aapfco.org. 4. AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials; www.transportation.org. 5. AATCC - American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists; www.aatcc.org. 6. ABMA - American Bearing Manufacturers Association; www.americanbearings.org. 7. ABMA - American Boiler Manufacturers Association; www.abma.com. 8. ACI - American Concrete Institute; (Formerly: ACI International); www.abma.com. 9. ACPA - American Concrete Pipe Association; www.concrete-pipe.org. 10. AEIC - Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The); www.aeic.org. 11. AF&PA - American Forest & Paper Association; www.afandpa.org. 12. AGA - American Gas Association; www.aga.org. 13. AHAM - Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers; www.aham.org. 14. AHRI - Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (The); www.ahrinet.org. 15. AI - Asphalt Institute; www.asphaltinstitute.org. 16. AIA - American Institute of Architects (The); www.aia.org. 17. AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction; www.aisc.org. 18. AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute; www.steel.org. 19. AITC - American Institute of Timber Construction; www.aitc-glulam.org. 20. AMCA - Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; www.amca.org. 21. ANSI - American National Standards Institute; www.ansi.org. 22. AOSA - Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.; www.aosaseed.com. 23. APA - APA - The Engineered Wood Association; www.apawood.org. 24. APA - Architectural Precast Association; www.archprecast.org. 25. API - American Petroleum Institute; www.api.org. 26. ARI - Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI). 27. ARI - American Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI). Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 REFERENCES 014200 - 3 28. ARMA - Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association; www.asphaltroofing.org. 29. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers; www.asce.org. 30. ASCE/SEI - American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute; (See ASCE). 31. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers; www.ashrae.org. 32. ASME - ASME International; (American Society of Mechanical Engineers); www.asme.org. 33. ASSE - American Society of Safety Engineers (The); www.asse.org. 34. ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineering; www.asse-plumbing.org. 35. ASTM - ASTM International; www.astm.org. 36. ATIS - Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions; www.atis.org. 37. AWEA - American Wind Energy Association; www.awea.org. 38. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute; www.awinet.org. 39. AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; www.awmac.com. 40. AWPA - American Wood Protection Association; www.awpa.com. 41. AWS - American Welding Society; www.aws.org. 42. AWWA - American Water Works Association; www.awwa.org. 43. BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; www.buildershardware.com. 44. BIA - Brick Industry Association (The); www.gobrick.com. 45. BICSI - BICSI, Inc.; www.bicsi.org. 46. BIFMA - BIFMA International; (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association); www.bifma.org. 47. BISSC - Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee; www.bissc.org. 48. BWF - Badminton World Federation; (Formerly: International Badminton Federation); www.bissc.org. 49. CDA - Copper Development Association; www.copper.org. 50. CEA - Canadian Electricity Association; www.electricity.ca. 51. CEA - Consumer Electronics Association; www.ce.org. 52. CFFA - Chemical Fabrics and Film Association, Inc.; www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com. 53. CFSEI - Cold-Formed Steel Engineers Institute; www.cfsei.org. 54. CGA - Compressed Gas Association; www.cganet.com. 55. CIMA - Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.cellulose.org. 56. CISCA - Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association; www.cisca.org. 57. CISPI - Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; www.cispi.org. 58. CLFMI - Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute; www.chainlinkinfo.org. 59. CPA - Composite Panel Association; www.pbmdf.com. 60. CRI - Carpet and Rug Institute (The); www.carpet-rug.org. 61. CRRC - Cool Roof Rating Council; www.coolroofs.org. 62. CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; www.crsi.org. 63. CSA - Canadian Standards Association; www.csa.ca. 64. CSA - CSA International; (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services); www.csa- international.org. 65. CSI - Construction Specifications Institute (The); www.csinet.org. 66. CSSB - Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau; www.cedarbureau.org. 67. CTI - Cooling Technology Institute; (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute); www.cti.org. 68. CWC - Composite Wood Council; (See CPA). 69. DASMA - Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association; www.dasma.com. 70. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute; www.dhi.org. 71. ECA - Electronic Components Association; (See ECIA). Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 REFERENCES 014200 - 4 72. ECAMA - Electronic Components Assemblies & Materials Association; (See ECIA). 73. ECIA - Electronic Components Industry Association; www.eciaonline.org. 74. EIA - Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA). 75. EIMA - EIFS Industry Members Association; www.eima.com. 76. EJMA - Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.ejma.org. 77. ESD - ESD Association; (Electrostatic Discharge Association); www.esda.org. 78. ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association; (See PLASA). 79. EVO - Efficiency Valuation Organization; www.evo-world.org. 80. FCI - Fluid Controls Institute; www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org. 81. FIBA - Federation Internationale de Basketball; (The International Basketball Federation); www.fiba.com. 82. FIVB - Federation Internationale de Volleyball; (The International Volleyball Federation); www.fivb.org. 83. FM Approvals - FM Approvals LLC; www.fmglobal.com. 84. FM Global - FM Global; (Formerly: FMG - FM Global); www.fmglobal.com. 85. FRSA - Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc.; www.floridaroof.com. 86. FSA - Fluid Sealing Association; www.fluidsealing.com. 87. FSC - Forest Stewardship Council U.S.; www.fscus.org. 88. GA - Gypsum Association; www.gypsum.org. 89. GANA - Glass Association of North America; www.glasswebsite.com. 90. GS - Green Seal; www.greenseal.org. 91. HI - Hydraulic Institute; www.pumps.org. 92. HI/GAMA - Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association; (See AHRI). 93. HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association; (See NAAMM). 94. HPVA - Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; www.hpva.org. 95. HPW - H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.; www.hpwhite.com. 96. IAPSC - International Association of Professional Security Consultants; www.iapsc.org. 97. IAS - International Accreditation Service; www.iasonline.org. 98. IAS - International Approval Services; (See CSA). 99. ICBO - International Conference of Building Officials; (See ICC). 100. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org. 101. ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.; www.icea.net. 102. ICPA - International Cast Polymer Alliance; www.icpa-hq.org. 103. ICRI - International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.; www.icri.org. 104. IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission; www.iec.ch. 105. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The); www.ieee.org. 106. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society; (Formerly: Illuminating Engineering Society of North America); www.ies.org. 107. IESNA - Illuminating Engineering Society of North America; (See IES). 108. IEST - Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology; www.iest.org. 109. IGMA - Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance; www.igmaonline.org. 110. IGSHPA - International Ground Source Heat Pump Association; www.igshpa.okstate.edu. 111. ILI - Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.; www.iliai.com. 112. Intertek - Intertek Group; (Formerly: ETL SEMCO; Intertek Testing Service NA); www.intertek.com. 113. ISA - International Society of Automation (The); (Formerly: Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society); www.isa.org. 114. ISAS - Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (The); (See ISA). Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 REFERENCES 014200 - 5 115. ISFA - International Surface Fabricators Association; (Formerly: International Solid Surface Fabricators Association); www.isfanow.org. 116. ISO - International Organization for Standardization; www.iso.org. 117. ISSFA - International Solid Surface Fabricators Association; (See ISFA). 118. ITU - International Telecommunication Union; www.itu.int/home. 119. KCMA - Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association; www.kcma.org. 120. LMA - Laminating Materials Association; (See CPA). 121. LPI - Lightning Protection Institute; www.lightning.org. 122. MBMA - Metal Building Manufacturers Association; www.mbma.com. 123. MCA - Metal Construction Association; www.metalconstruction.org. 124. MFMA - Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.maplefloor.org. 125. MFMA - Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.metalframingmfg.org. 126. MHIA - Material Handling Industry of America; www.mhia.org. 127. MIA - Marble Institute of America; www.marble-institute.com. 128. MMPA - Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; www.wmmpa.com. 129. MPI - Master Painters Institute; www.paintinfo.com. 130. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.; www.mss-hq.org. 131. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; www.naamm.org. 132. NACE - NACE International; (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International); www.nace.org. 133. NADCA - National Air Duct Cleaners Association; www.nadca.com. 134. NAIMA - North American Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.naima.org. 135. NBGQA - National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.; www.nbgqa.com. 136. NBI - New Buildings Institute; www.newbuildings.org. 137. NCAA - National Collegiate Athletic Association (The); www.ncaa.org. 138. NCMA - National Concrete Masonry Association; www.ncma.org. 139. NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau; www.nebb.org. 140. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association; www.necanet.org. 141. NeLMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association; www.nelma.org. 142. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association; www.nema.org. 143. NETA - InterNational Electrical Testing Association; www.netaworld.org. 144. NFHS - National Federation of State High School Associations; www.nfhs.org. 145. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association; www.nfpa.org. 146. NFPA - NFPA International; (See NFPA). 147. NFRC - National Fenestration Rating Council; www.nfrc.org. 148. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association; www.nhla.com. 149. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority; www.nlga.org. 150. NOFMA - National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association; (See NWFA). 151. NOMMA - National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association; www.nomma.org. 152. NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association; www.nrca.net. 153. NRMCA - National Ready Mixed Concrete Association; www.nrmca.org. 154. NSF - NSF International; www.nsf.org. 155. NSPE - National Society of Professional Engineers; www.nspe.org. 156. NSSGA - National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association; www.nssga.org. 157. NTMA - National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The); www.ntma.com. 158. NWFA - National Wood Flooring Association; www.nwfa.org. 159. PCI - Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; www.pci.org. 160. PDI - Plumbing & Drainage Institute; www.pdionline.org. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 REFERENCES 014200 - 6 161. PLASA - PLASA; (Formerly: ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association); www.plasa.org. 162. RCSC - Research Council on Structural Connections; www.boltcouncil.org. 163. RFCI - Resilient Floor Covering Institute; www.rfci.com. 164. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service; www.redwoodinspection.com. 165. SAE - SAE International; www.sae.org. 166. SCTE - Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers; www.scte.org. 167. SDI - Steel Deck Institute; www.sdi.org. 168. SDI - Steel Door Institute; www.steeldoor.org. 169. SEFA - Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (The); www.sefalabs.com. 170. SEI/ASCE - Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers; (See ASCE). 171. SIA - Security Industry Association; www.siaonline.org. 172. SJI - Steel Joist Institute; www.steeljoist.org. 173. SMA - Screen Manufacturers Association; www.smainfo.org. 174. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; www.smacna.org. 175. SMPTE - Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers; www.smpte.org. 176. SPFA - Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance; www.sprayfoam.org. 177. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; www.spib.org. 178. SPRI - Single Ply Roofing Industry; www.spri.org. 179. SRCC - Solar Rating & Certification Corporation; www.solar-rating.org. 180. SSINA - Specialty Steel Industry of North America; www.ssina.com. 181. SSPC - SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings; www.sspc.org. 182. STI - Steel Tank Institute; www.steeltank.com. 183. SWI - Steel Window Institute; www.steelwindows.com. 184. SWPA - Submersible Wastewater Pump Association; www.swpa.org. 185. TCA - Tilt-Up Concrete Association; www.tilt-up.org. 186. TCNA - Tile Council of North America, Inc.; www.tileusa.com. 187. TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.tema.org. 188. TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association (The); (Formerly: TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance); www.tiaonline.org. 189. TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA). 190. TMS - The Masonry Society; www.masonrysociety.org. 191. TPI - Truss Plate Institute; www.tpinst.org. 192. TPI - Turfgrass Producers International; www.turfgrasssod.org. 193. TRI - Tile Roofing Institute; www.tileroofing.org. 194. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; www.ul.com. 195. UNI - Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association; www.uni-bell.org. 196. USAV - USA Volleyball; www.usavolleyball.org. 197. USGBC - U.S. Green Building Council; www.usgbc.org. 198. USITT - United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.; www.usitt.org. 199. WASTEC - Waste Equipment Technology Association; www.wastec.org. 200. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; www.wclib.org. 201. WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association; www.wcmanet.org. 202. WDMA - Window & Door Manufacturers Association; www.wdma.com. 203. WI - Woodwork Institute; www.wicnet.org. 204. WSRCA - Western States Roofing Contractors Association; www.wsrca.com. 205. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association; www.wwpa.org. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 REFERENCES 014200 - 7 C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. DIN - Deutsches Institut fur Normung e.V.; www.din.de. 2. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials; www.iapmo.org. 3. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org. 4. ICC-ES - ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org. D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Information is subject to change and is up to date as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. COE - Army Corps of Engineers; www.usace.army.mil. 2. CPSC - Consumer Product Safety Commission; www.cpsc.gov. 3. DOC - Department of Commerce; National Institute of Standards and Technology; www.nist.gov. 4. DOD - Department of Defense; www.quicksearch.dla.mil. 5. DOE - Department of Energy; www.energy.gov. 6. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov. 7. FAA - Federal Aviation Administration; www.faa.gov. 8. FG - Federal Government Publications; www.gpo.gov. 9. GSA - General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. 10. HUD - Department of Housing and Urban Development; www.hud.gov. 11. LBL - Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory; Environmental Energy Technologies Division; www.eetd.lbl.gov. 12. OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Administration; www.osha.gov. 13. SD - Department of State; www.state.gov. 14. TRB - Transportation Research Board; National Cooperative Highway Research Program; The National Academies; www.trb.org. 15. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Agriculture Research Service; U.S. Salinity Laboratory; www.ars.usda.gov. 16. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Rural Utilities Service; www.usda.gov. 17. USDJ - Department of Justice; Office of Justice Programs; National Institute of Justice; www.ojp.usdoj.gov. 18. USP - U.S. Pharmacopeial Convention; www.usp.org. 19. USPS - United States Postal Service; www.usps.com. E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations; Available from Government Printing Office; www.gpo.gov/fdsys. 2. DOD - Department of Defense; Military Specifications and Standards; Available from DLA Document Services; www.quicksearch.dla.mil. 3. DSCC - Defense Supply Center Columbus; (See FS). 4. FED-STD - Federal Standard; (See FS). Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 REFERENCES 014200 - 8 5. FS - Federal Specification; Available from DLA Document Services; www.quicksearch.dla.mil. a. Available from Defense Standardization Program; www.dsp.dla.mil. b. Available from General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. c. Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building Design Guide; www.wbdg.org/ccb. 6. MILSPEC - Military Specification and Standards; (See DOD). 7. USAB - United States Access Board; www.access-board.gov. 8. USATBCB - U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; (See USAB). F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. CBHF; State of California; Department of Consumer Affairs; Bureau of Electronic and Appliance Repair, Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation; www.bearhfti.ca.gov. 2. CCR; California Code of Regulations; Office of Administrative Law; California Title 24 Energy Code; www.calregs.com. 3. CDHS; California Department of Health Services; (See CDPH). 4. CDPH; California Department of Public Health; Indoor Air Quality Program; www.cal- iaq.org. 5. CPUC; California Public Utilities Commission; www.cpuc.ca.gov. 6. SCAQMD; South Coast Air Quality Management District; www.aqmd.gov. 7. TFS; Texas A&M Forest Service; Sustainable Forestry and Economic Development; www.txforestservice.tamu.edu. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 014200 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1 SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions. 2. Section 321216 "Asphalt Paving" for construction and maintenance of asphalt pavement for temporary roads and paved areas. 3. Section 321313 "Concrete Paving" for construction and maintenance of cement concrete pavement for temporary roads and paved areas. 1.3 USE CHARGES A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to Architect, Construction Manager, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sewer Service: Owner will pay sewer-service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations. C. Water Service: Owner will pay water-service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations. D. Electric Power Service: Owner will pay electric-power-service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations. E. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. F. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 2 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel. B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage. 1. Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage. 2. Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged Work. 3. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-resistive materials, plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials. D. Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include the following: 1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work. 2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. 3. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge. 4. Waste handling procedures. 5. Other dust-control measures. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.8-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top and bottom rails. B. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil (0.25-mm) minimum thickness, with flame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2. C. Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches (914 by 1624 mm). 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 1. Store combustible materials apart from building. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 4 1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 011000 "Summary." B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. E. Heating: Provide temporary heating required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. F. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering occupied areas. 1. Prior to commencing work, isolate the HVAC system in area where work is to be performed according to coordination drawings. a. Disconnect supply and return ductwork in work area from HVAC systems servicing occupied areas. 2. Maintain dust partitions during the Work. Use vacuum collection attachments on dust- producing equipment. Isolate limited work within occupied areas using portable dust- containment devices. 3. Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup. G. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 5 1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes. H. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner. I. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. J. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install [one] <Insert number> telephone line(s) for each field office. 1. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241. 2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations. 1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and paved areas. 2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas according to Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing. 4. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until immediately before Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course pavement before installation of final course according to Section 321216 "Asphalt Paving." C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 6 D. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel. E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. F. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings. 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. G. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 017300 "Execution." H. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. I. Temporary Elevator Use: Use of elevators is not permitted. J. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate. K. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be permitted, provided stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of Substantial Completion. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. 1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 011000 "Summary." C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction, and requirements specified in Section 311000 "Site Clearing." Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 7 D. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent properties and walkways, according to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross tree- or plant- protection zones. 2. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. 3. Clean, repair, and restore adjoining properties and roads affected by erosion and sedimentation from Project site during the course of Project. 4. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal. E. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. F. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. G. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Furnish one set of keys to Owner. H. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day. I. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. J. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. K. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures. L. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner from fumes and noise. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 8 1. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and fire-retardant-treated plywood on construction operations side. 2. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security locks where openings are required. 3. Protect air-handling equipment. M. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. 3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction. B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Protect porous materials from water damage. 2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water. 3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. 4. Remove standing water from decks. 5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed. C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building. 2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter. 4. Discard or replace water-damaged material. 5. Do not install material that is wet. 6. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 7. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes. D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows: Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 9 1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions. 2. Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity. 3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and exposure to water limits. a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsum-based products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective. b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of exposure and continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect. c. Remove materials that cannot be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours. 3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 015000 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1 SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012100 "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance. 2. Section 012300 "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate. 3. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions. 4. Section 014200 "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 2 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article. 2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors. 2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 3 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed. 3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 4 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. 6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 3. Products: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered unless otherwise indicated. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 4. Manufacturers: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered unless otherwise indicated. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. 5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 5 Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product. D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 016000 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 EXECUTION 017300 - 1 SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 6. Progress cleaning. 7. Starting and adjusting. 8. Protection of installed construction. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 2. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. 4. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected portions of the building. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 EXECUTION 017300 - 2 B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements. C. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal. D. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated. B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements. 1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection 2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following: a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Fire separation assemblies. c. Air or smoke barriers. d. Fire-suppression systems. e. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. f. Control systems. g. Communication systems. h. Fire-detection and -alarm systems. i. Conveying systems. j. Electrical wiring systems. k. Operating systems of special construction. 3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following: a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. b. Membranes and flashings. c. Exterior curtain-wall construction. d. Sprayed fire-resistive material. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 EXECUTION 017300 - 3 e. Equipment supports. f. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. g. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems. 4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 EXECUTION 017300 - 4 2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: 1. Description of the Work. 2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 4. Recommended corrections. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect and Construction Manager promptly. B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish limits on use of Project site. 3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 EXECUTION 017300 - 5 4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 6. Notify Architect and Construction Manager when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations. D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect and Construction Manager. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. 1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect or Construction Manager. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect and Construction Manager before proceeding. 2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points. B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. 2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work. 3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition. C. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 EXECUTION 017300 - 6 3.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches (2440 mm) in occupied spaces and 90 inches (2300 mm) in unoccupied spaces. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations. F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 EXECUTION 017300 - 7 3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. E. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. F. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 EXECUTION 017300 - 8 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure. G. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. 3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 EXECUTION 017300 - 9 F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with requirements in Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements." B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. C. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. E. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements." 3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. END OF SECTION 017300 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1 SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 017300 "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site. 2. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 3. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 4. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's personnel. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For cleaning agents. B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion. C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction. B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 2 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections. 1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Architect's signature for receipt of submittals. 5. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training." Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 3 6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion. 1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment Procedures." 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 4 necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Use CSI Form 14.1A. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. MS Excel electronic file. Architect, will return annotated file. 1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty. B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. 4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document. D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. k. Remove labels that are not permanent. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 6 l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection. p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls”. 3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. 1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials. 2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration. a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification. 3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. 4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. END OF SECTION 017700 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1 SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Product maintenance manuals. 5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements" for verification and compilation of data into operation and maintenance manuals. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section. 1. Architect and Commissioning Authority will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable. 2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions. B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format: Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 2 1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect. a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory. b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals. 2. One paper copy. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect will return one copy. C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect and Commissioning Authority will comment on whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable. D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect and Commissioning Authority will return copy with comments. 1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's and Commissioning Authority's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's and Commissioning Authority's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include a section in the directory for each of the following: 1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents. B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system. C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual. E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 3 ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems." 2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. B. Title Page: Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager. 7. Name and contact information for Architect. 8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority. 9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems contained in the manuals. 10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required. 1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size. 2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 4 navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file. F. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes. 1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross- reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents, and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. 2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. 3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment. 4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following: 1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures. B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component: 1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 5 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill. C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties. D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures. 2.4 OPERATION MANUALS A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. B. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Startup procedures. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 6 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification. 2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 7 2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available. E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance. F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 8 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section 017839 "Project Record Documents." F. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. END OF SECTION 017823 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1 SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous record submittals. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 2. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up record prints. 2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows: a. Initial Submittal: 1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and one of file prints. 2) Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable. b. Final Submittal: 1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record. 2) Print each drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. B. Record Specifications: Submit annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. C. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy and annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 2 1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual. D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record- keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued. 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Work Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 3 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows: 1. Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the original Contract Drawings. 2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file. 3. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 4. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution. C. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file. 2. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data. 5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Specifications as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Specifications. 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 4 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Product Data as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Product Data. 1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up miscellaneous record submittals. 1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 017839 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 1 SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following: 1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Demonstration and training video recordings. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module. B. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time. C. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of performance-based test. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit one copy within seven days of end of each training module. 1. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following information: a. Name of Project. b. Name and address of videographer. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Date of video recording. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 2 2. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use prepared and bound in format matching operation and maintenance manuals and in PDF electronic file format on compact disc. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training. B. Videographer Qualifications: A videographer who is experienced photographing demonstration and training events similar to those required. C. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction. 2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials, instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays. 3. Review required content of instruction. 4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel. B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content. C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component: Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 3 1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following: a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves. 2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail: a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. c. Maintenance manuals. d. Project record documents. e. Identification systems. f. Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments. 3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable: a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures. 4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable: a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures. 5. Adjustments: Include the following: a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 4 d. Economy and efficiency adjustments. 6. Troubleshooting: Include the following: a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures. 7. Maintenance: Include the following: a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools. 8. Repairs: Include the following: a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data." B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location. 3.2 INSTRUCTION A. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants. B. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. 1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 5 C. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data submittals. D. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of a demonstration performance-based test. E. Cleanup: Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use. 3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS A. General: Engage a qualified videographer to record demonstration and training video recordings. Record each training module separately. 1. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and lesson outline. B. Video: Provide minimum 640 x 480 video resolution converted to format file type acceptable to Owner, on electronic media. 1. Electronic Media: Read-only format compact disc acceptable to Owner, with commercial-grade graphic label. 2. File Hierarchy: Organize folder structure and file locations according to project manual table of contents. Provide complete screen-based menu. 3. File Names: Utilize file names based upon name of equipment generally described in video segment, as identified in Project specifications. 4. Contractor and Installer Contact File: Using appropriate software, create a file for inclusion on the Equipment Demonstration and Training DVD that describes the following for each Contractor involved on the Project, arranged according to Project table of contents: a. Name of Contractor/Installer. b. Business address. c. Business phone number. d. Point of contact. e. E-mail address. C. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to adequately cover area of demonstration and training. Display continuous running time. 1. Film training session(s) in segments not to exceed 15 minutes. a. Produce segments to present a single significant piece of equipment per segment. b. Organize segments with multiple pieces of equipment to follow order of Project Manual table of contents. c. Where a training session on a particular piece of equipment exceeds 15 minutes, stop filming and pause training session. Begin training session again upon commencement of new filming segment. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 6 D. Light Levels: Verify light levels are adequate to properly light equipment. Verify equipment markings are clearly visible prior to recording. 1. Furnish additional portable lighting as required. E. Narration: Describe scenes on video recording by audio narration by microphone while video recording is recorded. Include description of items being viewed. END OF SECTION 017900 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1 SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011000 "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises, Owner-occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements. 2. Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection" for temporary protection of existing trees and plants that are affected by selective demolition. 3. Section 017300 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures. 4. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade improvements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 2 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. C. Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to Owner prior to start of demolition. D. Predemolition Photographs: Submit before Work begins. E. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 3 1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items: a. Food Service Equipment b. Golf and Nordic Operations Equipment. B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. C. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents. C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 4 E. Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure during selective building demolition operations. 1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. F. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs. 1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation." 2. Provide photographs of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations. 3. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. 1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Section 011000 "Summary." B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. C. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 5 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 6 6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. B. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 2. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. C. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 2. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts. B. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them approved landfill. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 7 END OF SECTION 024119 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1 SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following: 1. Footings. 2. Foundation walls. 3. Slabs-on-grade. 4. Suspended slabs. 5. Building walls. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade. 2. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement and walks. 3. Division 32 Section "Decorative Concrete Paving" for decorative concrete pavement and walks. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast- furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 2 D. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure. 1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect. E. Samples: For waterstops and vapor retarder. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer and testing agency. B. Welding certificates. C. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Form materials and form-release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5. Waterstops. 6. Curing compounds. 7. Floor and slab treatments. 8. Bonding agents. 9. Adhesives. 10. Vapor retarders. 11. Semirigid joint filler. 12. Joint-filler strips. 13. Repair materials. D. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements: 1. Aggregates. E. Field quality-control reports. F. Minutes of preinstallation conference. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 3 C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program. 2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade II. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer. E. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel." F. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5. 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." G. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures. H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. d. Concrete subcontractor. 2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips, semirigid joint fillers, forms and form removal limitations, [shoring procedures, vapor- retarder installation, anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 4 B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other contaminants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as follows: a. Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge sealed. B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation. D. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum. E. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal. F. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. G. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane of exposed concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from as- drawn steel wire into flat sheets. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 5 C. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs. B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II gray. Supplement with the following: a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C. b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. B. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica. C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials. 1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. D. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. 2.5 ADMIXTURES A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 6 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. C. Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete and complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; CATEXOL CN-CI. b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Rheocrete CNI. c. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company. d. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; DCI. e. Sika Corporation; Sika CNI. D. Non-Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, non-set- accelerating, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Rheocrete 222+. b. Cortec Corporation; MCI- 2000 or 2005NS. c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; DCI-S. d. Sika Corporation; FerroGard 901. E. Color Pigment (at exterior exposed concrete at the entry stair, slab on grade and loading dock): ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures; color stable, free of carbon black, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ChemMasters. b. Davis Colors. c. Dayton Superior Corporation. d. Hoover Color Corporation. e. Lambert Corporation. f. QC Construction Products. g. Rockwood Pigments NA, Inc. h. Scofield, L. M. Company. i. Solomon Colors, Inc. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 7 2.6 WATERSTOPS A. Flexible Rubber Waterstops: CE CRD-C 513, with factory-installed metal eyelets, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Greenstreak. b. Williams Products, Inc. 2. Profile: Flat, dumbbell with center bulb. 3. Dimensions: 6 inches by 3/8 inch thick (150 mm by 10 mm thick); nontapered. B. Flexible PVC Waterstops: CE CRD-C 572, with factory-installed metal eyelets, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BoMetals, Inc. b. Greenstreak. c. Paul Murphy Plastics Company. d. Vinylex Corp. 2. Profile: Flat, dumbbell with center bulb. 3. Dimensions: 6 inches by 3/8 inch thick (150 mm by 10 mm thick); nontapered. 2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A, except with maximum perm rating 0.020 Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Moistop Ultra 15. b. Insulation Solutions, Inc.; Viper VaporCheck 6.5. c. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Perminator 10 mil. d. Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block 10. e. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn 15 mil Green. f. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap 15 mil Class A. B. Granular Fill: Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448, Size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 8 C. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a 3/8-inch (9.5- mm) sieve, 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 (0.15-mm) sieve, and at least 5 percent passing No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve; complying with deleterious substance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates. 2.8 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS A. VOC Content: Liquid floor treatments shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Clear, chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; that penetrates, hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. ChemMasters; Chemisil Plus. b. ChemTec Int'l; ChemTec One. c. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Intraseal. d. Curecrete Distribution Inc.; Ashford Formula. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Sure Hard (J-17). f. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Titan Hard. g. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Euco Diamond Hard. h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; SureHard. i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Seal Hard. j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; LIQUI-HARD. k. Metalcrete Industries; Floorsaver. l. Nox-Crete Products Group; Duro-Nox. m. Symons by Dayton Superior; Buff Hard. n. US SPEC, Division of US Mix Products Company; US SPEC Industraseal. o. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Vexcon StarSeal PS Clear. C. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatments for Polished Concrete Finish: Clear, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; that penetrates, hardens, and is suitable for polished concrete surfaces. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Advanced Floor Products; Retro-Plate 99. b. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; FGS Hardener Plus. c. QuestMark, a division of CentiMark Corporation; DiamondQuest Densifying Impregnator Application. 2.9 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 9 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; CATEXOL CimFilm. b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Confilm. c. ChemMasters; SprayFilm. d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Aquafilm. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film (J-74). f. Edoco by Dayton Superior; BurkeFilm. g. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Eucobar. h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor-Aid. i. Lambert Corporation; LAMBCO Skin. j. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-CON. k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; EVAPRE. l. Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold. m. Nox-Crete Products Group; MONOFILM. n. Sika Corporation; SikaFilm. o. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Film. p. Symons by Dayton Superior; Finishing Aid. q. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2120 TRI-FILM. r. Unitex; PRO-FILM. s. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Envio Set. B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry. C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. D. Water: Potable. E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound #2 DR WB. b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure 200. c. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear. d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; W.B. Resin Cure. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W). f. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Res X Cure WB. g. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Kurez W VOX; TAMMSCURE WB 30C. h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 420. i. Lambert Corporation; AQUA KURE - CLEAR. j. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R. k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100-CLEAR. l. Nox-Crete Products Group; Resin Cure E. m. Right Pointe; Clear Water Resin. n. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Rez Clear. o. Symons by Dayton Superior; Resi-Chem Clear. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 10 p. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2519 DC WB. q. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Enviocure 100. F. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of floor covering. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Clear Cure WB. b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure-N-Seal WB. c. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure & Seal 20. d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Cure and Seal WB. e. Cresset Chemical Company; Crete-Trete 309-VOC Cure & Seal. f. Dayton Superior Corporation; Safe Cure and Seal (J-18). g. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Spartan Cote WB II. h. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Aqua Cure VOX; Clearseal WB 150. i. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Cure & Seal 309 Emulsion. j. Lambert Corporation; Glazecote Sealer-20. k. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Dress & Seal WB. l. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Vocomp-20. m. Metalcrete Industries; Metcure. n. Nox-Crete Products Group; Cure & Seal 150E. o. Symons by Dayton Superior; Cure & Seal 18 Percent E. p. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2519 WB. q. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Starseal 309. G. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, 18 to 25 percent solids, nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of floor covering. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure-N-Seal W. b. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear. c. Conspec by Dayton Superior; High Seal. d. Dayton Superior Corporation; Safe Cure and Seal (J-19). e. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Spartan Cote WB II 20 Percent. f. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Diamond Clear VOX; Clearseal WB STD. g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; SureCure Emulsion. h. Lambert Corporation; Glazecote Sealer-20. i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Dress & Seal WB. j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Vocomp-20. k. Metalcrete Industries; Metcure 0800. l. Nox-Crete Products Group; Cure & Seal 200E. m. Symons by Dayton Superior; Cure & Seal 18 Percent E. n. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Starseal 0800. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 11 H. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure-N-Seal 25 LV. b. ChemMasters; Spray-Cure & Seal Plus. c. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Sealcure 1315. d. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Cure and Seal (J-22UV). e. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Cureseal 1315. f. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Super Diamond Clear; LusterSeal 300. g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Sure Cure 25. h. Lambert Corporation; UV Super Seal. i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Lumiseal Plus. j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; CS-309/30. k. Metalcrete Industries; Seal N Kure 30. l. Right Pointe; Right Sheen 30. m. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex AC 1315. 2. VOC Content: Curing and sealing compounds shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). I. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure 1315. b. ChemMasters; Polyseal WB. c. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Sealcure 1315 WB. d. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Cureseal 1315 WB. e. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Super Diamond Clear VOX; LusterSeal WB 300. f. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Sure Cure 25 Emulsion. g. Lambert Corporation; UV Safe Seal. h. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Lumiseal WB Plus. i. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Vocomp-30. j. Metalcrete Industries; Metcure 30. k. Right Pointe; Right Sheen WB30. l. Symons by Dayton Superior; Cure & Seal 31 Percent E. m. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Vexcon Starseal 1315. 2. VOC Content: Curing and sealing compounds shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.10 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 12 B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240. C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements, and as follows: 1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. E. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.022-inch- (0.55-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. F. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, not less than 0.034 inch (0.85 mm) thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. 2.11 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi (29 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 13 2.12 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures. B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash: 25 percent. 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent. 3. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 30 percent. 4. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 40 percent portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent. C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement. D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50. 4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated. E. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup. 2.13 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS A. Footings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: As indicated in Structural Documents. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: As indicated in Structural Documents. 3. Slump Limit: As indicated in Structural Documents. B. Foundation Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: As indicated in Structural Documents. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: As indicated in Structural Documents. 3. Slump Limit: As indicated in Structural Documents. C. Interior Slabs-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: As indicated in Structural Documents. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 14 2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: As indicated in Structural Documents. 3. Slump Limit: As indicated in Structural Documents. 4. Air Content: As indicated in Structural Documents. D. Building Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: As indicated in Structural Documents. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: As indicated in Structural Documents. 3. Slump Limit: As indicated in Structural Documents. 2.14 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.15 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for smooth-formed finished surfaces. 2. Class B, 1/4 inch (6 mm) for rough-formed finished surfaces. D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. 1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 15 F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions. 3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated. 3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations need to be maintained. 1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day design compressive strength. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 16 2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores. B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent. C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. 3.4 SHORES A. Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring. 1. Do not remove shoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete. B. Plan sequence of removal of shores to avoid damage to concrete. 3.5 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Unroll vapor barrier with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the concrete placement. 2. Lap vapor barrier over footings and/or seal to foundation walls. 3. Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer’s tape. 4. Seal all penetrations (including pipes) with manufacturer’s standard boots and/or per manufacturer’s instructions. 5. No penetration of the vapor barrier is allowed except for reinforcing steel and permanent utilities. 6. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor barrier, overlapping damaged area 6 inches and taping all sides with tape. 3.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 17 B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. 1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, where indicated. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. 3.7 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection. 4. Locate horizontal joints in walls at underside of floors, slabs, and at the top of footings or floor slabs. 5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. 6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one- fourth of concrete thickness as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 18 D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface unless otherwise indicated. 2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated. 3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 3.8 WATERSTOPS A. Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints between foundations and footings and at other joints indicated to form a continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of the Work. Field fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.9 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect or Engineer. C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301. 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture. D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 19 to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. G. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3.10 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 20 1. Apply to all concrete surfaces unless otherwise noted including surfaces exposed to public view, and to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete. C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.11 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull- floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch (6 mm) in one direction. 1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated to receive mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes. C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated to receive trowel finish and to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing. D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, liquid floor treatments, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system. 2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M), for a randomly trafficked floor surface: a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 20; and of levelness, F(L) 15; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 15; and of levelness, F(L) 10 for subfloors under thickset tile and thickset stone. b. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 17; and of levelness, F(L) 15; for areas specified as carpet. c. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and of levelness, F(L) 25; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 17; for all other areas including those specified to receive thinset flooring, resilient floor tile and liquid floor treatments. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 21 E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where indicated and where ceramic tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. 1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces. F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. 3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in- place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. 3.13 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot- weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period. D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces. E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 22 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings. b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments. c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. 4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.14 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and complete surface repairs. 2. Do not apply to concrete that is less than 28 days' old. 3. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet; and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 23 B. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to hardened concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.15 JOINT FILLING A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six month(s). Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased. B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry. C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening. 3.16 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch (19 mm). Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 24 that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch (19-mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 3.17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Testing and Inspecting: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports. C. Inspections: 1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Steel reinforcement welding. 3. Headed bolts and studs. 4. Verification of use of required design mixture. 5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 25 7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs. D. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M. a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 7. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. 8. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory- cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. 9. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa). 10. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 26 testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests. 11. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. 12. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. 13. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 14. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents. E. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M) within 48 hours of finishing. 3.18 PROTECTION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS A. Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by liquid floor treatments installer. END OF SECTION 033000 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER 044313.16 - 1 SECTION 044313.16 - ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Stone masonry adhered to concrete backup. 2. Stone masonry adhered to wood framing and sheathing. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for furnishing steel lintels and shelf angles for stone masonry 2. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed sheet metal flashing. 3. Section 072500 "Weather Barriers" for Building wrap. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each variety of stone, stone accessory, and manufactured product. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For colored mortar and other items involving color selection. C. Samples for Verification: 1. For each stone type indicated. Include at least two Samples in each set and show the full range of color and other visual characteristics in completed Work. 2. For each color of mortar required. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, supply sources, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and source of aggregates. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER 044313.16 - 2 1. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockups constitutes approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect approves such deviations in writing. C. Material Test Reports: 1. Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Test Report: From sealant manufacturer indicating that sealants will not stain or damage stone. Include interpretation of test results and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs experienced stonemasons and stone fitters. B. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Build mockups for typical exterior wall in sizes approximately 60 inches (1500 mm) long by 48 inches (1200 mm) high by full thickness, including face and backup wythes and accessories. a. Include stone coping at top of mockup. b. Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches (400 mm) long in mockup. c. Include wood studs, sheathing, flashing, and weep holes in exterior masonry- veneer wall mockup. 3. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. 4. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 5. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for compatibility and adhesion testing according to sealant manufacturer's standard testing methods and Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," Samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER 044313.16 - 3 B. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, in a dry location, or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Protection of Stone Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed stone masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides and hold cover securely in place. B. Stain Prevention: Immediately remove mortar and soil to prevent them from staining stone masonry face. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter using coverings spread on the ground and over the wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt on completed stone masonry. C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace stone masonry damaged by frost or freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning. D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements for placement of flashing and similar items to be built into stone masonry. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain stone, from single quarry with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER 044313.16 - 4 B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality for each cementitious component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from single source or producer. 2.2 GRANITE A. Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 615. B. Basis of Design: Aspen Blend – Telluride Stone Company, 5085 Colorado Blvd., Denver, CO 80216, www.telluridestone.com. C. Match Architect's samples for color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to aesthetic effects. 2.3 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II, except Type III may be used for cold- weather construction; natural color or white cement may be used as required to produce mortar color indicated. 1. Low-Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients. 1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> D. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329. 1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> E. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. 1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> F. Aggregate: ASTM C 144 and as follows: 1. For pointing mortar, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve. G. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard acrylic-resin or styrene-butadiene-rubber water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with field-mixed portland cement mortar bed, and not containing a retarder. 1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER 044313.16 - 5 H. Water: Potable. 2.4 STONE TRIM ANCHORS A. Stone Trim Anchors: Units fabricated with tabs or dowels designed to engage kerfs or holes in stone trim units and holes for fasteners or postinstalled anchor bolts for fastening to substrates or framing as indicated. 1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> B. Materials: Fabricate anchors from stainless steel, ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304. Fabricate dowels from stainless steel, ASTM A 276, Type 304. C. Fasteners for Stone Trim Anchors: Annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and washers; ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M) for bolts and ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M) for nuts, Alloy Group 1 (A1). D. Postinstalled Anchor Bolts for Fastening Stone Trim Anchors: Chemical anchors, torque- controlled expansion anchors or undercut anchors made from stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Alloy Group A1 or A4) for bolts and nuts; ASTM A 666 or ASTM A 276, Type 304 or Type 316, for anchors. 2.5 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing, where flashing is exposed or partly exposed and where indicated, complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual Section 076200 and "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim"" and as follows: 1. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches (2400 mm) long minimum, but not exceeding 12 feet (3.6 m). Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing. 2. Metal Drip Edges: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (75 mm) into wall and 1/2 inch (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed. 3. Metal Sealant Stops: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (75 mm) into wall and out to exterior wall face. At exterior wall face, bend metal back on itself for 3/4 inch (19 mm) and down into joint 3/8 inch (10 mm) to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod. B. Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following: 1. Where flashing is indicated to receive counterflashing, use metal flashing. 2. Where flashing is indicated to be turned down at or beyond wall face, use metal flashing. 3. Where flashing is partly exposed and is indicated to terminate at wall face, use metal flashing with a drip edge with a sealant stop. 4. Where flashing is fully concealed, use metal flashing. C. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER 044313.16 - 6 1. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. D. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flexible Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene, urethane or PVC. B. Expanded Metal Lath: 3.4 lb/sq. yd. (1.8 kg/sq. m), paper backed self-furring, diamond-mesh lath complying with ASTM C 847. Fabricate from structural-quality, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180). C. Lath Attachment Devices: Tie wire, nails, screws and other metal supports galvanized material and type required by ASTM C 1063 for installations indicated. 2.7 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar and grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from stone masonry surfaces without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and stone producer. 1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2.8 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate stone units in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements indicated. 1. For granite, comply with recommendations in NBGQA's "Specifications for Architectural Granite." B. Cut Split and Select stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated, including details on Drawings and pattern specified in Manufacturer’s website – “Aspen Blend Detail – 3 of 3). C. Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stone for anchors and supports. D. Carefully inspect stone at quarry or fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units before shipment. 1. Clean sawed backs of stone to remove rust stains and iron particles. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER 044313.16 - 7 E. Gage backs of stones for adhered veneer if more than 81 sq. in. (522 sq. cm) in area. F. Thickness of Stone: Provide thickness indicated, but not less than the following: 1. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm) plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) (and less than 14 lbs per square foot). G. Finish exposed stone faces and edges to comply with requirements indicated for finish and to match approved samples and mockups. 1. Finish: Natural cleft as indicated on manufacturer’s website. 2. Finish for Sills: Smooth. 3. Finish for Lintels: Sand rubbed. 4. Finish for Copings: Smooth. a. Finish exposed ends of copings same as front and back faces. 2.9 MORTAR MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride. 2. Use portland cement-lime, masonry cement or mortar cement mortar as recommended by the Stone Manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. 3. Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials together before adding water. Then mix again, adding only enough water to produce a damp, unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for one to two hours. Add remaining water in small portions until mortar reaches required consistency. Use mortar within 30 minutes of final mixing; do not retemper or use partially hardened material. B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in the form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. C. Mortar for Stone Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. 1. Mortar for Pointing Stone: Type N. D. Latex-Modified Portland Cement Setting Mortar: Proportion and mix portland cement, aggregate, and latex additive to comply with latex-additive manufacturer's written instructions. E. Cement-Paste Bond Coat: Mix either neat cement and water or cement, sand, and water to a consistency similar to that of thick cream. 1. For latex-modified, portland cement, setting-bed mortar, substitute latex admixture for part or all of water, according to latex-additive manufacturer's written instructions. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER 044313.16 - 8 F. Mortar for Scratch Coat over Metal Lath: 1 part portland cement, 1/2 part lime, 5 parts loose damp sand, and enough water to produce a workable consistency. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces indicated to receive stone masonry, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of stone masonry. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean dirty or stained stone surfaces by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials before setting. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives. 3.3 SETTING STONE MASONRY A. Perform necessary field cutting and trimming as stone is set. B. Sort stone before it is placed in wall to remove stone that does not comply with requirements relating to aesthetic effects, physical properties, or fabrication, or that is otherwise unsuitable for intended use. C. Arrange stones in polygonal (mosaic) pattern with uniform joint widths with larger stones at the base of the wall and smaller stones at the top of the wall. D. Arrange stones with color and size variations uniformly dispersed for an evenly blended appearance. E. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings. Install supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure stone masonry in place. Set stone accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances. F. Maintain uniform joint widths except for variations due to different stone sizes and where minor variations are required to maintain bond alignment if any. Lay walls with joints not less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) at widest points. G. Provide sealant joints of widths and at locations indicated. 1. Keep sealant joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Sealing joints is specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER 044313.16 - 9 H. Install metal expansion strips in sealant joints at locations indicated. Build flanges of expansion strips into masonry by embedding in mortar between stone masonry and backup wythe. Lap each joint 4 inches (100 mm) in direction of water flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints if any. I. Coat limestone with cementitious dampproofing as follows: 3.4 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (10 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch in 40 feet (13 mm in 12 m) or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) or 1/2 inch in 40 feet (13 mm in 12 m) or more. B. Variation from Level: For lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) or 1/2 inch in 40 feet (13 mm in 12 m) or more. C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan, do not exceed 1/2 inch in 20 feet (13 mm in 6 m) or 3/4 inch in 40 feet (19 mm in 12 m) or more. D. Measure variation from level, plumb, and position shown in plan as a variation of the average plane of each stone face from level, plumb, or dimensioned plane. E. Variation in Mortar-Joint Thickness: Do not vary from joint size range indicated. F. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Stones: Do not exceed one-half of tolerance specified for thickness of stone. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER A. Install flashing over sheathing and behind weather-barrier by fastening through sheathing into framing. B. Install lath over weather-resistant sheathing paper by fastening through sheathing into framing to comply with ASTM C 1063. C. Install lath over concrete to comply with ASTM C 1063. D. Install scratch coat over metal lath 3/8 inch (10 mm) thick to comply with ASTM C 926. E. Coat backs of stone units and face of scratch coat with cement-paste bond coat, then butter both surfaces with setting mortar. Use sufficient setting mortar so a slight excess will be forced out the edges of stone units as they are set. Tap units into place, completely filling space between units and scratch coat. F. Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depth of not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) before setting mortar has hardened. Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER 044313.16 - 10 3.6 POINTING A. Prepare stone-joint surfaces for pointing with mortar by removing dust and mortar particles. Where setting mortar was removed to depths greater than surrounding areas, apply pointing mortar in layers not more than 3/8 inch (10 mm) deep until a uniform depth is formed. B. Point stone joints by placing and compacting pointing mortar in layers of not more than 3/8 inch (10 mm) deep. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow to it become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. C. Tool joints, when pointing mortar is thumbprint hard, with a smooth jointing tool to produce the following joint profile: 1. Joint Profile: Smooth, flat face recessed 1/4 inch (6 mm) below edges of stone (raked joint). 3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace stone masonry of the following description: 1. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect. 2. Defective joints. 3. Stone masonry not matching approved samples and mockups. 4. Stone masonry not complying with other requirements indicated. B. Replace in a manner that results in stone masonry matching approved samples and mockups, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement. C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stone masonry as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean stone masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on mockup; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before cleaning stone masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaner; remove cleaner promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean stone masonry by bucket and brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Note No. 20, Revised II, using job-mixed detergent solution. 3.8 EXCESS MATERIALS AND WASTE A. Excess Stone: Stack excess stone where directed by Owner for Owner's use. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER 044313.16 - 11 B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste, and other waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 044313.16 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 1 SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Structural steel. 2. Grout. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for independent testing agency procedures and administrative requirements. 2. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels and shelf angles not attached to structural-steel frame, miscellaneous steel fabrications, and other metal items not defined as structural steel. 3. Division 09 painting Sections for surface-preparation and priming requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." B. Seismic-Load-Resisting System: Elements of structural-steel frame designated as "SLRS" or along grid lines designated as "SLRS" on Drawings, including columns, beams, and braces and their connections. C. Heavy Sections: Rolled and built-up sections as follows: 1. Shapes included in ASTM A 6/A 6M with flanges thicker than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 2. Welded built-up members with plates thicker than 2 inches (50 mm). 3. Column base plates thicker than 2 inches (50 mm). D. Protected Zone: Structural members or portions of structural members indicated as "Protected Zone" on Drawings. Connections of structural and nonstructural elements to protected zones are limited. E. Demand Critical Welds: Those welds, the failure of which would result in significant degradation of the strength and stiffness of the Seismic-Load-Resisting System and which are indicated as "Demand Critical" or "Seismic Critical" on Drawings. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 2 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, to withstand loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated. 1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated, and AISC 360 2. Use ASD; data are given at service level load. B. Moment Connections: As shown on drawings. C. Construction: Combined system of moment frame, braced frame, and shear walls. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections. 5. Identify members and connections of the seismic-load-resisting system. 6. Indicate locations and dimensions of protected zones. 7. Identify demand critical welds. 8. For structural-steel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs): Provide according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for each welded joint whether prequalified or qualified by testing, including the following: 1. Power source (constant current or constant voltage). 2. Electrode manufacturer and trade name, for demand critical welds. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified installer, fabricator, professional engineer and testing agency. B. Welding certificates. C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 3 D. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties. E. Product Test Reports: For the following: 1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 2. Direct-tension indicators. 3. Tension-control, high-strength bolt-nut-washer assemblies. 4. Shear stud connectors. 5. Shop primers. 6. Nonshrink grout. F. Source quality-control reports. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD. B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category ACSE or CSE. C. Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified according to AISC's Sophisticated Paint Endorsement P1, P2, P3 or SSPC-QP 3, "Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Shop Painting Applicators." D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." E. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC 303. 2. AISC 360. 3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact. 1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers. 2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 4 3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M B. Channels, Angles, M, S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M. D. Corrosion-Resisting Structural-Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 588/A 588M, Grade 50 (345). E. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing. F. Corrosion-Resisting Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 847/A 847M, structural tubing. G. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B. 1. Weight Class: Standard. 2. Finish: Black except were indicated to be galvanized. H. Steel Castings: ASTM A 216/A 216M, Grade WCB with supplementary requirement S11. I. Steel Forgings: ASTM A 668/A 668M. J. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 5 1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325, compressible-washer type with plain finish. B. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, round head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain C. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B. D. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. 1. Configuration: Straight. 2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel. 3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 4. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 5. Finish: Plain. E. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 4. Finish: Plain. F. Threaded Rods: A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 (345). 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened 3. Finish: Plain G. Clevises and Turnbuckles: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1035. H. Eye Bolts and Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1030. I. Sleeve Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1018. 2.3 PRIMER A. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat unless otherwise noted. B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: MPI#18, MPI#19, or SSPC-Paint 20. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 6 2.4 GROUT A. Metallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, metallic aggregate grout, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. B. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC 360. 1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 3. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected. 4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop- priming operations. B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M. C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC- SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning” F. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions. G. Steel Wall-Opening Framing: Select true and straight members for fabricating steel wall- opening framing to be attached to structural steel. Straighten as required to provide uniform, square, and true members in completed wall framing. H. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel framing members. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 7 2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work. 2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material. 2.7 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm). 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. 4. Galvanized surfaces. B. Painting: Prepare steel and apply a one-coat, nonasphaltic primer complying with SSPC- PS Guide 7.00, "Painting System Guide 7.00: Guide for Selecting One-Coat Shop Painting Systems," to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 2.8 GALVANIZING A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. 1. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work unless they will function as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. 2. Galvanize lintels and shelf angles located in exterior walls. 2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 8 B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. C. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." D. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: 1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. E. In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded shear connectors will be tested and inspected according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows: 1. Bend tests will be performed if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Tests will be conducted on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. 1. Prepare a certified survey of bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting deck construction until cast-in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 9 3.3 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360. B. Base Bearing and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond- reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service. E. Splice members only where indicated. F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1/D1.1M. G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. H. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 10 B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs where indicated, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections. B. Bolted Connections: Bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows: 1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Conduct tests on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M. E. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. 3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 11 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning. END OF SECTION 051200 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1 SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel framing and supports for overhead doors. 2. Steel framing and supports for countertops. 3. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 4. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 5. Steel girders for supporting wood frame construction. 6. Steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction. 7. Shelf angles. 8. Miscellaneous steel trim including steel angle corner guards steel edgings and loading- dock edge angles. 9. Metal bollards. 10. Abrasive metal nosings at exterior stairs. 11. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other Sections. B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section: 1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. 3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not specified in other Sections. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, wedge-type inserts, and other items cast into concrete. 2. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing." 3. Division 05 Section "Metal Stairs." 4. Division 05 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings." 5. Division 05 Section "Metal Gratings." 6. Division 05 Section "Decorative Metal." Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 2 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes. 2. Prefabricated building columns. 3. Metal nosings and treads. 4. Paint products. 5. Grout. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. C. Samples for Verification: For each type and finish of extruded nosing. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer. B. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. C. Welding certificates. D. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 3 B. Coordinate installation of anchorages and steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. 2.2 FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304. C. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304. D. Abrasive-Surface Floor Plate: Steel plate with abrasive granules rolled into surface or with abrasive material metallically bonded to steel. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. IKG Industries, a division of Harsco Corporation; Mebac. b. SlipNOT Metal Safety Flooring, a W. S. Molnar company; SlipNOT. E. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing. F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated. G. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4. 1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches (41 by 41 mm). 2. Material: Cold-rolled steel, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B; 0.0966- inch (2.5-mm) minimum thickness; unfinished. H. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 NONFERROUS METALS A. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 6061-T6. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 4 C. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6. D. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F. E. Bronze Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Bars: ASTM B 36/B 36M, Alloy UNS No. C28000 (muntz metal, 60 percent copper). F. Bronze Extrusions: ASTM B 455, Alloy UNS No. C38500 (extruded architectural bronze). G. Bronze Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C83600 (leaded red brass) or No. C84400 (leaded semired brass). H. Nickel Silver Extrusions: ASTM B 151/B 151M, Alloy UNS No. C74500. I. Nickel Silver Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C97600 (20 percent leaded nickel bronze). 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. 2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel. 3. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver. B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. C. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 325, Type 3 (ASTM A 325M, Type 3); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563, Grade C3 (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S3); and, where indicated, flat washers. D. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M); with hex nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M); and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1 (A1). E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. 1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized. F. Eyebolts: ASTM A 489. G. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3 (ASME B18.6.7M). H. Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M). Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 5 I. Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1. J. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1 (ASME B18.22M). K. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1 (ASME B18.21.2M). L. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. M. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329. N. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 (A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M). O. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches (41 by 22 mm) by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long at not more than 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 painting Sections. C. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer. D. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat. E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. F. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 6 G. Nonshrink, Metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, ferrous-aggregate grout complying with ASTM C 1107, specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy-duty loading applications. H. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. I. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa). 2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 7 1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches (3.2 by 38 mm), with a minimum 6-inch (150-mm) embedment and 2-inch (50-mm) hook, not less than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends and corners of units and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. 1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed. C. Fabricate steel girders for wood frame construction from continuous steel shapes of sizes indicated. 1. Provide bearing plates welded to beams where indicated. 2. Drill or punch girders and plates for field-bolted connections where indicated. 3. Where wood nailers are attached to girders with bolts or lag screws, drill or punch holes at 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. D. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. E. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated. 2.8 SHELF ANGLES A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch (19-mm) bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from ends and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide mitered and welded units at corners. 2. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint approximately 2 inches (50 mm) larger than expansion or control joint. B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and concrete. C. Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls. D. Prime shelf angles located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer. E. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-in- place concrete. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 8 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible. B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. 1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction. C. Prime exterior miscellaneous steel trim with zinc-rich primer. 2.10 METAL BOLLARDS A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe. B. Prime bollards with zinc-rich primer and paint as indicated in Division Sections. 2.11 ABRASIVE METAL NOSINGS A. Cast-Metal Units: Cast iron, with an integral-abrasive, as-cast finish consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both. Fabricate units in lengths necessary to accurately fit openings or conditions. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: a. American Safety Tread Co., Inc. b. Balco Inc. c. Barry Pattern & Foundry Co., Inc. d. Granite State Casting Co. e. Safe-T-Metal Company, Inc. f. Wooster Products Inc. 2. Nosings: Cross-hatched units with lip as indicated, for casting into concrete steps. B. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as standard with manufacturer. C. Apply bituminous paint to concealed surfaces of cast-metal units. D. Apply clear lacquer to concealed surfaces of extruded units. 2.12 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 9 B. Galvanize plates. C. Prime plates with zinc-rich primer. 2.13 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths for each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated. B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span but not less than 8 inches (200 mm) unless otherwise indicated. C. Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer. 2.14 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete. 2.15 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. C. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface. 2.16 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. 1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated. 1. Shop prime with universal shop primer unless zinc-rich primer is indicated. C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below: 1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 10 2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 3. Items Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Division 09 Section "High-Performance Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 4. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors. E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. 3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 11 3.3 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS A. Fill metal-capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days before installing. 1. Do not fill removable bollards with concrete. B. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align bollards in holes 3 inches (75 mm) above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured. C. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water. 3.4 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. 1. Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations unless otherwise indicated. 2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness. B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 09 painting Sections. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 055000 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 1 SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel tube railings. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring railings. 2. Division 09 Section "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for metal backing for anchoring railings. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following: 1. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength. C. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 2 E. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings. 2. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required. 1. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails. 2. Assembled Sample of railing system, made from full-size components, including , handrail, and support. . a. Show method of finishing and connecting members at intersections. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer. B. Welding certificates. C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 3 1.8 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Steel Tube Railings: a. Pisor Industries, Inc. b. Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies. 2.2 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 STEEL AND IRON A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513. B. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads. 1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated. C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 4 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Provide the following: 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating. B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: 1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method for railings indicated. D. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material for Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 1 (A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M). 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. C. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Cementitious galvanized metal primer complying with MPI#26. D. Epoxy Intermediate Coat: Complying with MPI #77 and compatible with primer and topcoat. E. Polyurethane Topcoat: Complying with MPI #72 and compatible with undercoat. F. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. 1. Water-Resistant Product: At exterior locations provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 5 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads. B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated. H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. I. Form changes in direction as follows: 1. As detailed. 2. By flush bends or by inserting prefabricated flush-elbow fittings. J. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. K. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns. L. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. M. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 6 2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. D. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of railings. 2.8 STEEL FINISHES A. Galvanized Railings: 1. Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel railings, including hardware, after fabrication.. 2. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings. 3. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware. 4. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. 5. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. B. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components. C. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner. D. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry. E. High-Performance Coating: Apply epoxy intermediate and polyurethane topcoats to prime- coated surfaces. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions and with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Apply at spreading rates recommended by coating manufacturer. 1. Color: As selected from manufacturer’s full range. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 7 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine wall assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5 mm in 3 m). C. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. 3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field. 3.4 ATTACHING RAILINGS A. Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction and welded to railing ends. B. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Provide brackets with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. 1. Fabricate bracket as indicated with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. 2. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. C. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows: Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 8 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 2. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into studs or wood backing between studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and rinsing with clean water. B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 055213 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 057300 - 1 SECTION 057300 - DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel and iron decorative railings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring railings. 2. Section 062023 "Interior Finish Carpentry" and/or Section 064300 "Wood Stairs and Railings" for wood railing components. 3. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for metal backing for anchoring railings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Railings: Guards, handrails, and similar devices used for protection of occupants at open-sided floor areas and for pedestrian guidance and support, visual separation, or wall protection. 1.4 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written instructions to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible. B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver items to Project site in time for installation. C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not meet structural performance requirements. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 057300 - 2 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Manufacturer's product lines of railings assembled from standard components. 2. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or design, including mechanical finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required. 1. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top rails, posts, and balusters. 2. Fittings and brackets. 3. Welded connections. 4. Brazed connections. 5. Assembled Samples of railing systems, made from full-size components, including top rail, post, handrail, and infill. Show method of finishing members at intersections. Samples need not be full height. E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. B. Welding certificates. C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. D. Preconstruction test reports. E. Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 057300 - 3 B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockups for each form and finish of railing consisting of two posts, top rail, infill area, and anchorage system components that are full height and are not less than 24 inches (600 mm) in length. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer. B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods, including structural analysis, preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of railings and are based on the specific system indicated. See Section 016000 "Product Requirements." 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design railings, including attachment to building construction. B. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following: 1. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 057300 - 4 C. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. (0.093 sq. m). b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2.3 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide formed-steel brackets with predrilled hole for bolted anchorage and with snap-on cover that matches rail finish and conceals bracket base and bolt head. 2.4 STEEL AND IRON A. Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M (cold formed) or ASTM A 513. B. Bars: Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M, Grade 1010. C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. D. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 FASTENERS A. Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Uncoated Steel Components: Plated-steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating where concealed; Type 304 stainless- steel fasteners where exposed. 2. Galvanized-Steel Components: Plated-steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating. 3. Dissimilar Metals: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 057300 - 5 B. Fasteners for Anchoring to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. C. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching railings to other work unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide square or hex socket flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. D. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC193 or ICC-ES AC308. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy [Group 1 (A1)] [Group 2 (A4)] stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M). 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Wood Rails: Clear, straight-grained hardwood rails secured to recessed metal subrail. 1. Species: As indicated in Inter Design Documents. 2. Finish: Transparent polyurethane. 3. Staining: Match Architect's sample. 4. Profile: As indicated. B. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. C. Polyurethane Topcoat: Complying with MPI#72 and compatible with undercoat. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M. E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. F. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. 1. Water-Resistant Product: At exterior locations provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 057300 - 6 2.7 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads. B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. Locate weep holes in inconspicuous locations. F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated. H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 welds; no evidence of a welded joint. I. Mechanical Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. 1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is manufacturer's standard splicing method. J. Form changes in direction as follows: 1. By bending to smallest radius that will not result in distortion of railing member. K. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. L. Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated end fittings. M. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns, unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch (6 mm) or less. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 057300 - 7 N. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. 1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush- resistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and to prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate. O. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. P. For railing posts set in concrete, provide steel sleeves not less than 6 inches (150 mm) long with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) greater than outside dimensions of post, with metal plate forming bottom closure. 2.8 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipment. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. D. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of railings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 057300 - 8 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m). 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5 mm in 3 m). C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. 3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings. B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field. 3.4 ANCHORING POSTS A. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows: 1. For steel railings, weld flanges to posts and bolt to metal-supporting surfaces. 3.5 ATTACHING RAILINGS A. Attach handrails to walls with wall brackets except where end flanges are used. Provide brackets with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. 1. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. 2. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. B. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows: 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 057300 - 9 2. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean wood rails by wiping with a damp cloth and then wiping dry. B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units. END OF SECTION 057300 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 1 SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Framing with timber. 3. Framing with engineered wood products. 4. Shear wall panels. 5. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 6. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 7. Wood furring. 8. Wood sleepers. 9. Utility shelving. 10. Plywood backing panels. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 06 Section "Sheathing." 2. Division 06 Section "Glue-Laminated Construction" for structural and exterior decorative beams. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction. B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater but less than 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) in least dimension. C. Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) or greater in least dimension. D. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service. 4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 2 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664. 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. B. Fastener Patterns: Full-size templates for fasteners in exposed framing. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review. B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 1. Wood-preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Engineered wood products. 4. Shear panels. 5. Power-driven fasteners. 6. Powder-actuated fasteners. 7. Expansion anchors. 8. Metal framing anchors. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire- retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 3 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency. 3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent unless otherwise indicated. C. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates. 2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 4 B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls. 4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches (460 mm) above the ground in crawlspaces or unexcavated areas. 5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade. 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire- test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire- retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. 3. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according ASTM D 5664 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6841. For enclosed roof framing, framing in attic spaces, and where high temperature fire-retardant treatment is indicated, provide material with adjustment factors of not less than 0.85 modulus of elasticity and 0.75 for extreme fiber in bending for Project's climatological zone. C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 5 D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by testing agency. E. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. F. Application: items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Exterior siding, trim and soffit material. 2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: No. 2 grade. 1. Application: All interior partitions 2. Species: a. Hem-fir (north); NLGA. b. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. c. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. d. Hem-fir; WCLIB, or WWPA. e. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA. f. Northern species; NLGA. g. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA. h. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA. B. Load-Bearing Partitions: No. 2 grade. 1. Application: Exterior walls and interior load-bearing partitions. 2. Species: a. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA. C. Ceiling Joists: No. 2 grade. 1. Species: a. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA. D. Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: No. 2 grade. 1. Species: a. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA. E. Exposed Framing: Provide material hand-selected for uniformity of appearance and freedom from characteristics, on exposed surfaces and edges, that would impair finish appearance, including decay, honeycomb, knot-holes, shake, splits, torn grain, and wane. 1. Application: Exposed exterior and interior framing indicated to receive a stained or natural finish. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 6 2.5 TIMBER FRAMING A. Provide timber framing complying with the following requirements, according to grading rules of grading agency indicated: 1. Species and Grade: Douglas fir-larch, Douglas fir-larch (north), or Douglas fir-south; No. 1 grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 2. Species and Grades for Non-Structural and Structural exposed to public view: Douglas fir-larch to match appearance grade and finish of Glued-Laminated Timber. 2.6 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS A. Engineered Wood Products, General: Products shall contain no urea formaldehyde. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of engineered wood product from single source from a single manufacturer. C. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Boise Cascade Corporation. b. Finnforest USA. c. Georgia-Pacific. d. Jager Building Systems Inc. e. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation. f. Pacific Woodtech Corporation. g. Roseburg Forest Products Co. h. Standard Structures Inc. i. Stark Truss Company, Inc. j. West Fraser Timber Co., Ltd. k. Weyerhaeuser Company. 2. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2800 psi (17.9 MPa) for 12-inch nominal- (286-mm actual-) depth members. 3. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 2,000,000 psi (13 700 MPa). D. Parallel-Strand Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood strand elements with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 7 a. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation. b. Weyerhaeuser Company. 2. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2900 psi (20 MPa) for 12-inch nominal- (286-mm actual-) depth members. 3. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 2,200,000 psi (15 100 MPa). E. Wood I-Joists: Prefabricated units, I-shaped in cross section, made with solid or structural composite lumber flanges and wood-based structural panel webs, let into and bonded to flanges. Provide units complying with material requirements of and with structural capacities established and monitored according to ASTM D 5055. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Anthony-Domtar Inc. b. Boise Cascade Corporation. c. Georgia-Pacific. d. J. M. Huber Corporation. e. International Beams Inc. f. International Paper Corporation. g. Jager Building Systems Inc. h. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation. i. Nascor Incorporated. j. Pacific Woodtech Corporation. k. Roseburg Forest Products Co. l. Standard Structures Inc. m. Stark Truss Company, Inc. n. Superior Wood Systems. o. Weyerhaeuser Company. 2. Web Material: Either oriented strand board or plywood, complying with DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, Exposure 1. 3. Structural Properties: Provide units with depths and design values not less than those indicated for the basis of design product. 4. Provide units complying with APA PRI-400, factory marked with APA trademark indicating nominal joist depth, joist class, span ratings, mill identification, and compliance with APA standard. F. Rim Boards: Product designed to be used as a load-bearing member and to brace wood I-joists at bearing ends, complying with research/evaluation report for I-joists. 1. Manufacturer: Provide products by same manufacturer as I-joists. 2. Material: All-veneer product, glued-laminated wood, or product made from any combination solid lumber, wood strands, and veneers. 3. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 4. Provide performance-rated product complying with APA PRR-401, rim board grade, factory marked with APA trademark indicating thickness, grade, and compliance with APA standard. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 8 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Cants. 5. Furring. 6. Grounds. 7. Utility shelving. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide or No. 2 grade lumber and the following species: 1. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. C. For utility shelving, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. Eastern white pine, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; Premium or No. 2 Common (Sterling) grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 2. Mixed southern pine; No. 2 grade; SPIB. 3. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north);Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 4. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir; Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. D. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. Mixed southern pine; No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north); Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir; Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 4. Eastern softwoods; No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA. 5. Northern species; No. 2 Common grade; NLGA. 6. Western woods; Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA. E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. F. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling. 2.8 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, AC in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch (13-mm) nominal thickness. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 9 2.9 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or Type 304 stainless steel. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M). F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Grade A1 or A4). 2.10 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. 2. KC Metals Products, Inc. 3. Phoenix Metal Products, Inc. 4. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. 5. USP Structural Connectors. B. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated of basis of design products. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 10 C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation. 1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated. D. Hot-Dip, Heavy-Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; structural steel (SS), high- strength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G185 (Z550) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick. 1. Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated. E. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. 1. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. F. Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch- (50-mm-) long seat and 1-1/4-inch- (32- mm-) wide nailing flanges at least 85 percent of joist depth. 1. Thickness: 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) G. I-Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch- (50-mm-) long seat and 1-1/4-inch- (32- mm-) wide nailing flanges full depth of joist. Nailing flanges provide lateral support at joist top chord. 1. Thickness: 0.050 inch (1.3 mm). H. Top Flange Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers, full depth of joist, formed from metal strap with tabs bent to extend over and be fastened to supporting member. 1. Strap Width: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) 2. Thickness: 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) I. Bridging: Rigid, V-section, nailless type, 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) thick, length to suit joist size and spacing. J. Post Bases: Adjustable-socket type for bolting in place with standoff plate to raise post 1 inch (25 mm) above base and with 2-inch- (50-mm-) minimum side cover, socket 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick, and standoff and adjustment plates 0.108 inch (2.8 mm) thick. K. Joist Ties: Flat straps, with holes for fasteners, for tying joists together over supports. 1. Width: 3/4 inch (19 mm) 2. Thickness: 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) 3. Length: 16 inches (400 mm), as indicated. L. Rafter Tie-Downs: Bent strap tie for fastening rafters or roof trusses to wall studs below, 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) thick. Tie fastens to side of rafter or truss, face of top plates, and side of stud below. M. Rafter Tie-Downs (Hurricane or Seismic Ties): Bent strap tie for fastening rafters or roof trusses to wall studs below, 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) wide by 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick. Tie fits Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 11 over top of rafter or truss and fastens to both sides of rafter or truss, face of top plates, and side of stud below. N. Floor-to-Floor Ties: Flat straps, with holes for fasteners, for tying upper floor wall studs to band joists and lower floor studs, 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide by 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) thick by 36 inches (914 mm) long. O. Hold-Downs: Brackets for bolting to wall studs and securing to foundation walls with anchor bolts or to other hold-downs with threaded rods and designed with first of two bolts placed seven bolt diameters from reinforced base or as specified on drawings. P. Wall Bracing: T-shaped bracing made for letting into studs in saw kerf, 1-1/8 inches (29 mm) wide by 9/16 inch (14 mm) deep by 0.034 inch (0.85 mm) thick with hemmed edges. Q. Wall Bracing: Angle bracing made for letting into studs in saw kerf, 15/16 by 15/16 by 0.040 inch (24 by 24 by 1 mm) thick with hemmed edges. 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. B. Adhesives for Gluing Furring and Sleepers to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer. C. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2- propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active ingredient. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. D. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. E. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 12 F. Install sill sealer gasket to form continuous seal between sill plates and foundation walls. G. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. H. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. I. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows: 1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces. 2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal- (38-mm actual-) thickness. 3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) and to solidly fill space below partitions. J. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. K. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. L. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. M. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. N. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 13 1. Comply with indicated fastener patterns where applicable. Before fastening, mark fastener locations, using a template made of sheet metal, plastic, or cardboard. 2. Use finishing nails unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill holes with wood filler. 3.2 WOOD GROUND, SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated. C. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. 3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work. B. Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal- (19-by-63- mm actual-) size furring horizontally and vertically at 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. C. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board or cementitious backer units: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal- (19-by-38-mm actual-) size furring vertically at 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. 3.4 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION A. General: Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be used for non-load-bearing partitions and for load-bearing partitions where framing members bearing on partition are located directly over studs. Fasten plates to supporting construction unless otherwise indicated. 1. For exterior walls, provide 2-by-6-inch nominal- (38-by-140-mm actual-) size wood studs spaced 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. For interior partitions and walls, provide 2-by-6-inch nominal- (38-by-140-mm actual-) size wood studs spaced 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midheight of partitions more than 96 inches (2438 mm) high, using members of 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness and of same width as wall or partitions. B. Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs, except that two studs may be used for interior non-load-bearing partitions. C. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness equal to width of studs. Support headers on jamb studs. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 14 1. For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double-jamb studs and headers not less than 4- inch nominal (89-mm actual) depth for openings 48 inches (1200 mm) and less in width, 6-inch nominal (140-mm actual) depth for openings 48 to 72 inches (1200 to 1800 mm) in width, 8-inch nominal (184-mm actual) depth for openings 72 to 120 inches (1800 to 3000 mm) in width, and not less than 10-inch nominal (235-mm actual) depth for openings 10 to 12 feet (3 to 3.6 m) in width. 2. For load-bearing walls, provide double-jamb studs for openings 60 inches (1500 mm) and less in width, and triple-jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers of depth indicated or, if not indicated, according to Table R502.5(1) or Table R502.5(2), as applicable, in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings. D. Provide diagonal bracing in walls, at locations indicated, at 45-degree angle, full-story height unless otherwise indicated. Use 1-by-4-inch nominal- (19-by-89-mm actual-) size boards, let-in flush with faces of studs or metal wall bracing, let into studs in saw kerf. 3.5 FLOOR JOIST FRAMING INSTALLATION A. General: Install floor joists with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) of bearing on wood or metal, or 3 inches (76 mm) on masonry. Attach floor joists as follows: 1. Where supported on wood members, by toe nailing or by using metal framing anchors. 2. Where framed into wood supporting members, by using wood ledgers as indicated or, if not indicated, by using metal joist hangers. B. Frame openings with headers and trimmers supported by metal joist hangers; double headers and trimmers where span of header exceeds 48 inches (1200 mm). C. Do not notch in middle third of joists; limit notches to one-sixth depth of joist, one-third at ends. Do not bore holes larger than 1/3 depth of joist; do not locate closer than 2 inches (50 mm) from top or bottom. D. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness by depth of joist at ends of joists unless nailed to header or band. E. Lap members framing from opposite sides of beams, girders, or partitions not less than 4 inches (102 mm) or securely tie opposing members together. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness by depth of joist over supports. F. Anchor members paralleling masonry with 1/4-by-1-1/4-inch (6.4-by-32-mm) metal strap anchors spaced not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c., extending over and fastening to three joists. Embed anchors at least 4 inches (102 mm) into grouted masonry with ends bent at right angles and extending 4 inches (102 mm) beyond bend. G. Provide solid blocking between joists under jamb studs for openings. H. Under non-load-bearing partitions, provide double joists separated by solid blocking equal to depth of studs above. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 15 1. Provide triple joists separated as above, under partitions receiving ceramic tile and similar heavy finishes or fixtures. I. Provide bridging of type indicated below, at intervals of 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c., between joists. 1. Diagonal wood bridging formed from bevel-cut, 1-by-3-inch nominal- (19-by-64-mm actual-) size lumber, double-crossed and nailed at both ends to joists. 2. Steel bridging installed to comply with bridging manufacturer's written instructions. 3.6 CEILING JOIST AND RAFTER FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Ceiling Joists: Install ceiling joists with crown edge up and complying with requirements specified above for floor joists. Face nail to ends of parallel rafters. 1. Where ceiling joists are at right angles to rafters, provide additional short joists parallel to rafters from wall plate to first joist; nail to ends of rafters and to top plate and nail to first joist or anchor with framing anchors or metal straps. Provide 1-by-8-inch nominal- (19- by-184-mm actual-) size or 2-by-4-inch nominal- (38-by-89-mm actual-) size stringers spaced 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. crosswise over main ceiling joists. B. Rafters: Notch to fit exterior wall plates and toe nail or use metal framing anchors. Double rafters to form headers and trimmers at openings in roof framing, if any, and support with metal hangers. Where rafters abut at ridge, place directly opposite each other and nail to ridge member or use metal ridge hangers. 1. At valleys, provide double-valley rafters of size indicated or, if not indicated, of same thickness as regular rafters and 2 inches (50 mm) deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full bearing against valley rafters. 2. At hips, provide hip rafter of size indicated or, if not indicated, of same thickness as regular rafters and 2 inches (50 mm) deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full bearing against hip rafter. C. Provide special framing as indicated for eaves, overhangs, dormers, and similar conditions if any. 3.7 TIMBER FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Install timber with crown edge up and provide not less than 4 inches (102 mm) of bearing on supports. Provide continuous members unless otherwise indicated; tie together over supports as indicated if not continuous. B. Where beams or girders are framed into pockets of exterior concrete or masonry walls, provide 1/2-inch (13-mm) air space at sides and ends of wood members. C. Install wood posts using metal anchors indicated. D. Treat ends of timber beams and posts exposed to weather by dipping in water-repellent preservative for 15 minutes. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 16 3.8 STAIR FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Provide stair framing members of size, space, and configuration indicated or, if not indicated, to comply with the following requirements: 1. Size: 2-by-12-inch nominal- (38-by-286-mm actual-) size, minimum. 2. Material: Laminated-veneer lumber parallel-strand lumber or solid lumber as indicated in Structural Documents. 3. Notching: Notch rough carriages to receive treads, risers, and supports; leave at least 3- 1/2 inches (89 mm) of effective depth. 4. Spacing: At least three framing members for each 36-inch (914-mm) clear width of stair. 5. Provide stair framing with no more than 3/16-inch (4.7-mm) variation between adjacent treads and risers and no more than 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) variation between largest and smallest treads and risers within each flight. 3.9 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes sufficiently wet that moisture content exceeds that specified, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. END OF SECTION 061000 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SHEATHING 061600 - 1 SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wall sheathing. 2. Roof sheathing. 3. Composite nail base insulated roof sheathing. 4. Subflooring. 5. Underlayment. 6. Sheathing joint and penetration treatment. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels. 2. Division 07 Section "Weather Barriers" for water-resistive barrier applied over wall sheathing. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials. 3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated plywood both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5516. 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SHEATHING 061600 - 2 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For following products, from ICC-ES: 1. Preservative-treated plywood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated plywood. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire- retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory." 2.2 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS A. Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2 unless otherwise indicated. B. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2. C. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness indicated. D. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SHEATHING 061600 - 3 2.3 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and plywood in contact with masonry or concrete or used with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2.4 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED PLYWOOD A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire- test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-retardant-treated plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. 3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. 4. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber plywood shall be tested according ASTM D 5516 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6305. Span ratings after treatment shall be not less than span ratings specified. For roof sheathing and where high-temperature fire-retardant treatment is indicated, span ratings for temperatures up to 170 deg F (76 deg C) shall be not less than span ratings specified. C. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. D. Identify fire-retardant-treated plywood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. E. Application: Treat plywood indicated on Drawings. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SHEATHING 061600 - 4 2.5 WALL SHEATHING A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing. 1. Span Rating: as specified on Drawings 2. Nominal Thickness: as specified on Drawings B. Oriented-Strand-Board Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing. 1. Span Rating: as specified on drawings. 2. Nominal Thickness: as specified on drawings 2.6 ROOF SHEATHING A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing. 1. Span Rating: as shown on drawings. 2. Nominal Thickness: as shown on drawings B. Oriented-Strand-Board Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing. 1. Span Rating: as shown on drawings 2. Nominal Thickness: as shown on drawings 2.7 SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT A. Plywood Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: DOC PS 1, single-floor panels. 1. Span Rating: as shown on drawings. 2. Nominal Thickness: as shown on drawings 3. Edge Detail: Tongue and groove. 4. Surface Finish: Fully sanded face at exposed surfaces not indicated to receive concrete topping. B. Oriented-Stand-Board Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: Exposure 1 single-floor panels. 1. Span Rating: as shown on drawings 2. Nominal Thickness: as shown on drawings 3. Edge Detail: Tongue and groove. 4. Surface Finish: Fully sanded face at exposed surfaces not indicated to receive concrete topping. 2.8 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. For roof and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M of Type 304 stainless steel. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SHEATHING 061600 - 5 B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. Screws for Fastening Oriented-Strand-Board-Surfaced, Polyisocyanurate-Foam Sheathing to Roof Deck: Steel drill screws, in type and length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing to be attached, with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117. Provide washers or plates if recommended by sheathing manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members. B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated. C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code." D. Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood. E. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly. F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements. G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast. 3.2 FIBERBOARD SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C 846 and with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Fasten fiberboard sheathing panels to intermediate supports and then at edges and ends. Use galvanized roofing nails; comply with manufacturer's recommended spacing and referenced Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SHEATHING 061600 - 6 fastening schedule. Drive fasteners flush with surface of sheathing and locate perimeter fasteners at least 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) from edges and ends. C. Install sheathing vertically with long edges parallel to, and centered over, studs. Install solid wood blocking where end joints do not occur over framing. Allow 1/8-inch (3-mm) open space between edges and ends of adjacent units. Stagger horizontal joints if any. D. Cover sheathing as soon as practical after installation to prevent deterioration from wetting. END OF SECTION 061600 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 061753 - 1 SECTION 061753 - SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wood roof trusses. 2. Wood truss bracing. 3. Metal truss accessories. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for roof sheathing and subflooring. DEFINITIONS C. Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses: Planar structural units consisting of metal-plate- connected members fabricated from dimension lumber and cut and assembled before delivery to Project site. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For metal-plate connectors, metal truss accessories, and fasteners. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for trusses. 1. Show location, pitch, span, camber, configuration, and spacing for each type of truss required. 2. Indicate sizes, stress grades, and species of lumber. 3. Indicate locations, sizes, and materials for permanent bracing required to prevent buckling of individual truss members due to design loads. 4. Indicate type, size, material, finish, design values, orientation, and location of metal connector plates. 5. Show splice details and bearing details. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal-plate-connected wood trusses indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 061753 - 2 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For metal connector-plate manufacturer professional engineer and fabricator. B. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum specific gravity. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and specific gravity. C. Product Certificates: For metal-plate-connected wood trusses, signed by officer of truss fabricating firm. D. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 1. Metal-plate connectors. 2. Metal truss accessories. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Metal Connector-Plate Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer that is a member of TPI and that complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1 for manufacture of connector plates. 1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. 2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that participates in a recognized quality-assurance program that complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1 and that involves third-party inspection by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle and store trusses to comply with recommendations in TPI BCSI, "Building Component Safety Information: Guide to Good Practice for Handling, Installing, Restraining, & Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." 1. Store trusses flat, off of ground, and adequately supported to prevent lateral bending. 2. Protect trusses from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. 3. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. B. Inspect trusses showing discoloration, corrosion, or other evidence of deterioration. Discard and replace trusses that are damaged or defective. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 061753 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design metal-plate-connected wood trusses. B. Structural Performance: Provide metal-plate-connected wood trusses capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. Comply with requirements in TPI 1 unless more stringent requirements are specified below. 1. Design Loads: As indicated in Structural Documents. 2. Maximum Deflection Under Design Loads: a. Roof Trusses: Vertical deflection of span. As indicated in Structural Documents. C. Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of the following publications: 1. TPI 1, "National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction." 2. TPI DSB, "Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." 3. TPI BCSI, "Building Component Safety Information: Guide to Good Practice for Handling, Installing, Restraining, & Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." D. Wood Structural Design Standard: Comply with applicable requirements in AF&PA's "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction" and its "Supplement." 2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S. 3. Provide dry lumber with maximum moisture content at time of dressing as indicated in Structural Documents. B. Permanent Bracing: Provide wood bracing that complies with requirements for miscellaneous lumber in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry." 2.3 METAL CONNECTOR PLATES A. Source Limitations: Obtain metal connector plates from single manufacturer. B. General: Fabricate connector plates to comply with TPI 1. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 061753 - 4 C. Hot-Dip Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; Structural Steel (SS), high-strength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G60 (Z180) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick. 1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Provide fasteners for use with metal framing anchors that comply with written recommendations of metal framing manufacturer. 2. Where trusses are exposed to weather, in ground contact, made from pressure- preservative treated wood, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. 2.5 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS AND ACCESSORIES A. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation. 1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated. C. Hot-Dip Heavy-Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; Structural Steel (SS), high- strength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G185 (Z550) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick. 1. Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated. D. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. 1. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. E. Truss Tie-Downs: Bent strap tie for fastening roof trusses to wall studs below, 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) thick. F. Truss Tie-Downs (Hurricane or Seismic Ties): Bent strap tie for fastening roof trusses to wall studs below, 2-1/2 inches (63 mm) wide by 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick. Tie fits over top of truss and fastens to both sides of truss, inside face of top plates, and both sides of stud below. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 061753 - 5 G. Roof Truss Clips: Angle clips for bracing bottom chord of roof trusses at non-load-bearing walls, 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide by 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) thick. Clip is fastened to truss through slotted holes to allow for truss deflection. H. Roof Truss Bracing/Spacers: U-shaped channels, 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 1 inch (25 mm) deep by 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick, made to fit between two adjacent trusses and accurately space them apart, and with tabs having metal teeth for fastening to trusses. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20, with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles, and sizes to produce close-fitting joints. B. Fabricate metal connector plates to sizes, configurations, thicknesses, and anchorage details required to withstand design loads for types of joint designs indicated. C. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated; use jigs or other means to ensure uniformity and accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply with tolerances in TPI 1. Position members to produce design camber indicated. 1. Fabricate wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances in TPI 1. D. Connect truss members by metal connector plates located and securely embedded simultaneously in both sides of wood members by air or hydraulic press. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install wood trusses only after supporting construction is in place and is braced and secured. B. If trusses are delivered to Project site in more than one piece, assemble trusses before installing. C. Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, exercising care not to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending or other causes. D. Install and brace trusses according to TPI recommendations and as indicated. E. Install trusses plumb, square, and true to line and securely fasten to supporting construction. F. Space trusses as indicated; adjust and align trusses in location before permanently fastening. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 061753 - 6 G. Anchor trusses securely at bearing points; use metal truss tie-downs or floor truss hangers as applicable. Install fasteners through each fastener hole in metal framing anchors according to manufacturer's fastening schedules and written instructions. H. Securely connect each truss ply required for forming built-up girder trusses. I. Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or beams. 1. Install bracing to comply with Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry." J. Install wood trusses within installation tolerances in TPI 1. K. Do not alter trusses in field. Do not cut, drill, notch, or remove truss members. L. Replace wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements. 1. Damaged trusses may be repaired according to truss repair details signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for truss design, when approved by Architect. 3.2 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Protect wood trusses from weather. If, despite protection, wood trusses become wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA- registered label. B. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on exposed surfaces with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 061753 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 061800 - 1 SECTION 061800 - GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes framing using structural glued-laminated timber. B. Section includes framing using non-structural glued-laminated timber for horizontal “beams” located on the exterior of the building and exposed to view. 1. Non-Structural beams should match appearance and grade of exterior structural beam ends exposed to view. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for dimension lumber items associated with structural glued-laminated timber and heavy timber construction. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Glued-Laminated (Glulam) Timber: An engineered, stress-rated timber product assembled from selected and prepared wood laminations bonded together with adhesives and with the grain of the laminations approximately parallel longitudinally. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design structural glued-laminated timber and connectors, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Structural Performance: Structural glued-laminated timber and connectors shall withstand the effects of structural loads shown on Drawings without exceeding allowable design working stresses listed in AITC 117 or determined according to ASTM D 3737 and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Include data on lumber, adhesives, fabrication, and protection. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 061800 - 2 2. For preservative-treated wood products, include chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material. 3. For connectors, include installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Show layout of structural glued-laminated timber system and full dimensions of each member. 2. Indicate species and laminating combination, adhesive type, and other variables in required work. 3. Include large-scale details of connections. C. Samples: Full width and depth, 24 inches (600 mm) long, showing the range of variation to be expected in appearance of structural glued-laminated timber, including variations due to specified treatment. 1. Apply specified factory finish to three sides of half length of each Sample. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For structural glued-laminated timber and timber connectors indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Conformance: Issued by a qualified testing and inspecting agency indicating that structural glued-laminated timber complies with requirements in AITC A190.1. B. Material Certificates: For preservative-treated wood products, from manufacturer. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For structural glued-laminated timber and timber connectors. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide factory-glued structural units produced by an AITC- or APA-licensed firm. 1. Factory mark each piece of structural glued-laminated timber with AITC Quality Mark or APA-EWS trademark. Place mark on surfaces that will not be exposed in the completed Work. B. Quality Standard: Comply with AITC A190.1. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with provisions in AITC 111. B. Individually wrap members using plastic-coated paper covering with water-resistant seams. Do not allow growth of mold or bacteria under covering. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 061800 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER A. General: Provide structural glued-laminated timber that complies with AITC 117 or research/evaluation reports acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide structural glued-laminated timber made from single species. 2. Provide structural glued-laminated timber made from solid lumber laminations; do not use laminated veneer lumber. 3. Provide structural glued-laminated timber made with wet-use adhesive complying with AITC A190.1. B. Species and Grades for Structural Glued-Laminated Timber: Douglas fir-larch in grades needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. C. Species and Grades for Structural Glued-Laminated Timber: Douglas fir-larch that complies with structural properties, combination symbols, beam stress classifications indicated. D. Species and Grades for Beams and Purlins not exposed to view: 1. Species and Beam Stress Classification: Douglas fir-larch, 24F-1.8E. E. Species and Grades for Beams and Purlins exposed to view (exterior): 1. Species and Beam Stress Classification: Douglas fir-larch, 24F-1.8E 2. Lay-up: Balanced. 3. Species and Combination Symbol: F. Species and Grades for Columns 1. Species and Combination Symbol: Douglas fir-larch, 1. G. Appearance Grade: 1. Premium with Rough Sawn Surfacing at exposed (exterior) ends complying with AITC 110. 2. Framing at interior surfaces not exposed to public view complying with AITC 110. 3. For Premium appearance grades, fill voids as required by AITC 110. For Premium appearance grade, use clear wood inserts, of matching grain and color, for filling voids and knot holes more than 1/4 inch (6 mm) wide. H. Preservative Treatment after Fabrication: Where preservative-treated structural glued-laminated timber is indicated at exterior locations, pressure treat after fabrication according to AWPA C28. 1. Use preservative solution without water repellents or substances that might interfere with application of indicated finishes. 2. Do not incise structural glued-laminated timber. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 061800 - 4 I. End Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, colorless wood sealer that is effective in retarding the transmission of moisture at cross-grain cuts and is compatible with indicated finish. J. Penetrating Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, penetrating wood sealer that is compatible with indicated finish. 2.2 TIMBER CONNECTORS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from the following materials: 1. Structural-steel shapes, plates, and flat bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Round steel bars complying with ASTM A 575, Grade M 1020. 3. Hot-rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Structural Steel, Type SS, Grade 33. 4. Stainless-steel plate and flat bars complying with ASTM A 666, Type 304. 5. Stainless-steel bars and shapes complying with ASTM A 276, Type 304. 6. Stainless-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 666, Type 304. B. Fabricate beam seats from steel with 3/16-inch (5-mm) bearing plates, 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) diameter-by-12-inch- (300-mm-) long deformed bar anchors, and 0.239-inch (6-mm) side plates. C. Fabricate arch base shoes from steel with 1-inch (25-mm) base plates and 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) side plates. D. Fabricate beam hangers from steel with 0.179-inch (4.6-mm) stirrups and 0.239-inch (6-mm) top plates. E. Fabricate hinge connectors from steel with 0.179-inch (4.6-mm) side plates and 3/4-inch (19- mm) top and bottom plates. F. Fabricate strap ties from steel 3 inches (75 mm) wide by 0.239 inch (6 mm) thick. G. Fabricate tie rods from round steel bars with upset threads connected with forged-steel turnbuckles complying with ASTM A 668/A 668M. H. Provide bolts, 3/4 inch (19 mm) unless otherwise indicated, complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); nuts complying with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. I. Provide shear plates, 2-5/8 inches (66.7 mm) in diameter, complying with ASTM D 5933. J. Finish steel assemblies and fasteners with rust-inhibitive primer, 2-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate for connections to greatest extent possible, including cutting to length and drilling bolt holes. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 061800 - 5 1. Dress exposed surfaces as needed to remove planing and surfacing marks. B. Camber: Fabricate horizontal and inclined members of less than 1:1 slope with either circular or parabolic camber equal to 1/500 of span. C. End-Cut Sealing: Immediately after end cutting each member to final length and after preservative treatment, apply a saturation coat of end sealer to ends and other cross-cut surfaces, keeping surfaces flood coated for not less than 10 minutes. D. Seal Coat: After fabricating, sanding, and end-coat sealing, apply a heavy saturation coat of penetrating sealer on surfaces of each unit, except for preservative-treated wood where treatment included a water repellent. 2.4 FACTORY FINISHING A. Wiped Stain Finish: Manufacturer's standard, dry-appearance, penetrating acrylic stain and sealer; oven dried and resistant to mildew and fungus at exterior surfaces exposed to public view. 1. Color: selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates in areas to receive structural glued-laminated timber, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of structural glued-laminated timber. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Erect structural glued-laminated timber true and plumb, and with uniform, close- fitting joints. Provide temporary bracing to maintain lines and levels until permanent supporting members are in place. 1. Lift with padded slings and protect corners with wood blocking. 2. Install structural glued-laminated timber to comply with Shop Drawings. 3. Install timber connectors as indicated. B. Framing Built into Masonry: Provide 1/2-inch (13-mm) clearance at tops, sides, and ends of members built into masonry; bevel cut ends 3 inches (76 mm); and do not embed more than 4 inches (102 mm) unless otherwise indicated. C. Fit structural glued-laminated timber by cutting and restoring exposed surfaces to match specified surfacing and finishing. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 061800 - 6 1. Predrill for fasteners using timber connectors as templates. 2. Dress exposed surfaces as needed to remove planing and surfacing marks. 3. Coat cross cuts with end sealer. 4. Where preservative-treated members must be cut during erection, apply a field-treatment preservative to comply with AWPA M4. a. Use inorganic boron (SBX) treatment for members not in contact with the ground and continuously protected from liquid water. b. Use copper naphthenate treatment for members in contact with the ground or not continuously protected from liquid water. D. Cutting: Avoid cutting after fabrication. Where field fitting is unavoidable, comply with requirements for shop fabrication. 1. Where preservative-treated members must be cut during erection, apply a field-treatment preservative to comply with AWPA M4. a. Use inorganic boron (SBX) treatment for members not in contact with the ground and continuously protected from liquid water. b. Use copper naphthenate treatment for members in contact with the ground or not continuously protected from liquid water. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Repair damaged surfaces and finishes after completing erection. Replace damaged structural glued-laminated timber if repairs are not approved by Architect. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Do not remove wrappings on individually wrapped members until they no longer serve a useful purpose including protection from weather, sunlight, soiling, and damage from work of other trades. 1. Coordinate wrapping removal with finishing work specified in Division 09. Retain wrapping where it can serve as a painting shield. 2. Slit underside of wrapping to prevent accumulation of moisture inside the wrapping. END OF SECTION 061800 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062013 - 1 SECTION 062013 - EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior wood trim. 2. Lumber siding. 3. Wood soffits. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not exposed to view and for timber framing exposed to view. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. 2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced before shipment to Project site to levels specified. 3. Include copies of warranties from chemical-treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product involving selection of colors, profiles, or textures. C. Samples for Verification: 1. For each species and cut of lumber and wood, with 1/2 of exposed surface finished; 50 sq. in. (300 sq. cm) for lumber. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Compliance Certificates: Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062013 - 2 1. For lumber that is not marked with grade stamp. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Build mockups for siding and soffit including accessories. a. Size: 48 inches (1200 mm) long by 60 inches (1800 mm) high. b. Include outside corner on one end of mockup. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire- retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect materials from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecast weather conditions permit work to be performed and at least one coat of specified finish can be applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness. B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062013 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and the following grading rules: 1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association, "Standard Grading Rules for Northeastern Lumber." 2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority, "Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber." 3. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service, "Standard Specifications for Grades of California Redwood Lumber." 4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, "Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber." 5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau, Standard No. 17, "Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber." 6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association, "Western Lumber Grading Rules." B. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 1. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece. 2.2 EXTERIOR TRIM A. Lumber Trim for Semitransparent-Stained or Clear Finish : 1. Species and Grade: Western red cedar, Grade B Clear and better; NLGA. 2. Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent. 3. Finger Jointing: Not allowed 4. Face Surface: Smooth. 2.3 LUMBER SIDING A. Provide kiln-dried lumber siding complying with DOC PS 20, factory coated with exterior primer compatible with topcoats specified. B. Species and Grade: Grade D and Better, Clear, western red cedar; NLGA. C. Pattern: Siding A (Horizontal): Shiplapped Siding, actual face width (coverage) and thickness of 10¾” by 23/32 inch, measured at 19 percent moisture content. D. Pattern: Siding B (Horizontal – at Trash Enclosure): Dutch (German, Cove) Lap siding, WWPA pattern No. 105, actual face width (coverage) and thickness of 10¾” by 23/32 inch, measured at 19 percent moisture content. E. Pattern: Horizontal Banding, Accent Trim and Corner Boards (Horizontal and Vertical): actual face width (coverage) and thickness of 11½ ” by 1½” (219 by 18 mm), measured at 19 percent moisture content. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062013 - 4 2.4 LUMBER SOFFITS A. Provide kiln-dried lumber siding complying with DOC PS 20, factory coated with exterior primer compatible with topcoats specified. B. Species and Grade: Grade A western red cedar; NLGA. A. Pattern: Siding C (Soffits): Shiplapped Drop siding, WWPA pattern V-CV Rustic, actual face width (coverage) and thickness of 10¾” by 23/32 inch, measured at 19 percent moisture content. B. Pattern: Siding C (Soffits -Alternate): Shiplapped Drop siding, WWPA pattern V Rustic, actual face width (coverage) and thickness of 5” by 23/32 inch, measured at 19 percent moisture content. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length to penetrate not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into wood sheathing studs. 1. For face-fastening siding, provide hot-dip galvanized-steel siding nails. 2. For applications not otherwise indicated, provide hot-dip galvanized-steel fasteners. B. Flashing: Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing materials installed in exterior finish carpentry. C. Sealants: Latex, complying with ASTM C 834 Type OP, Grade NF and with applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," recommended by sealant manufacturer and manufacturer of substrates for intended application. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac. b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 600. c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil-A 700. d. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. e. Schnee-Morehead, Inc., an ITW company; SM 8200. f. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Back out or kerf backs of standing and running trim wider than 5 inches (125 mm), except members with ends exposed in finished work. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062013 - 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. B. Prime lumber and moldings to be painted, including both faces and edges, unless factory primed. Cut to required lengths and prime ends. Comply with requirements in Division 09 Section "Exterior Painting." 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements. B. Install exterior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 1. Scribe and cut exterior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2438 mm) for level and plumb. Install adjoining exterior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) maximum offset for reveal installation. 3. Coordinate exterior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate exterior finish carpentry. 3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION A. Install flat-grain lumber with bark side exposed to weather. B. Install trim with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches (610 mm) long except where necessary. 1. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. 2. Stagger end joints in adjacent and related members. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062013 - 6 C. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints, where necessary for alignment. D. Where face fastening is unavoidable, countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 SIDING INSTALLATION A. Horizontal Lumber Siding: Apply starter strip along bottom edge of sheathing or sill. Install first course of siding with lower edge at least 1/8 inch (3 mm) below starter strip and subsequent courses lapped over course below. Nail at each stud. Do not allow nails to penetrate more than one thickness of siding. 1. Leave 1/8-inch (3-mm) gap at trim and corners unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer, and apply sealant. 2. Butt joints only over framing or blocking, nailing top and bottom on each side and staggering joints in subsequent courses. B. Vertical Lumber Siding: Begin application at corner with tongue edge up. Install subsequent courses with tongue-and-groove edges tightly fitted together. Nail at piece of blocking. 1. Leave 1/8-inch (3-mm) gap at trim and corners, and apply sealant. 2. Butt joints only over framing or blocking, nailing top and bottom on each side and staggering joints in subsequent courses. C. Flashing: Install metal flashing as indicated on Drawings. D. Finish: Apply finish within two weeks of installation. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Replace exterior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Exterior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean exterior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during construction. B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062013 - 7 1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 062013 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 1 SECTION 064023 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior standing and running trim. 2. Interior frames and jambs. 3. Wood paneling and wainscots (baseboard covers). 4. Wood cabinets. 5. Plastic laminates. 6. Wood countertops. 7. Closet and utility shelving. 8. Shop finishing of interior woodwork. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 2. Division 06 Section "Finish Carpentry" for interior carpentry exposed to view that is not specified in this Section. 3. Division 12 Section "Stone Countertops" for stone countertops. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including panel products cabinet hardware and accessories and finishing materials and processes. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details full size. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 2 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in architectural woodwork. 4. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf. C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Shop-applied transparent finishes. 2. Shop-applied opaque finishes. 3. Plastic laminates. 4. PVC edge material. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Lumber with or for transparent finish, not less than 5 inches (125 mm) wide by 24 inches (600 mm) long, for each species and cut, finished on 1 side and 1 edge. 2. Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparent- finished woodwork. 3. Veneer-faced panel products with or for transparent finish, 12 by 24 inches (300 by 600 mm), for each species and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam and finish as specified. 4. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish. 5. Corner pieces as follows: a. Cabinet-front frame joints between stiles and rails, as well as exposed end pieces, 18 inches (450 mm) high by 18 inches (450 mm) wide by 6 inches (150 mm) deep. b. Miter joints for standing trim. 6. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator. B. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer. C. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. B. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 3 C. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production of interior architectural woodwork with sequence-matched wood veneers wood doors with face veneers that are sequence matched with woodwork and transparent-finished wood doors that are required to be of same species as woodwork. D. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program labels and certificates indicating that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified. E. Mockups: Build mockups of baseboard covers to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 17 and 50 percent during the remainder of the construction period. C. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 4 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. B. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)" to fabricator of architectural woodwork; coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Alder-Rift Sawn as inidcated in Interiro Specification Sheets. C. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Any closed-grain hardwood. D. Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 4. Particleboard: Straw-based particleboard complying with requirements in ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, except for density. 5. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay. 6. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde. E. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1. 1. Provide PVC or polyester edge banding complying with LMA EDG-1 on components with exposed or semiexposed edges. F. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering high-pressure decorative laminates that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure decorative laminates by one of the following: Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 5 a. Abet Laminati, Inc. b. Arborite; Division of ITW Canada, Inc. c. Formica Corporation. d. Lamin-Art, Inc. e. Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div. f. Panolam Industries International Incorporated. g. Westinghouse Electric Corp.; Specialty Products Div. h. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc. G. Tempered Float Glass for Cabinet Doors: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3; with exposed edges seamed before tempering, 1/4”thick. H. Tempered Float Glass for Cabinet Shelves: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3; with exposed edges seamed before tempering, 1”thick, Flat Polished Edges. 2.2 SHELVING AND CLOTHES RODS A. Closet and Utility Shelving: Made from one of the following materials, 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick. 1. MDO softwood plywood with solid-wood edge. 2. Wood boards as specified above for lumber trim for opaque finish. 3. Softwood Boards: Eastern white, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, radiata, or sugar pine; Finish or 1 Common (Colonial) or Premium or 2 Common (Sterling); NeLMA, NLGA, or WWPA; kiln dried. 4. Softwood Boards: Douglas fir-larch, Douglas fir south, or hem-fir; Prime or D finish; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA; or southern pine, B & B or C finish; SPIB; kiln dried. B. Shelf Cleats: 3/4-by-3-1/2-inch (19-by-89-mm) boards, as specified above for shelving or lumber trim for opaque finish. C. Shelf Brackets with Rod Support: BHMA A156.16, B04051; prime-painted formed steel. D. Standards for Adjustable Shelf Brackets: BHMA A156.9, B04102; zinc-plated steel. E. Adjustable Shelf Brackets: BHMA A156.9, B04112; zinc-plated steel. F. Standards for Adjustable Shelf Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; zinc-plated steel. G. Adjustable Shelf Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04081 or B04091; zinc-plated steel. H. Clothes Rods: 1-5/16-inch- (33-mm-) diameter, chrome-plated-steel tubes. I. Rod Flanges: Chrome-plated steel. 2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for items specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)." Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 6 B. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch (70-mm), 5-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick metal, and as follows: 1. Semiconcealed Hinges for Overlay Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01521. C. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 170 degrees of opening, self-closing. D. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011. E. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, As indicated in Interior Specification Sheets. F. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141. G. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04102; with shelf brackets, B04112. H. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091. 1. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-overtravel- extension type; zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides. 2. Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for drawers not more than 6 inches (150 mm) high and 24 inches (600 mm) wide. 3. File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-200; for drawers more than 6 inches (150 mm) high or 24 inches (600 mm) wide. 4. Pencil Drawer Slides: Grade 1; for drawers not more than 3 inches (75 mm) high and 24 inches (600 mm) wide. 5. Keyboard Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for computer keyboard shelves. 6. Trash Bin Slides: Grade 1HD-200; for trash bins not more than 20 inches (500 mm) high and 16 inches (400 mm) wide. I. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121. J. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041. K. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 1-1/4-inch (32-mm) OD, black, molded- plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "[OG] [SG] series" by Doug Mockett & Company, Inc. L. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630. M. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 7 B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. C. Adhesives, General: Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde. D. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives: Installation adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. 2. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. 3. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L. E. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement. 1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Premium-grade interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard. B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas. C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment. E. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 8 F. Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and in GANA's "Glazing Manual." 2.6 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Grade: Premium. B. Wood Species and Cut: Match species and cut indicated for other types of transparent-finished architectural woodwork located in same area of building, unless otherwise indicated. C. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. D. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field assembly. 2.7 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Grade: Premium. B. Wood Species and Cut: Match species and cut indicated for other types of transparent-finished architectural woodwork located in same area of building, unless otherwise indicated. C. For frames or jambs wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width. 2.8 FLUSH WOOD PANELING A. Grade: Premium. B. Wood Species and Cut: Alder –Rift Sawn as indicated in Interior Specification Sheets. 1. Lumber Trim and Edges: At fabricator's option, trim and edges indicated as solid wood (except moldings) may be either lumber or veneered construction compatible with grain and color of veneered panels. C. Matching of Adjacent Veneer Leaves: Center Balance match. D. Veneer Matching within Panel Face: Center-Balance match. E. Panel-Matching Method: Match panels within each separate area by the following method: 1. Sequence-matched, uniform-size sets as indicated. F. Vertical Panel-Matching Method (Solid Doors): Panel vertical book match; panels are book matched from lower panels to upper panels. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 9 2.9 INTERIOR ORNAMENTAL WORK FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Interior ornamental work for transparent finish includes the following: 1. Columns. 2. Pilasters. 3. Box Beams. B. Grade: Premium. C. Wood Species and Cut: Match species and cut indicated for other types of transparent-finished architectural woodwork located in same area of building, unless otherwise indicated. 2.10 WOOD CABINETS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Grade: Premium. B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: As indicated in Drawings. C. Reveal Dimension: As indicated. D. Wood Species and Cut for Exposed Surfaces: Alder - Rift Sawn. 1. Grain Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels. 2. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Book match. 3. Vertical Matching of Veneer Leaves: End match. 4. Veneer Matching within Panel Face: Center-balance match. 5. Veneer Matching within Room: Provide cabinet veneers in each room or other space from a single flitch with doors, drawer fronts, and other surfaces matched in a sequenced set with continuous match where veneers are interrupted perpendicular to the grain. E. Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Compatible species to that indicated for exposed surfaces, stained to match. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber, stained to match species indicated for exposed surfaces. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood. F. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers, unless located directly under tops. 2.11 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS (ROOM 024) A. Grade: Economy. B. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS. C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 10 1. As indicated by manufacturer's designations. D. Edge Treatment: Lumber edge for transparent finish matching wood species and cut on bench. E. Core Material: Exterior-grade plywood. F. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate. 2.12 CLOSET AND UTILITY SHELVING A. Grade: Custom. B. Shelf Material: 3/4-inch (19-mm) thermoset decorative panel with PVC or polyester edge banding. C. Cleats: 3/4-inch (19-mm) solid lumber. D. Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood. 2.13 SHOP FINISHING A. Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished. B. General: Shop finish transparent-finished interior architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Refer to Division 09 painting Sections for finishing opaque-finished architectural woodwork. C. Shop Priming: Shop apply the prime coat including backpriming, if any, for transparent- finished items specified to be field finished. Refer to Division 09 painting Sections for material and application requirements. D. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-grain surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset decorative panels. E. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. AWI Finish System: Catalyzed vinyl. 3. AWI Finish System: Catalyzed polyurethane.(Bar Top) 4. Staining: Match Architect's sample. 5. Wash Coat for Stained Finish: Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from closed- grain wood before staining and finishing. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 11 6. Filled Finish for Open-Grain Woods: After staining (if any), apply paste wood filler to open-grain woods and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood. a. Apply wash-coat sealer after staining and before filling. 7. Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523. F. Opaque Finish: 1. Grade: Economy. 2. AWI Finish System: Catalyzed vinyl. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Sheen: Flat, 15-30 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved. B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. F. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 96 inches (2400 mm) long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 12 1. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood base if finished. 2. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). G. Paneling: Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with splined connection strips. Do not use face fastening, unless covered by trim. 1. Install flush paneling with no more than 1/16 inch in 96-inch (1.5 mm in 2400-mm) vertical cup or bow and 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) horizontal variation from a true plane. H. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch (25-mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips. I. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1. Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. 2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 3. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." J. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. K. Refer to Division 09 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork not indicated to be shop finished. 3.3 SHELVING AND CLOTHES ROD INSTALLATION A. Cut shelf cleats at ends of shelves about 1/2 inch (13 mm) less than width of shelves and sand exposed ends smooth. B. Install shelf cleats by fastening to framing or backing with finish nails or trim screws, set below face and filled. Space fasteners not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. Use 2 fasteners at each framing member or fastener location for cleats 4 inches nominal (89 mm actual) in width and wider. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 13 1. Apply a bead of multipurpose construction adhesive to back of shelf cleats before installing. Remove adhesive that is squeezed out after fastening shelf cleats in place. C. Install shelf brackets according to manufacturer's written instructions, spaced not more than 32 inches (800 mm) o.c. Fasten to framing members, blocking, or metal backing, or use toggle bolts or hollow wall anchors. D. Install standards for adjustable shelf supports according to manufacturer's written instructions. Fasten to framing members, blocking, or metal backing, or use toggle bolts or hollow wall anchors. Space fasteners not more than 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. E. Install standards for adjustable shelf brackets according to manufacturer's written instructions, spaced not more than 36 inches (900 mm) o.c. and within 6 inches (150 mm) of end of shelves. Fasten to framing members, blocking, or metal backing, or use toggle bolts or hollow wall anchors. F. Cut shelves to neatly fit openings with only enough gap to allow shelves to be removed and reinstalled. Install shelves, fully seated on cleats, brackets, and supports. 1. Fasten shelves to cleats with finish nails or trim screws, set flush. 2. Fasten shelves to brackets to comply with bracket manufacturer's written instructions. G. Install rod flanges for rods as indicated. Fasten to shelf cleats, framing members, blocking, or metal backing, or use toggle bolts or hollow wall anchors. Install rods in rod flanges. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 064023 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 WOOD STAIRS AND RAILINGS 064300 - 1 SECTION 064300 - WOOD STAIRS AND RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wood stairs and railings, including rough carriages for stairs. 2. Shop finishing of wood stairs and railings. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. LEED Submittals: B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings. C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Shop-applied transparent finishes. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Certificates: For each type of product. C. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. B. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 WOOD STAIRS AND RAILINGS 064300 - 2 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver wood stairs and railings until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If wood stairs and railings must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wood stairs and railings until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wood stairs and railings until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 17 and 50 percent during the remainder of the construction period. C. Field Measurements: Where wood stairs and railings are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. D. Established Dimensions: Where wood stairs and railings are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where woodwork is to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wood stairs and railings can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOODWORK FABRICATORS 2.2 WOOD STAIRS AND RAILINGS A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 WOOD STAIRS AND RAILINGS 064300 - 3 1. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard. B. Grade: Premium. C. Wood for Transparent Finish: As indicated in Interior Documents. D. Finishes for Stair Parts: As follows: 1. Treads: Transparent. 2. Risers: Transparent. 3. Stringers (Trim): Transparent. 4. Balusters: Metal. 5. Handrails: Transparent. 6. Scotia, Cove, and Other Moldings: Transparent. 2.3 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use plain-sawn softwood lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 3 inches (75 mm) wide. 2. Wood Moisture Content: 4 to 9 percent. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Rough Carriages for Stairs: Laminated veneer lumber, made with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559, and with the allowable design values as indicated in Structural Documents. C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous- metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate wood stairs and railings to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Corners of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) unless otherwise indicated. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 WOOD STAIRS AND RAILINGS 064300 - 4 shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment. C. Cut carriages to accurately fit treads and risers. Glue treads to risers, and glue and nail treads and risers to carriages. 1. House wall and face stringers and glue and wedge treads and risers. 2. Fabricate stairs with treads and risers no more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from indicated position and no more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) out of relative position for adjacent treads and risers. 2.6 SHOP FINISHING A. General: Shop finish transparent-finished wood stairs and railings at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. B. Shop Priming: Shop apply the prime coat including backpriming, if any, for transparent-finished items specified to be field finished. Refer to Section 099123 "Interior Painting" and Section 099300 "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for material and application requirements. C. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. D. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition wood stairs and railings to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing wood stairs and railings, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 WOOD STAIRS AND RAILINGS 064300 - 5 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install wood stairs and railings to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B. Assemble wood stairs and railings and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Stairs: Securely anchor carriages to supporting substrates. Install stairs with treads and risers no more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from indicated position. D. Railings: 1. General: Install rails with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) variation from a straight line. 2. Stair Rails: Glue and dowel or pin balusters to treads and railings, and railings to newel posts. 3. Wall Rails: Support rails on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall framing. a. Space rail brackets not more than 4’-0” o.c. E. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of wood stairs and railings. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. 1. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats are applied in shop. F. Refer to [Section 099123 "Interior Painting"] [and] [Section 099300 "Staining and Transparent Finishing"] for final finishing of installed wood stairs and railings[ not indicated to be shop finished]. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective wood stairs and railings, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace wood stairs and railings. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean wood stairs and railings on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 064300 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 WOOD FRAMES 064800 - 1 SECTION 064800 - WOOD FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior frames and jambs. 2. Shop priming wood frames and jambs. 3. Shop finishing wood frames and jambs. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including finishing materials and processes. 1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. 2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4.4: For composite wood products, B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings. C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Shop-applied transparent finishes. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Lumber for transparent finish, not less than 5 inches (125 mm) wide by 12 inches (300 mm) long, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator. B. Product Certificates: For each type of product. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 WOOD FRAMES 064800 - 2 C. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance.Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups of typical wood frames as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver wood frames until operations that could damage wood frames have been completed in installation areas. If wood frames must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations for Interior Work: Do not deliver or install interior wood frames until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where wood frames are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support wood frames by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. C. Established Dimensions: Where wood frames are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where wood frames are to fit. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wood frames can be supported and installed as indicated. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 WOOD FRAMES 064800 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD FRAMES, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of wood frames indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Provide labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified. 2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard. 2.2 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Grade: Custom. B. Wood Species and Cut: Match species and cut indicated for other types of transparent-finished architectural woodwork located in same area of building unless otherwise indicated. 1. Species: As indicated in Interior Design Specifications. 2. Cut: As indicated in Interior Design Specifications. C. For frames or jambs wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width. 2.3 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of wood frame and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Moisture Content for Exterior Materials: 7 to 12 percent. 2. Wood Moisture Content for Interior Materials: 4 to 9 percent. B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of wood frame and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Particleboard: Straw-based particleboard complying with requirements in ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, except for density. a. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Interior Blocking, Shims, and Nailers: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 WOOD FRAMES 064800 - 4 B. Provide self-drilling screws for metal-framing supports, as recommended by metal-framing manufacturer. C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous- metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate wood frames to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 SHOP PRIMING A. Interior Wood Frames for Transparent Finish: Shop seal with stain (if required), other required pretreatments, and first coat of finish as specified in Section 099300 "Staining and Transparent Finishing." B. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing wood frames, as applicable to each unit of work. 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of wood trim. Apply two coats to surfaces installed in contact with concrete or masonry and to end-grain surfaces. 2.7 SHOP FINISHING A. General: Finish wood frames at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation. B. General: Shop finish transparent-finished wood frames at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Refer to Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for field finishing opaque-finished wood frames. C. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing wood frames, as applicable to each unit of work. 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of wood frames. Apply two coats to end-grain surfaces. D. Transparent Finish for Interior Frames: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: System - 1, nitrocellulose lacquer. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 WOOD FRAMES 064800 - 5 3. Finish: System - 2, precatalyzed lacquer. 4. Finish: System - 3, postcatalyzed lacquer. 5. Finish: System - 4, water-based latex acrylic. 6. Finish: System - 5, conversion varnish. 7. Wash Coat for Closed-Grain Woods: Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from closed-grain wood before staining and finishing. 8. Staining: Match approved sample for color. 9. Filled Finish for Open-Grain Woods: After staining, apply wash-coat sealer and allow to dry. Apply paste wood filler and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood. 10. Sheen: Flat, 15-30 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition wood frames to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing wood frames, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install wood frames to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B. Assemble wood frames and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Install wood frames level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). D. Scribe and cut wood frames to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Anchor wood frames to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. 1. For shop-finished items, use filler matching finish of items being installed. F. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of wood frames. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. 1. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats are applied in shop. G. Refer to Section 099300 "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for final finishing of installed wood frames not indicated to be shop finished. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 WOOD FRAMES 064800 - 6 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective wood frames, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace wood frames. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean wood frames on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 064800 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING 071413 - 1 SECTION 071413 - HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. System Description: 1. Furnish and install a completed vertical and horizontal waterproofing assembly including surface conditioner, Monolithic Membrane 6125EV®-FR and related flashings, protection course, STYROFOAM® brand insulation, drainage course, and pavers. B. Section Includes: 1. Rubberized-asphalt waterproofing membrane, reinforced. 2. Molded-sheet drainage panels. 3. Insulation. 4. Plaza-deck pavers supported on pedestals. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 071416 "Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing" for cold fluid-applied, rubberized- asphalt roofing. 2. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation. 3. Section 079500 "Expansion Control" for expansion-joint systems. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review waterproofing requirements, including surface preparation, substrate condition and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special details and sheet flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and protection and repairs. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING 071413 - 2 B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins to adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions. 1. Include setting drawings showing layout, sizes, sections, profiles, and joint details of pedestal-supported concrete pavers. C. Samples: For plaza-deck pavers, in each color and texture required. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Field quality-control reports. C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer. 1. Certification or license by the membrane manufacturer as a locally based, authorized applicator of the product the installer intends to use, for a minimum of five (5) years. 2. List of at least three (3) projects, satisfactorily completed within the past five (5) years, of similar scope and complexity to this project. Previous experience submittal shall correspond to specific membrane system proposed for use by applicator. B. Mockups: Install waterproofing to 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) of combined deck and wall to demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, corner treatment, thickness, texture, and execution quality. Install pavers and paver supports to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged unopened containers of packaging clearly labeled with manufacturer's name, brand name, instruction for use and all identifying numbers. B. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life. C. Protect stored materials from water and direct sunlight. D. Store all adhesives at temperatures between 60°F (15.5°C) and 80°F (26.6°C). If exposed to lower temperatures, restore materials to 60°F (15.5°C) minimum temperature before using. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING 071413 - 3 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate, or when temperature is below zero deg F (minus 18 deg C). 1. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog, or mist. 2. All surfaces to receive the membrane shall be free of water, dew, frost, snow and ice. 3. Application of membrane shall not commence nor proceed when the ambient temperature is below 0°F (-17.7°C) B. Maintain adequate ventilation during application and curing of waterproofing materials. C. Over its service life, do not expose membrane or accessories to a constant temperature in excess of 180°F (82°C) (i.e., hot pipes and vents or direct steam venting, etc.). D. Adhesives contain petroleum distillates and are extremely flam-mable. Do not breathe vapors or use near an open fire. Do not use in confined areas without adequate ventilation. Consult container or packaging labels and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for specific safety information. E. Do not allow waste products (petroleum, grease, oil, solvents, vegetable or mineral oil animal fat, etc.) to come in contact with the waterproofing membrane. Any exposure to foreign materials or chemical discharges shall be presented to membrane manufacturer or evaluation to determine any impact on the waterproof membrane assembly performance. F. General contractor shall assure that adequate protection is provided after installation of the membrane and accessories to prevent damage from subsequent trade traffic. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Total System Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace waterproofing and sheet flashings that do not comply with requirements or that fail to remain watertight within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty includes removing and reinstalling protection board, drainage panels, insulation, pedestals, and pedestal-mounted pavers on plaza decks. 2. Warranty insulation retains 80 percent of original published thermal value. 3. Warranty pavers do not dish or warp and do not crack, split, or disintegrate in freeze- thaw conditions. 4. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Installer's Warranty: Specified form, on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, for warranty period of two years. 1. Warranty includes removing and reinstalling protection board, drainage panels, insulation, pedestals, and pedestal-mounted pavers on plaza decks. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING 071413 - 4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain waterproofing materials sheet flashings, protection course molded- sheet drainage panels, insulation pavers and pedestals from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE A. Hot Fluid-Applied, Fabric Reinforced (215 mil) Rubberized-Asphalt Waterproofing Membrane: Single component; 100 percent solids; hot fluid-applied, rubberized asphalt. 1. Horizontal Plaza Deck: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, “Ultimate Assembly” (Monolithic Membrane 6125 Fabric Reinforced (215 mil) Assembly), American Hydrotech Inc., 303 E. Ohio Street, Suite 2120, Chicago IL 60611–3387 (800-877–6125), www.hydrotechusa.com. 2. Horizontal Roof: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, Monolithic Membrane 6125 Fabric Reinforced (215 mil) Assembly, American Hydrotech Inc., 303 E. Ohio Street, Suite 2120, Chicago IL 60611–3387 (800-877–6125), www.hydrotechusa.com. 3. Vertical Walls: Monolithic Membrane 6125 (180 mil) Standard Assembly, American Hydrotech Inc., 303 E. Ohio Street, Suite 2120, Chicago IL 60611–3387 (800-877– 6125), www.hydrotechusa.com. 4. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with waterproofing. B. Surface Conditioner: Asphaltic surface conditioner for concrete surfaces, American Hydrotech, Inc., Surface Conditioner. C. Primer: ASTM D 41/D 41M, asphaltic primer. D. Elastomeric Sheet Flashing/Reinforcing (Horizontal Heavy Duty): 60-mil- (1.5-mm-) minimum, uncured sheet neoprene with manufacturer's recommended contact adhesives: American Hydrotech, Inc., Flex Flash UN. E. Woven fiberglass fabric reinforcing sheet (vertical applications only): American Hydrotech, Inc., Flex Flash FV® (vertical). F. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum termination bars; approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 by 3 mm) thick; with stainless-steel anchors. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING 071413 - 5 G. Sealants and Accessories: Manufacturer's recommended sealants and accessories. 1. Contact adhesive to bond elastomeric flashing together. American Hydrotech, Inc., Splicing Cement. 2. Pressure sensitive butyl tape to bond elastomeric flashing together. American Hydrotech, Inc., Splice Tape. 3. Contact adhesive to bond elastomeric flashing to an approved substrate, American Hydrotech, Inc., Bonding Adhesive. 4. Sealant to seal elastomeric flashing seam edge, American Hydrotech, Inc., Lap Sealant. H. Horizontal Protection Course: Manufacturer's standard, 80- to 90-mil- (2.0- to 2.3-mm-) thick, fiberglass-reinforced rubberized asphalt sheet, American Hydrotech, Inc., Hydroflex® 30. I. Vertical Drainage and Protection Course: Manufacturer's standard, Extruded polystyrene, rigid, insulating, drainage board (vertical applications only) American Hydrotech, Inc., Thermaflo™. J. Vertical Protection Course: Manufacturer's standard, Extruded polystyrene, rigid, insulation board (vertical applications only) STYROFOAM® brand insulation as manufactured by The Dow Chemical Company, marketed by American Hydrotech, Inc., Protection Board, SM, RM 2.4 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS A. Woven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Deck Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite subsurface drainage panels consisting of a woven-geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 40 (0.43-mm) sieve, laminated to one side with or without a polymeric film bonded to the other side of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core, with a horizontal flow rate not less than 2.8 gpm/ft. (35 L/min. per m). 2.5 INSULATION A. Unfaced Plaza-Deck Board Insulation: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, Type VII, 60-psi (414-kPa) minimum compressive resistance, square edged. 1. Horizontal Plaza Deck: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, STYROFOAM® Brand insulation (Plaza Mate) as manufactured by The Dow Chemical Company, marketed by American Hydrotech, Inc. 2. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> B. Unfaced Wall Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, Type VI, 40-psi (276-kPa) minimum compressive resistance; unfaced; fabricated with shiplap or channel edges and with one side having grooved drainage channels. 1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> C. Geotextile-Faced Wall Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, Type VI, 40-psi (276-kPa) minimum compressive resistance; fabricated with tongue-and-groove edges and with one side having grooved drainage channels faced with a nonwoven, geotextile filter fabric. 1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING 071413 - 6 2.6 PLAZA-DECK PAVERS A. Plaza-Deck Pavers: Heavyweight, hydraulically pressed, concrete units, square edged with top edges beveled 3/16 inch (5 mm), manufactured for use as plaza-deck pavers; minimum compressive strength 8500 psi (52 MPa), ASTM C 140; absorption not greater than 5 percent, ASTM C 140; no breakage and maximum 1 percent mass loss when tested for freeze-thaw resistance according to ASTM C 67. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, Hanover Pavers marketed by American Hydrotech Inc., 303 E. Ohio Street, Suite 2120, Chicago IL 60611–3387 (800-877–6125), www.hydrotechusa.com 2. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 3. Thickness: 2 inches (51 mm). 4. Face Size: 36 inches (915 mm) square. 5. Color: Cream B. Paver Supports: Paver manufacturer's standard SBR rubber, high-density polyethylene, or polyurethane paver support assembly, including fixed-height pedestals, shims, and spacer tabs for joint spacing of 1/8 to 3/16 inch (3 to 5 mm). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. 2. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application. B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction. C. Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and migration of waterproofing fluids. D. Remove grease, oil, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING 071413 - 7 E. Poured in place concrete shall be monolithic, smooth, free of voids, spalled areas, laitance, honeycombs, and sharp protrusions. 1. Structural Weight Concrete: recommend 28 days, minimum 14 days, prior to application of the membrane. 3.3 JOINTS, CRACKS, AND TERMINATIONS A. Prepare and treat substrates to receive waterproofing membrane, including joints and cracks, deck drains, corners, and penetrations according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Rout and fill joints and cracks in substrate. Before filling, remove dust and dirt according to ASTM D 4258. 2. Adhere strip of elastomeric sheet to substrate in a layer of hot rubberized asphalt. Extend elastomeric sheet a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) on each side of moving joints and cracks or joints and cracks exceeding 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick, and beyond deck drains and penetrations. Apply second layer of hot fluid-applied, rubberized asphalt over elastomeric sheet. 3. Embed strip of reinforcing fabric into a layer of hot rubberized asphalt. Extend reinforcing fabric a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) on each side of nonmoving joints and cracks not exceeding 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick, and beyond roof drains and penetrations. a. Apply second layer of hot fluid-applied, rubberized asphalt over reinforcing fabric. B. At expansion joints and discontinuous deck-to-wall or deck-to-deck joints, bridge joints with elastomeric sheet extended a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) on each side of joints and adhere to substrates in a layer of hot rubberized asphalt. Apply second layer of hot fluid-applied, rubberized asphalt over elastomeric sheet. 3.4 FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Install elastomeric sheets at terminations of waterproofing membrane according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Prime substrate with asphalt primer. C. Install elastomeric sheet and adhere to deck and wall substrates in a layer of hot rubberized asphalt. D. Extend elastomeric sheet up walls or parapets a minimum of 36 inches above plaza-deck pavers and 6 inches (150 mm) onto deck to be waterproofed. E. Install termination bars and mechanically fasten to top of elastomeric flashing sheet at terminations and perimeter of waterproofing. 3.5 MEMBRANE APPLICATION A. Apply primer, at manufacturer's recommended rate, over prepared substrate and allow it to dry. B. Heat and apply rubberized asphalt according to manufacturer's written instructions. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING 071413 - 8 1. Heat rubberized asphalt in an oil- or air-jacketed melter with mechanical agitator specifically designed for heating rubberized asphalt. C. Start application with manufacturer's authorized representative present. D. Unreinforced Vertical Membrane: Apply hot rubberized asphalt to substrates and adjoining surfaces indicated. Spread to form a uniform, unreinforced, seamless membrane, 180-mil (4.5- mm) minimum thickness. E. Reinforced Membrane: Apply hot rubberized asphalt to substrates and adjoining surfaces indicated. Spread to a thickness of 90 mils (2.3 mm); embed reinforcing fabric, overlapping sheets 2 inches (50 mm); spread another 125-mil- (3.2-mm-) thick layer to provide a uniform, reinforced, seamless membrane 215 mils (5.5 mm) thick. F. Apply waterproofing over prepared joints and up wall terminations and vertical surfaces 36” inches or required by manufacturer. G. Cover waterproofing with protection course with overlapped joints before membrane is subject to backfilling or construction traffic. 3.6 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall or deck substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use methods that do not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction. 1. For vertical applications, install board insulation or protection course as indicated in Drawings before installing drainage panels. 3.7 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Install insulation drainage panels over waterproofed surfaces. Cut and fit to within 3/4 inch (19 mm) of projections and penetrations. B. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units into rubberized asphalt according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units. 3.8 PLAZA-DECK PAVER INSTALLATION A. Install concrete pavers according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Accurately install fixed height paver pedestals and accessories to elevations required. Adjust for final level and slope with shims. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING 071413 - 9 C. Loosely lay pavers on pedestals, maintaining a uniform open joint width. Tightly seat pavers against spacers to eliminate lateral movement or drift of paving assembly. Align joint patterns parallel in each direction. 1. Lay out pavers to avoid less-than-half-width pavers at perimeter or other terminations. D. Install pavers to not vary more than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) in elevation between adjacent pavers or more than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) from surface plane elevation of individual paver. E. Limit variation in paving installation to within 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m) of surface plane in any direction; noncumulative. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Flood Testing: Flood test each deck area for leaks, according to recommendations in ASTM D 5957, after completing and protecting waterproofing but before overlaying construction is placed. Install temporary containment assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood with potable water. Architect and/or site representative shall observe flood testing. 1. Flood to an average depth of 2-1/2 inches (65 mm) with a minimum depth of 1 inch (25 mm) and not exceeding a depth of 4 inches (100 mm). Maintain 2 inches (50 mm) of clearance from top of sheet flashings. 2. Flood each area for 72 hours. 3. After flood testing, repair leaks, repeat flood tests, and make further repairs until waterproofing installation is watertight B. Engage a full-time site representative qualified by waterproofing membrane manufacturer to inspect substrate conditions; surface preparation; and application of membrane, flashings, protection, and drainage components; furnish daily reports to Architect if required by Manufacturer as a warranty condition. 1. Site representative shall measure membrane thickness with pin tester or other suitable device at least once for every 100 sq. ft. (10 sq. m) and include measurements in reports. C. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified testing agency to inspect substrate conditions, surface preparation, waterproofing application, protection, and drainage components, and to furnish reports to Architect. 3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. B. Protect installed board insulation and/or insulation drainage panels from damage due to UV light, harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING 071413 - 10 END OF SECTION 071413 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING 071413 - 1 SECTION 071413 - BENTONITE PANEL WATERPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. System Description: 1. The extent of Geotextile/Bentonite Clay (Blindside) waterproofing membrane is shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein. B. Section Includes: 1. Geotextile/Bentonite Clay waterproofing membrane Molded-sheet drainage panels. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, finishes and waterstops. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review waterproofing requirements, including surface preparation, substrate condition and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special details and sheet flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and protection and repairs. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins to adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions. C. Samples: For plaza-deck pavers, in each color and texture required. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING 071413 - 2 D. Water Sample Test Result: A water sample (2 liters) is required on projects that have ground water and should be submitted to the waterproofing manufacturer to test for contamination and compatibility with waterproofing membrane. Submit to architect a letter of compatibility recommending which formulation to use 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Field quality-control reports. C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer. 1. Certification or license by the membrane manufacturer as a locally based, authorized applicator of the product the installer intends to use, for a minimum of two (2) years. 2. List of at least three (3) projects, satisfactorily completed within the past five (5) years, of similar scope and complexity to this project. Previous experience submittal shall correspond to specific membrane system proposed for use by applicator. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged unopened containers of packaging clearly labeled with manufacturer's name, brand name, instruction for use and all identifying numbers. B. Protect stored materials from moisture. Remove and replace products that have been prematurely exposed to moisture 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate. 1. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog, or mist. 2. All surfaces to receive the membrane shall be free of water, dew, frost, snow and ice. B. General contractor shall assure that adequate protection is provided after installation of the membrane and accessories to prevent damage from subsequent trade traffic. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING 071413 - 3 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Total System Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace waterproofing and sheet flashings that do not comply with requirements or that fail to remain watertight within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain waterproofing materials sheet flashings, protection course molded- sheet drainage panels, insulation pavers and pedestals from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE A. Geotextile/Bentonite clay waterproofing membrane: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, “CCW MiraCLAY” supplied by Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Incorporated, 900 Hensley Lane, Wylie, Texas 75098, Phone (800) 527-7092 Fax: (972) 442-0076. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with waterproofing. B. Sealant: CCW MiraCLAY Sealant is used for detailing at terminations and penetrations. Also used to fill minor voids in concrete and as a fillet in angle changes. C. Granules: CCW MiraCLAY Granules used for horizontal to vertical transitions and for detailing at seams and slab penetrations. D. Waterstop: CCW MiraSTOP used as a waterstop at cold concrete pours and between pre- cast concrete panels. E. Membrane to Substrate Fasteners: Fasteners, of the type and length suitable for the substrate, shall be used in conjunction with washers, of at least 1” diameter to attach the geotextile/bentonite clay waterproofing membrane to the substrate. F. Membrane to Membrane Fasteners: Mechanically fasten membrane sheets together with a box stapler or similar device for horizontal applications. G. The Geotextile/Bentonite membrane shall consist of geotextile panels of sodium bentonite clay sandwiched between two layers of needle-punched woven and non-woven polypropylene fabrics. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING 071413 - 4 H. Drainage Composite: Shall be CCW MiraDRAIN® as recommended by the manufacturer for each condition. I. Perimeter Drainage System: Where required shall be CCW MiraDRAIN HC. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Grade Substrates: Shall be level and uniform that is compacted to a minimum of 85% modified proctor. B. Concrete Application: 1. Apply CCW MiraCLAY Sealant to all construction joints at a minimum of 1/4" (7 mm) thickness and a 3" (8 cm) minimum width. 2. Remove projections from the wall surface in excess of 3/4" (20 mm). C. Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and migration of waterproofing fluids. D. Remove grease, oil, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete. E. Poured in place concrete shall be monolithic, smooth, free of voids, spalled areas, laitance, honeycombs, and sharp protrusions. 1. Structural Weight Concrete: recommend 28 days, minimum 14 days, prior to application of the membrane. 3.3 MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Prevent geotextile/bentonite clay waterproofing membrane from hydrating before being covered with overburden. When threat of rain is imminent or backfill is not immediate, geotextile/bentonite clay waterproofing membrane should be covered with polyethylene sheeting. B. Underslab Application: (Concrete slab shall have a minimum thickness of 4" if reinforced or 5” if not reinforced). 1. Install CCW MiraCLAY with the white non-woven side up, facing the installer. 2. Overlap edges a minimum of 4” (10 cm). 3. Protect CCW MiraCLAY from damage caused by chairs with sharp edges or points by placing a patch of CCW MiraCLAY under the chair. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING 071413 - 5 4. Staple joints often enough to prevent excessive movement. 5. Pour CCW MiraCLAY Granules or trowel CCW MiraCLAY Sealant around all penetrations and press in “cut-to-fit” collars of CCW MiraCLAY. 6. Extend the installation of CCW MiraCLAY 12" (31 cm) up or beyond the perimeter slab forms. 7. Inspect and repair any damaged material before concrete pour. C. Concrete Wall Application: 1. Install CCW MiraCLAY with the white non-woven side out, facing the installer. 2. Starting at the bottom of the wall, unroll CCW MiraCLAY and nail across top of panel one nail per 12" (31 cm) on center. Allow sheet to hang down nailing only as required to stabilize. 3. Install adjacent membrane by overlapping edges a minimum of 4” (10cm). 4. Fasten membrane once every 18” (45 cm) on seams or as required to prevent blousing with 3/4” (20 mm) to 1” (25mm) concrete nails with washers. 5. Extend waterproofing membrane to 6” below grade and fasten membrane to the substrate to maintain constant compression using a 1/8” X 1” (3 X 25 mm) minimum termination bar. Trowel a 1/2” (12 mm) thick and 2” (5cm) wide bead of CCW MiraCLAY Sealant at top edge of membrane and cover termination bar. 6. Create a cant at any vertical to horizontal transition by applying a 1.5” to 2” (4 cm to 5 cm) cant of CCW MiraCLAY Granules or CCW MiraCLAY Sealant. 7. Strip in all outside corners and transitions with a min. 12" (30) piece of CCW MiraCLAY membrane to double cover these areas. 8. Make a min. 1” cant at all inside corners with CCW MiraCLAY Sealant. 9. Backfill must be compactible soils free of construction debris and must be uniformly compacted to a minimum 85% Modified Proctor density on each lift. D. Protection and Drainage: 1. Protect the geotextile/bentonite clay waterproofing membrane with CCW MiraDRAIN Drainage Composite. 2. Install the CCW MiraDRAIN Drainage Composite according to the detailed drawings for the specific installation requirements of the project E. Backfill: Backfill with smooth and uniform material with no sharp projections or stones larger than 3/4”. Compact backfill to an 85% Modified Proctor density. Ensure backfill material is not contaminated with salt or other materials that could prevent the CCW MiraCLAY from hydrating. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. B. Protect installed board insulation and/or insulation drainage panels from damage due to UV light, harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING 071413 - 6 END OF SECTION 071713 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 1 SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Glass-fiber blanket. 2. Extruded polystyrene foam-plastic board B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 071413 "Hot Fluid-Applied Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofing" for insulated plaza deck board insulation installed with plaza deck pavers and horizontal waterproofing system. 2. Section 071413 "Hot Fluid-Applied Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofing" for geo-textile faced or un-faced (with geotextile faced molded sheet drainage panels) wall insulation panels an insulated drainage panels installed with vertical waterproofing. 3. Section 072119 "Foamed-in-Place Insulation" for spray-applied polyurethane foam insulation. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. B. Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 2 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project site until just before installation time. 3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET A. Glass-Fiber Blanket, Unfaced: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke- developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2.2 EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD A. Extruded polystyrene boards in this article are also called "XPS boards." Roman numeral designators in ASTM C 578 are assigned in a fixed random sequence, and their numeric order does not reflect increasing strength or other characteristics. B. Extruded Polystyrene Board, Type IV <Above Grade Continuous Exterior Wall Insulation>: ASTM C 578, Type IV, 25-psi (173-kPa) minimum compressive strength; unfaced; maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84. 1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> C. Extruded Polystyrene Board, Type VII <Under-slab Insulation>: ASTM C 578, Type VII, 60- psi (414-kPa) minimum compressive strength; maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84. 1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product compatible with insulation and air and water barrier materials, and with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates. B. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids: 1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84. 2. Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029, Type II, closed cell, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of puncturing insulation or vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time. C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF SLAB INSULATION A. On vertical slab edge and foundation surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's recommended adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 36 inches (915 mm) below exterior grade line. B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units. 1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 36 inches (915 mm) in from exterior walls. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION A. Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 4 3. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation. 4. For wood-framed construction, install blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as follows: a. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish material is installed over it. B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials: 1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m). 2. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 072100 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION 072119 - 1 SECTION 072119 - FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Closed-cell spray polyurethane foam. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation" for foam-plastic board insulation. 2. Section 071413 "Hot Fluid Applied Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofing" for foam-plastic board insulation. 3. Section 078123 "Intumescent Fireproofing" for thermal and ignition barriers at unventilated attic areas. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. C. Evaluation Reports: For spray-applied polyurethane foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES. D. Evaluation Reports: For spray-applied polyurethane foam-plastic insulation and intumescent fireproofing assembly, from ICC-ES. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION 072119 - 2 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CLOSED-CELL SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM A. Closed-Cell Spray Polyurethane Foam: ASTM C 1029, Type II, minimum density of 1.5 lb/cu. ft. (24 kg/cu. m) and minimum aged R-value at 1-inch (25.4-mm) thickness of 6.2 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F (43 K x sq. m/W at 24 deg C). 1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame-Spread Index: 75 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 3. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved assembly. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by insulation manufacturer where required for adhesion of insulation to substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Verify that substrates are clean, dry, and free of substances that are harmful to insulation. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by insulation manufacturer. Apply primer to comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas to be insulated; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications. B. Spray insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated and fill voids. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION 072119 - 3 C. Apply in multiple passes to not exceed maximum thicknesses recommended by manufacturer. Do not spray into rising foam. D. Framed Construction: Install into cavities formed by framing members to achieve thickness indicated on Drawings. E. Miscellaneous Voids: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. END OF SECTION 072119 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 WEATHER BARRIERS 072500 - 1 SECTION 072500 - WEATHER BARRIERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Building paper. 2. Building wrap. 3. Flexible flashing. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for sheathing joint and penetration treatment. 2. Section 072713 "Modified Bituminous Sheet Air Barriers" for sheet air barrier applied over wall sheathing. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Weather Barrier Warranty: Manufacturer’s executed warranty form with authorized signatures and endorsements indicating date of Substantial Completion. 2. For building wrap, include data on air and water-vapor permeance based on testing according to referenced standards. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Design Data, Test Reports: Provide manufacturer test reports indicating product compliance with indicated requirements B. Manufacturer Instructions: Provide manufacturer’s written installation instructions. C. Manufacturer’s Field Service Reports: Provide site reports from authorized field service representative, indicating observation of weather barrier assembly installation. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 WEATHER BARRIERS 072500 - 2 A. Qualifications. 1. Installer shall have experience with installation of DuPont TM Tyvek® weather barrier assemblies under similar conditions. 2. Installation shall be in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer’s installation guidelines and recommendations. 3. Source Limitations: Provide weather barrier and accessory materials produced by single manufacturer. B. Mock-up. 1. Install mock-up using approved weather barrier assembly including fasteners, flashing, tape and related accessories per manufacturer’s current printed instructions and recommendations. a. Mock-up size: 10 feet by 10 feet. b. Mock-up Substrate: Match wall assembly construction, including window opening. c. Mock-up may remain as part of the work. 2. Contact manufacturer’s designated representative prior to weather barrier assembly installation, to perform required mock-up visual inspection and analysis as required for warranty. C. Pre-installation Meeting. 1. Hold a pre-installation conference, two weeks prior to start of weather barrier installation. Attendees shall include Contractor, Architect, installer, Owner’s Representative, and weather barrier manufacturer’s designated representative. 2. Review all related project requirements and submittals, status of substrate work and preparation, areas of potential conflict and interface, availability of weather barrier assembly materials and components, installer’s training requirements, equipment, facilities and scaffolding, and coordinate methods, procedures and sequencing requirements for full and proper installation, integration and protection. 1.6 Special Warranty A. Weather barrier manufacturer's warranty for weather barrier for a period of ten (10) years from date of purchase. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver weather barrier materials and components in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. B. Store weather barrier materials as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 WEATHER BARRIERS 072500 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER A. Building Paper: ASTM D 226, Type 1 (No. 15 asphalt-saturated organic felt), unperforated for interior uses behind stone veneer. B. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air barrier; UV stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Basis of Design: spunbonded polyolefin, non-woven, non-perforated, weather barrier is based upon DuPont™ Tyvek® CommercialWrap® D and related assembly components 2. Performance Characteristics: a. Air Penetration: 0.001 cfm/ft2 at 75 Pa when tested in accordance with ASTME2178. Type 1 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 1677. ≤0.04 cfm/ft @ 75 Pa when tested in accoradance with ASTM E2357. b. Water Vapor Transmission: 30 perms, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96, Method B. c. Water Penetration Resistance: 235 cm when tested in accordance with AATCC Test Method 127. d. Basis Weight: 2.4 oz/yd2, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-410. e. Air Infiltration Resistance: Air infiltration at >750 seconds, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-460. f. Tensile Strength: 33/41 lbs/in., when tested in accordance with ASTM D 822 , Method A. g. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 . Flame Spread: 15, Smoke Developed: 25. 3. Allowable UV Exposure Time: Not less than three months. C. Building-Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building-wrap manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap. 1. Basis of Design: DuPont™ Tyvek® Tape 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Self Adhering -- Dual-Sided Straight Flashing for use with non-flanged windows, doors and louvers. 1. Basis of Design: Dual-sided, self-adhering straight flashing membrane tape is based on DuPont™ StraightFlash™ VF 2. Description: a. Face Material Composition: Spunbonded polyethylene b. Face Color: white c. Adhesive Composition: Dual-sided butyl adhesive d. Thickness: 30 mil Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 WEATHER BARRIERS 072500 - 4 e. Release liner: 2-piece siliconized paper f. Dimension: 6 inches wide by 125 feet B. Self-Adhering – Flexible Flashing for use of miscellaneous openings and penetrations. 1. Basis of Design: Self-adhering flexible flashing membrane is based on DuPont™ FlexWrap™ NF. 2. Performance Characteristics: a. Water intrusion: No leakage at 75 Pa, when tested in accordance with ASTM E331. b. Water Vapor Permeability: < 1 perm, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96 3. Description: a. Face Material Composition: Conformable textured polyethylene laminate barrier. b. Face color: White. c. Adhesive composition: Butyl adhesive d. Thickness: 64 mil e. Release liner: 2-part siliconized paper. f. Dimension: 9 inches wide by 75 feet. C. Sealants: Provide sealant that complies with ASTM C920, elastomeric polymer sealant to maintain watertight conditions. D. Primer for Flexible Flashing: Product recommended by manufacturer of flexible flashing for substrate. 1. Basis of Design: a. 3M High Strength 90 b. Denso Butyl Spray c. SIA 655 d. Permagrip 105 e. ITW TACC Sta’ Put SPH E. Nails and Staples: ASTM F 1667. 1. Basis of Design: a. DuPont™ Tyvek® Wrap Caps, as distributed by DuPont Building Innovations: #4 nails with large 1-inch plastic cap fasteners, or 1-inch plastic cap staples with leg length sufficient to achieve a minimum penetration of 5/8-inch into the wood stud. b. Masonry tap-con fasteners with DuPont™ Tyvek® Wrap Caps as distributed by DuPont Building Innovations: 2-inch diameter plastic cap fastener. F. Masonry tap-con fasteners with DuPont™ Tyvek® Wrap Caps as distributed by DuPont Building Innovations: 2-inch diameter plastic cap fastener. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 WEATHER BARRIERS 072500 - 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER INSTALLATION A. Verify substrate and surface conditions are in accordance with flexible flashing manufacturer recommended tolerances prior to installation. B. Review requirements for sequencing of installation of flexible flashing assembly with installation of windows, doors, louvers and wall penetrations to provide a weather-tight flashing assembly. C. Cover exposed exterior surface of sheathing with water-resistive barrier securely fastened to framing immediately after sheathing is installed. D. Cover sheathing with water-resistive barrier as follows: 1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch (13 mm) on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion- or control-joint locations. 2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch (100-mm) overlap unless otherwise indicated. E. Building Paper: Apply horizontally with a 2-inch (50-mm) overlap and a 6-inch (150-mm) end lap; fasten to sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails. F. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape. 2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape. 3.2 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Apply flexible flashing at all wall penetrations including, but not limited to windows, doors and louvers to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Opening Preparation (for use with non-flanged windows – all cladding types) a. Flush cut weather barrier membrane at edge of sheathing around full perimeter of opening. b. Cut a head flap at 45-degree angle in the weather barrier membrane at window head to expose 8 inches of sheathing. Temporarily secure weather barrier membrane flap away from sheathing with tape 2. Flashing (for use with non-flanged windows – all cladding types) a. Cut 9-inch wide DuPont™ FlexWrap™ NF a minimum of 12 inches longer than width of sill rough opening. Apply primer as required by manufacturer. b. Cover horizontal sill by aligning DuPont™ FlexWrap™ NF edge with inside edge of sill. Adhere to rough opening across sill and up jambs a minimum of 6 inches. Secure flashing tightly into corners by working in along the sill before adhering up the jambs. c. Fan DuPont™ FlexWrap™ at bottom corners onto face of wall. Firmly press in place. Mechanically fasten fanned edges. Mechanical fastening is not required for DuPont™ FlexWrap™ NF Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 WEATHER BARRIERS 072500 - 6 d. Apply 9-inch wide strips of DuPont™ StraightFlash™ at jambs. Align flashing with interior edge of jamb framing. Start StraightFlash™ at head of opening and lap sill flashing down to sill. e. Spray-apply primer to top 6 inches of jambs and exposed sheathing. f. Install DuPont™ FlexWrap™ or DuPont™ FlexWrap™ NF at opening head using same installation procedures used at sill. Overlap jamb flashing a minimum of 2 inches. g. Coordinate flexible flashing with window installation. h. On exterior, install backer-rod in joint between window frame and flashed rough framing. Apply sealant at jambs and head, leaving sill unsealed. Apply sealants in accordance with sealant manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM C1193. i. Position weather barrier head flap across head flashing. Adhere using 4-inch wide DuPont™ StraightFlash™ over the 45-degree seams. j. Tape top of window in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. k. On interior, install backer rod in joint between frame of window and flashed rough framing. Apply sealant around entire window to create air seal. Apply sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM C1193. 3. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches (100 mm) except that at flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width. 4. Lap flashing over water-resistive barrier at bottom and sides of openings. 5. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to ensure that flashing is completely adhered to substrates. 6. Notify manufacturer’s designated representative to obtain periodic observations of flexible flashing assembly installation to maintain warranty. 7. Protect installed flexible flashing from damage during construction. END OF SECTION 072500 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 VAPOR RETARDERS 072600 - 1 SECTION 072600 - VAPOR RETARDERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire Retardant Polyimide vapor retarders. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for under-slab vapor retarders. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE-RETARDANT, REINFORCED-POLYETHYLENE VAPOR RETARDERS A. Fire-Retardant, Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: Sheet with outer layers of polyethylene film laminated to an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nonwoven grid of nylon cord or polyester scrim and weighing not less than 20 lb/1000 sq. ft. (9 kg/100 sq. m) <I, with maximum permeance rating of 0.1 perm (5.7 ng/Pa x s x sq. m) ASTM E 86. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, “Mem-Brain” (The SMART Vapor Retarder), Certainteed Saint Gobain., PO Box 860, Valley Forge, PA 194-0105 (800-233–8990), www.certainteed.com/membrain a. Water Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 86, dry cup method: 1.0 perms (57ng/Pa*s*m2); ASTM E 86, wet cup method: 10.0 perms (1144ng/Pa*s*m2) b. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 20 and 55, respectively, per ASTM E 84. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 VAPOR RETARDERS 072600 - 2 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. B. Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer and has demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates indicated. C. Vapor-Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, self-tapping steel drill screws; with fender washers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS ON FRAMING A. Place vapor retarders on warm side of construction as indicated on Drawings. B. Extend vapor retarders to extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarders in place with adhesives, vapor retarder fasteners, or other anchorage system as recommended by manufacturer. Extend vapor retarders to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation. C. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs and sealing with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates. D. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarders. E. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS IN CRAWL SPACES A. Install vapor retarders over prepared grade. Lap joints a minimum of 12 inches (305 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. Install second layer over pathways to equipment. B. Extend vapor retarder over footings and seal to foundation wall or grade beam with manufacturer's recommended tape. 1. Extend vapor retarder vertically minimum 24 inches (610 mm) above top of footing. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 VAPOR RETARDERS 072600 - 3 C. Seal around penetrations such as utilities and columns in order to create a monolithic, airtight membrane at grade surface, perimeter, and all vertical penetrations. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect vapor retarders from damage until concealed by permanent construction. END OF SECTION 072600 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113 - 1 SECTION 073113 - ASPHALT SHINGLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Asphalt shingles. 2. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 2. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for roofing sheathing. 3. Section 072100 “Thermal Insulation” for insulation and vapor retarders. 4. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing and High Temperature Self-Adhering Underlayment. 5. Section 077253 "Snow Guards" Pad-type, flat-mounted snow guards. 1.3 DEFINITION A. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Installation procedures and manufacturer’s recommendations 2. Safety procedures 3. Coordination with installation of other work 4. Availability of roofing materials. 5. Preparation and approval of substrate and penetrations through roof. 6. Other items related to successful execution of work Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113 - 2 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. A. Samples for Initial Selection: For asphalt shingle indicated if different from Basis of Design. 1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection. B. Samples for Verification: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1. Asphalt Shingles: Full size. 2. Ridge and Hip Cap Shingles: Full size. 3. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: 12 inches (300 mm) square. 4. Exposed Valley Lining: 12 inches (300 mm) square. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Provide published instructions that indicate preparation and installation procedures C. Product Test Reports: For each type of asphalt shingle and underlayment product indicated, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. D. Evaluation Reports: For synthetic underlayment and high-temperature, self-adhering sheet underlayment, from ICC-ES or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, indicating that product is suitable for intended use under applicable building codes. E. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty including acknowledgement of unventilated roof deck and insulation system. F. Sample Warranty: For installer’s warranty. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For asphalt shingles to include in maintenance manuals. B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: For asphalt shingles, roof vents and underlayment including registration. C. Installer’s Warranty: For asphalt shingles, roof vents and underlayment. See attached sample warranty for format. 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113 - 3 1. Asphalt Shingles: 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) of each type, in unbroken bundles. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer under requirements of the warranty. 2. Installer shall be licensed or otherwise authorized by all federal, state and local authorities. 3. Installer shall perform work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. B. Source Limitations: Obtain ridge and hip cap shingles from single source from single manufacturer. C. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Provide asphalt shingles and related roofing materials identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per test method below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108 or UL 790, for application and roof slopes indicated. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store roofing materials in a dry, well-ventilated location protected from weather, sunlight, and moisture according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Store underlayment rolls on end on pallets or other raised surfaces. Do not double stack rolls. C. Deliver shingles to site in manufacturer’s unopened labeled bundles. Promptly verify quantities and conditions. Immediately remove damaged products from site. D. Protect unused roofing materials from weather, sunlight, and moisture when left overnight or when roofing work is not in progress. E. Handle, store, and place roofing materials in a manner to prevent damage to roof deck or structural supporting members F. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials and materials used with solvent based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment and asphalt shingles within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended in writing by manufacturer. B. Anticipate and observe environmental conditions (temperature, humidity and moisture) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113 - 4 environment conditions outside manufacturer’s absolute limits. Record daily environmental conditions in a project log. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace asphalt shingles that fail within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Manufacturing defects. 2. Material Warranty Period: 50 years from date of Substantial Completion, prorated, (reduced by 1/600 per month – 80% maximum), with first 10 years non-prorated. a. Supplemental Material Warranty Period (SureStart™): 10 years from date of Substantial Completion, to cover material and installation. 3. Wind-Speed Warranty Period: Asphalt shingles will resist blow-off or damage caused by wind speeds of up to 110 mph for 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. 4. Algae-Resistance Warranty Period: Asphalt shingles will not discolor for 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Roofing Installer's Warranty: On warranty form at end of this Section, signed by Installer, in which Installer agrees to repair or replace components of asphalt-shingle roofing and self- adhering sheet underlayment as specified in this section that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Seven years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Provide asphalt shingles and related roofing materials identical to those of assemblies tested for Class A fire resistance according to ASTM E 108 or UL 790 by Underwriters Laboratories or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 2.2 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES A. Laminated-Strip Asphalt Shingles: ASTM D 3018 Type I Self Sealing; UL Certification of ASTM D 3462, ASTM D 3161 Class “F” (110-mph)/UL997 Wind Resistance and UL Class A Fire Resistance, glass fiber mat base; ceramically coated/UV resistant mineral surface granules across entire face of shingle; “tri-laminate” three-layer laminated, four-tab self-sealing shingle. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, Certainteed Presidential Shake TL Shingles. 2. Strip Size: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Weight: 480 pounds per square (100 square feet). 4. Algae Resistance: Granules resist algae discoloration. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113 - 5 5. Impact Resistance: UL 2218, Class 4. 6. Color and Blends: Chestnut to match phase 1. B. Starter Strips: Manufacturer's standard units to match asphalt shingles. C. Hip and Ridge Shingles: Manufacturer's standard units to match asphalt shingles. 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, Polyethylene Faced: ASTM D 1970/D 1970M, minimum of 40-mil- (1.0-mm-) thick, slip-resisting, polyethylene-film-reinforced top surface laminated to SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release backing; cold applied. Provide primer for as necessary for adhesion to Oriented Strand Board. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Grace Ice and Water Shield, WR Grace and Co.-Conn. B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, High Temperature: ASTM D 1970/, minimum of 40-mil- (1.0-mm-) thick; with slip-resisting, polymer-film-reinforced or glass-reinforced top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive; with release backing; cold applied; and evaluated and documented to be suitable for use for intended purpose under applicable codes by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Provide primer for as necessary for adhesion to Oriented Strand Board. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Grace Ice and Water Shield HT, WR Grace and Co.-Conn. 2. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C) according to ASTM D 1970/D 1970M. 3. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29 deg C) according to ASTM D 1970/D 1970M. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II, asbestos free. B. Roofing Nails: ASTM F 1667; aluminum, stainless-steel, copper, or hot-dip galvanized-steel wire shingle nails, minimum 0.120-inch- (3-mm-) diameter, sharp-pointed, with a minimum 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter flat head and of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4 inch (19 mm) into solid wood decking or extend at least 1/8 inch (3 mm) through OSB or plywood sheathing. 1. Shank: Smooth. 2. Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from same metal as flashing. C. Underlayment Primer: As recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for application on Oriented Strand Board. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Perm-A- Barrier WB primer, WR Grace and Co.-Conn. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113 - 6 D. Detailing Compound: Two component, elastomeric, liquid applied detailing compound for use with above specified self-adhering sheet underlayment materials. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Bituthene Liquid Membrane, WR Grace and Co.-Conn. 2.5 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM A. General: Comply with requirements in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item unless Drawings indicate more stringent requirements. 1. Apron Flashings: Fabricate with lower flange a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) over and 4 inches (100 mm) beyond each side of downslope asphalt shingles and 6 inches (150 mm) up the vertical surface. 2. Step Flashings: Fabricate with a headlap of 2 inches (50 mm) and a minimum extension of 6 inches (150 mm) over the underlying asphalt shingle and up the vertical surface. 3. Cricket or Backer Flashings: Fabricate with concealed flange extending a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) beneath upslope asphalt shingles and 6 inches (150 mm) beyond each side of chimney and skylight and 6 inches (150 mm) above the roof plane. 4. Open-Valley Flashings: Fabricate in lengths not exceeding 10 feet (3 m) with 1-inch- (25-mm-) high, inverted-V profile at center of valley and equal flange widths of 12 inches (300 mm). 5. Drip Edges: Fabricate in lengths not exceeding 10 feet (3 m) with 2-inch (50-mm) roof- deck flange and 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) fascia flange with 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) drip at lower edge. C. Vent Pipe Flashings: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, at least 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick. Provide lead sleeve sized to slip over and turn down into pipe, soldered to skirt at slope of roof, and extending at least 4 inches (100 mm) from pipe onto roof. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Follow shingle manufacturer’s recommendations for acceptable roof deck material. 2. Examine roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing and blocking or metal clips and that installation is within flatness tolerances. 3. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely anchored; and that provisions have been made for flashings and penetrations through asphalt shingles. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113 - 7 B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with underlayment manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install, wrinkle free, on roof deck on roof deck parallel with and starting at the eaves. Comply with low-temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if applicable. Install lapped in direction that sheds water. Lap sides not less than 3-1/2 inches (89 mm). Lap ends not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within seven days. 1. Prime sheathing surfaces to receive self-adhering sheet underlayment if necessary or recommended by manufacturer. 2. Valleys and Crickets: Extend from lowest to highest point 18 inches (450 mm) on each side. 3. Surface Transitions: Provide bead of detailing compound as indicated in drawings. 4. Sidewalls: Extend beyond sidewall 18 inches (450 mm), and return vertically against sidewall not less than 36 inches or to underside of roof deck/sheathing, whichever is greater. 5. Dormers, Chimneys, Skylights, and Other Roof-Penetrating Elements: Extend beyond penetrating element 18 inches (450 mm) and return vertically against penetrating element not less than 36 inches. 6. Extend two layers eave protection underlayment a minimum of 48 inches (640 mm) up slope beyond interior face of exterior wall. 7. Weather-lap and seal watertight with asphalt roofing cement items projecting through or mounted on roof. Avoid contact or solvent-based cements. C. Metal-Flashed, Open-Valley (Cricket) Underlayment: Install two layers of minimum 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide underlayment centered in valley. Stagger end laps between layers at least 72 inches (1830 mm). Lap ends of each layer at least 12 inches (300 mm) in direction to shed water, and seal with asphalt roofing cement. Fasten each layer to roof deck. 1. Lap roof-deck underlayment over lower layer of valley underlayment at least 6 inches (150 mm). 3.3 METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 1. Install metal flashings according to recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual" and NRCA's "NRCA Guidelines for Asphalt Shingle Roof Systems." Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113 - 8 B. Apron Flashings: Extend lower flange over and beyond each side of downslope asphalt shingles and up the vertical surface. C. Step Flashings: Install with a headlap of 2 inches (50 mm) and extend over the underlying asphalt shingle and up the vertical surface. Fasten to roof deck only. D. Cricket or Backer Flashings: Install against the roof-penetrating element extending concealed flange beneath upslope asphalt shingles and beyond each side. E. Open-Valley Flashings: Install centered in valleys, lapping ends at least 8 inches (200 mm) in direction to shed water. Fasten upper end of each length to roof deck beneath overlap. 1. Secure hemmed flange edges into metal cleats spaced 12 inches (300 mm) apart and fastened to roof deck. 2. Adhere 9-inch- (225-mm-) wide strip of self-adhering sheet to metal flanges and to self- adhering sheet underlayment. F. Rake Drip Edges: Install rake drip-edge flashings stripped-in with underlayment as indicated in drawings and fasten to roof deck. G. Eave Drip Edges: Install eave drip-edge flashings stripped-in with underlayment as indicated in drawings and fasten to roof sheathing. H. Pipe Flashings: Form flashing around pipe penetrations and asphalt shingles. Fasten and seal to asphalt shingles as recommended by manufacturer. 3.4 ASPHALT-SHINGLE INSTALLATION A. General: Install asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions, recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual," and recommendations in NRCA's "NRCA Guidelines for Asphalt Shingle Roof Systems." B. Install manufacturer’s standard starter strip along lowest roof edge, consisting of an asphalt- shingle strip at least 7 inches (175 mm) wide with self-sealing strip face up at roof edge. 1. Extend asphalt shingles 1/2 inch (13 mm) over fasciae at eaves and rakes. 2. Install starter strip along rake edge. C. Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shingles stair-stepping diagonally across roof deck with manufacturer's recommended offset pattern at succeeding courses, maintaining uniform exposure. D. Install asphalt shingles by single-strip column or racking method, maintaining uniform exposure. Install full-length first course followed by cut second course, repeating alternating pattern in succeeding courses. E. Fasten asphalt-shingle strips with a minimum of five roofing nails located according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Where roof slope is less than 4:12, seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113 - 9 2. When ambient temperature during installation is below 50 deg F (10 deg C), seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots. F. Open Valleys and Crickets: Cut and fit asphalt shingles at open valleys, trimming upper concealed corners of shingle strips. Widen exposed portion of open valley 1/8 inch in 12 inches (1:96) from highest to lowest point. 1. Set valley edge of asphalt shingles in a 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide bed of asphalt roofing cement. 2. Do not nail asphalt shingles to metal open-valley flashings. G. Ridge Shingles: Maintain same exposure of cap shingles as roofing shingle exposure. Lap cap shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing winds. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing. 3.5 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY A. WHEREAS <Insert name> of <Insert address>, herein called the "Roofing Installer," has performed roofing and associated work ("the work") on the following project: 1. Owner: <Insert name of Owner>. 2. Address: <Insert address>. 3. Building Name/Type: <Insert information>. 4. Address: <Insert address>. 5. Area of the Work: <Insert information>. 6. Acceptance Date: <Insert date>. 7. Warranty Period: <Insert time>. 8. Expiration Date: <Insert date>. B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a subcontractor) to warrant the work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and workmanship for designated Warranty Period, C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of the work as are necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary to maintain the work in a watertight condition. D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions: 1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to the work and other parts of the building, and to building contents, caused by: a. Lightning; b. Peak gust wind speed exceeding <Insert wind speed> mph (m/sec); c. Fire; d. Failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive deflection, deterioration, and decomposition; e. Faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents, equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work; Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113 - 10 f. Vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and g. Activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by Owner. 2. When the work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and expense thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated. 3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to the work covered by this Warranty but is not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or faults or defects of the work. 4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of the work by anyone other than Roofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of the alterations, but only to the extent the alterations affect the work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer to perform the alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void unless Roofing Installer, before starting the alterations, notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that the alterations would likely damage or deteriorate the work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty. 5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but was not originally specified for, a use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of the change, but only to the extent the change affects the work covered by this Warranty. 6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to inspect the work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration. 7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on the work and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of the work according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor. E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this <Insert day> day of <Insert month>, <Insert year>. 1. Authorized Signature: <Insert signature>. 2. Name: <Insert name>. 3. Title: <Insert title>. END OF SECTION 073113 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 1 SECTION 076100 - SHEET METAL ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes custom-fabricated, standing-seam sheet metal roofing. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation" for roof insulation. 2. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for gutters, downspouts, copings, and flashings that are not part of sheet metal roofing. 3. Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for manufactured roof accessories. 4. Section 077253 "Snow Guards" for prefabricated devices designed to hold snow on the roof surface, allowing it to melt and drain off slowly. 5. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sealants adjoining sheet metal roofing. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sheet metal roofing layout and seams with sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, equipment provided, and roof penetrations. B. Coordinate sheet metal roofing installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of roofing substrate, parapets, walls, and other adjoining work to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 2. Review flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affect sheet metal roofing. 3. Review requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 4. Review roof observation and repair procedures after sheet metal roofing installation. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 2 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory. B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal roofing. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion joint locations, fixed points, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. 3. Include details for forming, including seams and dimensions. 4. Include details for joining and securing, including layout and spacing of fasteners, cleats, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams. 5. Include details of termination points and assemblies. 6. Include details of expansion joints, including showing direction of expansion and contraction from fixed points. 7. Include details of roof penetrations. 8. Include details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and counterflashings. 9. Include details of special conditions. 10. Include details of connections to adjoining work. 11. Detail the following accessory items, at scale of not less than 3 inches per 12 inches (1:5): a. Flashing and trim. b. Gutters and downspouts as they relate to adjacent sheet metal roofing. c. Roof curbs. d. Attachment of snow guards. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal with factory-applied finishes. 1. Include Samples of trim and accessories involving finish or color selection. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish. 1. Sheet Metal Roofing: 12 inches (300 mm) long by actual width of unit, including finished seam and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, battens, and other attachments. 2. Trim and Metal Closures: 12 inches (300 mm) long and in required profile. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories. 3. Other Accessories: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples for each type of other accessory. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Sheet metal roofing, seam locations, and attachments. 2. Roof hatches. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 3 3. Equipment supports, pipe supports, and penetrations. 4. Lighting fixtures and cable runs. 5. Snow guards. 6. Items mounted on roof curbs. 7. Details for penetrations. B. Qualification Data: For Installer. C. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. D. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For roofing sheet metals and accessories to include in maintenance manuals. B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: For sheet metal, finishes and underlayment including registration. C. Installer’s Warranty: For asphalt shingles, roof vents and underlayment. See attached sample warranty for format. D. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sheet Metal Roofing Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal roofing similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockup of typical roof area and eave as shown on Drawings, including, underlayment, attachments, and accessories. a. Size: Approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) square. b. Include each type of exposed seam and seam termination, fascia, soffit, and hip. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store sheet metal roofing materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal roofing materials away from uncured concrete and masonry. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 4 B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal roofing from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal roofing installation. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer’s Standard Watertightness Warranty: Roofing Installer to comply with Manufacturer’s watertightness warranty program and submit to manufacture all required documents. Watertightness warranty program to include roofing installation inspections which Roofing Installer shall participate. Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sheet metal roofing that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Warranty: Warranty form at end of this Section in which Installer agrees to repair or replace components of sheet metal roofing that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. b. Wrinkling or buckling. c. Loose parts. d. Failure to remain weathertight, including uncontrolled water leakage. e. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering, including nonuniformity of color or finish. f. Galvanic action between sheet metal roofing and dissimilar materials. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal roofing that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Sheet metal roofing system including, but not limited to, metal roof panels, cleats, anchors and fasteners, sheet metal flashing integral with sheet metal roofing, fascia panels, trim, battens, underlayment, and accessories, shall comply with requirements Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 5 without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation, or due to other defects in construction. Sheet metal roofing shall remain watertight. B. Sheet Metal Roofing Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated on Drawings. C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. 2.2 ROOFING SHEET METALS A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping. B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet according to ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) coating designation, Grade 40 (Grade 275); with smooth, flat surface; prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Thickness: Nominal 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) unless otherwise indicated. 2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a. Finish shall be full strength Kynar 500® or Hylar 5000™ fluoropolymer coating applied by the manufacturer on a continuous coil coating line, with a top side dry film thickness of 0.75 ± 0.05 mil over 0.20 ± 0.05 mil prime coat, to provide a total top side dry film thickness of 0.95 ± 0.10 mil. Bottom side shall be coated with a primer (non-metallics only) and beige urethane coating with a total dry film thickness of 0.35 ± 0.05 mil. Finish shall conform to all tests for adhesion, flexibility, and longevity as specified by the Kynar 500® or Hylar 5000™ finish supplier. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 4. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester-backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm). 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: ASTM D 1970/, minimum of 40-mil- (1.0-mm-) thick; with slip-resisting, polymer-film-reinforced or glass-reinforced top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive; with release backing; cold applied; and evaluated and documented to be suitable for use high metal temperatures beneath metal roofing. Provide primer according to written recommendations of underlayment manufacturer. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 6 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Grace Ice and Water Shield HT, WR Grace and Co.-Conn. 2. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C) according to ASTM D 1970/D 1970M. 3. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29 deg C) according to ASTM D 1970/D 1970M. B. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized building paper, 3 lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16 kg/sq. m) minimum. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete roofing system and as recommended by primary sheet metal manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular-threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. 1. General: a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal roofing using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of roofing. b. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed; with hex-washer head. c. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened. 2. Fasteners for Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot- dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329. C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick. D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal roofing and remain watertight. Sealant must be resistant to environmental conditions such as wind loading, wind driven rain, snow, sleet, acid rain, ozone, ultraviolet light and extreme temperature variations. 1. Basis-of-Design Products: Ultra low modulus, high performance, one-part, moisture curing silicone joint sealant. a. Tremco, Spectrum One, Dow 790, Pecora 890NST, Duralink or Titebond Metal Roof Sealant. Do not use a clear sealant or sealants which release a solvent or acid during curing. E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 7 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Sheet Metal Accessories: Provide components required for complete sheet metal roofing assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, metal closures, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of sheet metal roofing unless otherwise indicated. 1. Cleats: Intermittent and continuous attachment devices for mechanically seaming into joints and formed from the following materials and thicknesses unless otherwise indicated: a. Metallic-Coated Steel Roofing: 0.0250-inch- (0.64-mm-) thick stainless steel. b. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, Berridge Continuous Zee-Rib. 2. Expansion-Type Cleats: Cleats of a design that allows longitudinal movement of roof panels without stressing panel seams; of same material as other cleats. 3. Backing Plates: Plates at roofing splices, fabricated from material recommended by SMACNA. 4. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, flexible-closure strips; cut or premolded to match sheet metal roofing profile. Provide closure strips where necessary to ensure weathertight construction. 5. Flashing and Trim: Formed from same material and with same finish as sheet metal roofing, minimum 0.018 inch ((0.46 mm)) thick. B. Pipe Flashing: Premolded, EPDM pipe collar with flexible aluminum ring bonded to base. 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal roofing to comply with details shown and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions (panel width and seam height), geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of installation. Fabricate sheet metal roofing and accessories in shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Standing-Seam Roofing: Form standing-seam panels with finished seam height of 2 inches. 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, Berridge Zee-Lock Double 180 degree Lock. B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal roofing that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. C. Form exposed sheet metal work to fit substrates with little oil canning; free of buckling and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 1. Lay out sheet metal roofing so transverse seams, if required, are made in direction of flow with higher panels overlapping lower panels. 2. Offset transverse seams from each other 12 inches (300 mm) minimum. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 8 3. Fold and cleat eaves and transverse seams in shop. 4. Form and fabricate sheets, seams, strips, cleats, valleys, ridges, edge treatments, integral flashings, and other components of metal roofing to profiles, patterns, and drainage arrangements indicated on Drawings and as required for leakproof construction. D. Expansion Provisions: Fabricate sheet metal roofing to allow for expansion in running work sufficient to prevent leakage, damage, and deterioration of the Work. 1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. 2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings. E. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to SMACNA standards. F. Sheet Metal Accessories: Custom fabricate flashings and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item required. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 2. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength. 3. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant. 4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces of accessories exposed to view. 5. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. 6. Hem all exposed edges of flashing on underside, ½ inch. G. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Comply with manufacturers standard instructions and conform to standards set forth in the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual published by SMACNA, in order to achieve a watertight installation. B. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 9 1. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking, that tops of fasteners are flush with surface, and that installation is within flatness tolerances required for finished roofing installation. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely anchored, and that provision has been made for drainage, flashings, and penetrations through sheet metal roofing. 3. Verify that air- or water-resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration. C. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating sheet metal roofing to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of sheet metal roofing before installation. D. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Lay out panel arrangement and screw battens to wood sheathing before installation of sheet metal roofing. 1. Space fasteners not more than 18 inches (460 mm) o.c. B. Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Steel Roofing: For roofing with 3:12 slopes or less, paint underside of shop-coated, zinc-tin alloy-coated steel, before installation, with zinc-tin alloy-coated steel primer, applied at dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils (0.06 mm). Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. This coating is in addition to shop coating. 3.3 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches (90 mm). Roll laps and edges with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. 1. Apply self-adhering sheet underlayment over entire roof. 2. Roof perimeter for a distance up from eaves of 36 inches (910 mm) beyond interior wall line, install two layers. 3. Valleys, from lowest to highest point, for a distance on each side of 18 inches (460 mm), install two layers. 4. Rake edges for a distance of 18 inches (460 mm), install two layers. 5. Hips and ridges for a distance on each side of 12 inches (300 mm), install two layers. 6. Roof-to-wall intersections for a distance up wall of 36 inches (910 mm). Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 10 7. Around dormers, chimneys, skylights, and other penetrating elements for a distance from element of 18 inches (460 mm), install two layers. B. Apply slip sheet, wrinkle free, over underlayment before installing sheet metal roofing and related flashing. C. Install flashings to cover underlayment according to requirements in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 3.4 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Install sheet metal roofing to comply with details shown and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to installation characteristics required unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Install fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete roofing system and as recommended by fabricator for sheet metal roofing. 1. Install sheet metal roofing true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2. Anchor sheet metal roofing and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 3. Field cutting of sheet metal roofing by torch is not permitted. 4. Provide metal closures at peaks, rake edges, rake walls, eaves and each side of ridge and hip caps. 5. Flash and seal sheet metal roofing with closure strips at eaves, rakes, and perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws. 6. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Predrill panels for fasteners. 7. Install ridge and hip caps as sheet metal roofing work proceeds. 8. Locate roofing splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger roofing splices and end laps to avoid four-panel lap splice condition. Install backing plates at roofing splices. 9. Lap metal flashing over sheet metal roofing to direct moisture to run over and off roofing. 10. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. B. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance or not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) for wood screws whichever is greater. C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure- treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying self-adhering sheet underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or SMACNA. D. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 11 E. Fasciae: Align bottom of sheet metal roofing and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping screws. Flash and seal sheet metal roofing with closure strips where fasciae meet soffits, along lower panel edges, and at perimeter of all openings. 3.5 CUSTOM-FABRICATED SHEET METAL ROOFING INSTALLATION A. Fabricate and install work with lines and corners of exposed units true and accurate. Form exposed faces flat and free of buckles, excessive waves, and avoidable tool marks, considering metal temper and reflectivity. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. Fold back sheet metal to form hem on concealed side of exposed edges unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install cleats to hold sheet metal panels in position. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners to prevent rotation. 2. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. Bend tabs over fastener head. 3. Provide expansion-type cleats for roof panels that exceed 30 feet (9.1 m) in length. B. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. For roofing with 3:12 slopes or less, use cleats at transverse seams. 1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch (25 mm) into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F (4 and 21 deg C), set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C). 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." C. Rivets: Rivet joints where necessary for strength. D. Standing-Seam Roofing: Attach standing-seam metal panels to substrate with double-fastened cleats spaced at 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. Install panels reaching from eave to ridge before moving to adjacent panels. Before panels are interlocked, apply continuous bead of sealant to top of flange of lower panel. Lock standing seams by folding over twice so cleat and panel edges are completely engaged. 1. Lock each panel to panel below with sealed transverse seam. 2. Loose-lock panels at eave edges to continuous edge flashing exposed 24 inches (600 mm) from roof edge. Attach edge flashing to face of roof edge with continuous cleat fastened to roof substrate at 12-inch (305-mm) o.c. spacing. Lock panels to edge flashing. 3. Fold over seams after locking at ridges and hips. 3.6 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION Revise "General" Paragraph below to suit Project. Delete items not required. A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 12 1. Install components required for complete sheet metal roofing assembly including trim, copings, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, metal closures, closure strips, and similar items. 2. Install accessories integral to sheet metal roofing that are specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" to comply with that Section's requirements. B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and install units true to line, levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant. 1. Install flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. 2. Install continuous strip of self-adhering underlayment at edge of continuous flashing overlapping self-adhering underlayment, where "continuous seal strip" is indicated in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and on Drawings. 3. Install exposed flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates, and to result in waterproof and weather- resistant performance. 4. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection. a. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, and filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and sheet metal roofing. Fasten and seal to sheet metal roofing as recommended by SMACNA. 3.7 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal roofing within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8- inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean off excess sealants. C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal roofing is installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of sheet metal roofing installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal roofing manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal roofing in clean condition during construction. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 13 D. Replace sheet metal roofing components that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. 3.9 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY A. WHEREAS <Insert name> of <Insert address>, herein called the "Roofing Installer," has performed roofing and associated work ("work") on the following project: 1. Owner: <Insert name>. 2. Owner's Address: <Insert address>. 3. Building Name/Type: <Insert information>. 4. Building's Address: <Insert address>. 5. Area of Work: <Insert information>. 6. Acceptance Date: <Insert date>. 7. Warranty Period: <Insert time>. 8. Expiration Date: <Insert date>. B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and workmanship for designated Warranty Period, C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition. D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions: 1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the building, and to building contents, caused by: a. Lightning; b. Peak gust wind speed exceeding 110 mph; c. Fire; d. Failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive deflection, deterioration, and decomposition; e. Faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents, equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work; f. Vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and g. Activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by Owner. 2. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and expense thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated. 3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or faults or defects of work. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 14 4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than Roofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void unless Roofing Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely damage or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty. 5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled surface, flooded basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects work covered by this Warranty. 6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration. 7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of original work according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor. E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this <Insert day> day of <Insert month>, <Insert year>. 1. Authorized Signature: <Insert signature>. 2. Name: <Insert name>. 3. Title: <Insert title>. END OF SECTION 076100 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 1 SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Formed roof-drainage sheet metal fabrications. 2. Formed steep-slope roof sheet metal fabrications. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. 3. Include identification of finish for each item. 4. Include pattern of seams and details of termination points, direction of expansion, roof- penetration flashing, and connections to adjoining work. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product certificates. B. Product test reports. C. Sample warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 2 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockup of typical gable edge (side) and eave, including, approximately 5 feet (3.0 m) long by 5 feet (3.0 m) wide. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install roof edge flashings tested according to SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressure: 1. Design Pressure: As indicated in Structural Documents. D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. 2.2 SHEET METALS A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 3 B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet according to ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) coating designation, Grade 40 (Grade 275); prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. b. Color: To match metal roofing. 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized building paper, 3 lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16 kg/sq. m) minimum. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item. 1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head. a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal. b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened. c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width. 2. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329. C. Solder: 1. For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead with maximum lead content of 0.2 percent. D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 4 E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement. G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187. H. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 2. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view. B. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. 1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. 2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings. C. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard. D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal standard for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. F. Seams at Skylight and Cricket Flashing: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. G. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 5 2.6 ROOF-DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section required, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long sections. Furnish flat-stock gutter brackets and gutter spacers and straps fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by cited sheet metal standard but with thickness not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters. 2.7 STEEP-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Apron, Step , and Backer Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick. B. Cricket , Snow Splitter, “Murphy” Snow Splitter Vent Covers, and Valley Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm) thick. C. Drip Edges: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick. D. Eave, Rake, and Ridge, Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install high temperature self-adhering sheet underlayment below apron (skylight) and cricket flashing, wrinkle free. Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches (90 mm). Roll laps and edges with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 6 3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool marks. 5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure- treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard. 1. Coat concealed side of sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet. C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection. 1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints. 2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings. D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) for wood screws. E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation. F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." G. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets with solder to width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm); however, reduce pre-tinning where pre- tinned surface would show in completed Work. 1. Do not solder metallic-coated steel sheet. 2. Do not use torches for soldering. 3. Heat surfaces to receive solder, and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. 3.3 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and cited sheet metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 7 B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate. C. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten. D. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of 4 inches (100 mm). E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder. C. Clean off excess sealants. D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. END OF SECTION 076200 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SNOW GUARDS 077253 - 1 SECTION 077253 - SNOW GUARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Section 012300 “Alternates” for administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pad-type, flat-mounted snow guards. 2. Rail-type, seam-mounted snow guards. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for snow guards. B. Shop Drawings: Include roof plans showing engineered layouts and attachment details of snow guards acceptable to Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1. Include details of rail-type snow guards 2. Include calculation of number and location of snow guards based on snow load, roof slope, roof type, components, spacings, and finish. C. Samples: Full-size unit. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each type of snow guard, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Performance Requirements: Provide engineered snow guards that withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SNOW GUARDS 077253 - 2 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. B. Structural Performance: 1. Snow Loads: As indicated in Structural Documents. 2.2 PAD-TYPE SNOW GUARDS A. Flat-Mounted Metal Snow Guard Pads: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide TRA MAGE Snow Bracket D or comparable product by one of the following: a. Alpine SnowGuards; a division of Vermont Slate & Copper Services, Inc. b. Berger Building Products. c. PMC Industries, Inc. d. Roofers Edge. e. Sieger Snow Guards Inc. f. Sno-Gem, Inc. g. SnoGuard. h. TRA-MAGE, Inc. i. Zaleski Snow-Guards for Roofs, Inc. 2. Material: Manufacturer's standard noncorrosive metal. 3. Finish and Color: Powder coat; color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Seam-Mounted Metal Snow Guard Pads: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide TRA MAGE Snow Diamond 2 Rail Clamp-On or comparable product by one of the following: a. Alpine SnowGuards; a division of Vermont Slate & Copper Services, Inc. b. Berger Building Products. c. PMC Industries, Inc. d. Roofers Edge. e. Sieger Snow Guards Inc. f. Sno-Gem, Inc. g. SnoGuard. h. TRA-MAGE, Inc. i. Zaleski Snow-Guards for Roofs, Inc. 2. Material: Manufacturer's standard noncorrosive metal. 3. Finish and Color: Powder coat; color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range to match metal roof material. C. Accessories as necessary for a typical and complete installation: 1. Ice Flag: 2 Rail, can be used on all rail fences, custom sized to fit fence, attaches to fence rail to prevent snow and ice from sliding beneath rail. 2. Tube: ¾inch (19 mm) square tubing, 10-foot (3050 mm) sections. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SNOW GUARDS 077253 - 3 3. Unions: Pipe union to allow the joining of two pipe sections; one included per pipe section. 4. Collars: 1inch shaft collar; 1018 Steel, Stainless Steel (Type 303); Prevents lateral pipe movement. 5. Endcaps: 3/4 inch (19 mm) plug style; Polypropylene; finished pipe ends. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, snow guard attachment, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install snow guards according to manufacturer's written instructions. Space rows as recommended and engineered by manufacturer. B. Attachment for Asphalt Shingle Roofing: 1. Flat-Mounted, Snow Guard Pads: Mechanically anchored through predrilled holes concealed by the shingles. C. Attachment for Standing-Seam Metal Roofing: 1. Do not use fasteners that will penetrate metal roofing, or fastening methods that void metal roofing finish warranty. 2. Seam-Mounted, Rail-Type Snow Guards: Clamps attached to vertical ribs of standing- seam metal roof panels. END OF SECTION 077253 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING 078123 - 1 SECTION 078123 - INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes intumescent fire-resistive coatings approved for use as a 15 minute thermal and ignition barrier over spray polyurethane foam. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 072119 "Foamed-in-Place Insulation" for Closed-cell spray polyurethane foam. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review products, design ratings, restrained and unrestrained conditions, thicknesses, and other performance requirements, including special inspections as may be required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction over the Project. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency. B. Product Certificates: For each type of fireproofing. C. Evaluation Reports: For fireproofing and spray applied polyurethane foam assembly, from ICC- ES. D. Field quality-control reports. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING 078123 - 2 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by fireproofing manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's products according to specified requirements. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not store or apply fireproofing when ambient or substrate temperature is 50 deg F (10 deg C) or lower unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain temperature at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after product application. Ideal installation temperature is 62 deg F to 90 deg F. B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of fireproofing, providing complete air exchanges according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use natural means or, if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until fireproofing dries thoroughly. C. Environmental Limitations: Maintain relative humidity before, during and after application of fireproofing, providing complete air exchanges according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use natural means or, if they are inadequate, forced-air humidification/de-humidification until fireproofing dries thoroughly without blistering. Ideal humidity is 50% to 65% relative humidity. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Assemblies: Provide fireproofing, including auxiliary materials, according to requirements of each fire-resistance design and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Source Limitations: Obtain fireproofing from single source. C. Fire-Resistance Design: Indicated on Drawings, tested according to NFPA 286 UL 1715 or UL 1040 or FM 4880 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. D. Asbestos: Provide products containing no detectable asbestos. 2.2 INTUMESCENT FIRE-RESISTIVE COATINGS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, “DC-315”, International Fireproofing Technology, Inc., 17528 Von Karman Avenue, Irvine, CA 92614 (949-975–8588), www.painttoprotect.com. 1. Application: Designated for "interior general purpose" use by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Thickness: As required for fire-resistance design indicated, measured according to requirements of fire-resistance design. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING 078123 - 3 3. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame-Spread Index: 0. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 25 or less. 4. Finish: Spray-textured finish flat. a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that are compatible with fireproofing and substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of the Work and according to each fire-resistance design. Verify compliance with the following: 1. Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants, or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fireproofing with substrates under conditions of normal use or fire exposure. 2. Objects penetrating fireproofing, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates. 3. Substrates receiving fireproofing are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, or other suspended construction that will interfere with fireproofing application. B. Conduct tests according to fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations to verify that substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond. C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fireproofing materials during application. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fireproofing. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING 078123 - 4 3.3 APPLICATION A. Construct fireproofing assemblies that are identical to fire-resistance design indicated and products as specified, tested, and substantiated by test reports; for thickness, primers, topcoats, finishing, and other materials and procedures affecting fireproofing work. B. Comply with fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials, application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and apply fireproofing; as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. C. Coordinate application of fireproofing with other construction to minimize need to cut or remove fireproofing. 1. Do not begin applying fireproofing until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items penetrating fireproofing are in place. 2. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fireproofing until application of fireproofing is completed. D. Install auxiliary materials as required, as detailed, and according to fire-resistance design and fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations for conditions of exposure and intended use. For auxiliary materials, use attachment and anchorage devices of type recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer. E. Spray apply fireproofing to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer. F. Extend fireproofing in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected. G. Install body of fireproofing in a single course unless otherwise recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer. H. Provide a uniform finish complying with description indicated for each type of fireproofing material and matching finish approved for required mockups. I. Cure fireproofing according to fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations. J. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fireproofing has been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to deficient applications. K. Finishes: Where indicated, apply fireproofing to produce the following finishes: 1. Spray-Textured Finish: Finish left as spray applied with no further treatment. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner may engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. Test and inspect as required by the IBC, 1704.11. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING 078123 - 5 B. Perform the tests and inspections of completed Work in successive stages. Do not proceed with application of fireproofing for the next area until test results for previously completed applications of fireproofing show compliance with requirements. Tested values must equal or exceed values as specified and as indicated and required for approved fire-resistance design. C. Fireproofing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 1. Apply additional fireproofing, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results indicate insufficient thickness, and retest. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIRING A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling. B. Protect fireproofing, according to advice of manufacturer and Installer, from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes, so fireproofing will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. C. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect fireproofing and repair damaged areas and fireproofing removed due to work of other trades. D. Repair fireproofing damaged by other work before concealing it with other construction. END OF SECTION 078123 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1 SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)" for door hardware for hollow metal doors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings. B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. C. Custom Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/NAAMM- HMMA 861. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance rating, temperature-rise ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 2 D. Samples for Verification: 1. For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of not less than 3 by 5 inches (75 by 125 mm). 2. For the following items, prepared on Samples about 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm) to demonstrate compliance with requirements for quality of materials and construction: a. Doors: Show vertical-edge, top, and bottom construction; core construction; and hinge and other applied hardware reinforcement. Include separate section showing glazing if applicable. b. Frames: Show profile, corner joint, floor and wall anchors, and silencers. Include separate section showing fixed hollow metal panels and glazing if applicable. E. Other Action Submittals: 1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer. B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to UBC Standard 7-2 or UL 10C. C. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- (102-mm-) high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 3 1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Amweld Building Products, LLC. 2. Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation. 3. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 5. Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc. 6. Firedoor Corporation. 7. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company. 8. Habersham Metal Products Company. 9. Kewanee Corporation (The). 10. Mesker Door Inc. 11. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 12. Security Metal Products Corp. 13. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 14. Windsor Republic Doors. 2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings and temperature- rise limits indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 4 2.3 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum A40 (ZF120) metallic coating. D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. F. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated. G. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. (96- to 192-kg/cu. m) density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. H. Safety Glass: Provide products not less than 6 mm complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201, for Category II materials, unless those of Category I are expressly indicated and permitted." 1. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction or the manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. I. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impuritiesFire-Protection-Rated Glazing, General: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252 for door assemblies. 1. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-protection-rated glazing with certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, test standard, whether glazing is for use in fire doors or other openings, whether or not glazing passes hose-stream test, whether or not glazing has a temperature rise rating of 450 deg F (250 deg C), and the fire-resistance rating in minutes Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 5 2.4 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES A. Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. A. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2. At locations indicated in the Drawings. 1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors: a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm). c. Face: Metallic-coated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm). d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless. e. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core at manufacturer's discretion. f. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames 3. Frames: a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm). b. Construction: Full profile welded. 4. Exposed Finish: Prime. 2.5 EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Construct exterior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. B. Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3. [At locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule] <Insert locations>. 1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors: a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm.) c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm), with minimum A40 (ZF120) coating. d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless. e. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core at manufacturer's discretion. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 6 f. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames. 1) Thermal-Rated Doors: Provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 2.1 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu (0.370 K x sq. m/W) when tested according to ASTM C 1363. 3. Frames: a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm), with minimum A40 (ZF120) coating. b. Construction: Full profile welded. 4. Exposed Finish: Prime. 2.6 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2.7 STOPS AND MOLDINGS A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed. B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch (16 mm) high unless otherwise indicated. C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, fabricated from same material as frames in which they are installed. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117. C. Hollow-Metal Doors: 1. Fire Door Cores: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings indicated. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 7 2. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Provide beveled or square edges at manufacturer's discretion. 3. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material as face sheets. 4. Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. 5. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. 2. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. 3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. 5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm) high. 5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches (1066 mm) wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions. b. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb. c. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches (152 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches (660 mm) o.c. 6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers. E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 8 F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." 1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted door hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 26 Sections. G. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work. 2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. 4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of installation indicated. 2.9 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. B. Factory-Applied Paint Finish: Manufacturer's standard, complying with ANSI/SDI A250.3 for performance and acceptance criteria. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 9 B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation. C. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances: 1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. 2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. 3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. 4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor. C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow Metal Frames: Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelites, borrowed lites, and other openings, of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified. 1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. d. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 10 e. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. Wood-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. 4. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members. 5. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor. C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors: a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch (19 mm). 2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105. D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches (50 mm) o.c. from each corner. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 11 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. D. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 081113 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 081433 - 1 SECTION 081433 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior stile and rail wood doors. 2. Priming and Finishing stile and rail wood doors. 3. Fitting stile and rail wood doors to frames and machining for hardware. 4. Prehanging doors in frames. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 09 Section "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for field finishing stile and rail doors. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Include details of construction and glazing. 2. Include factory finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: For stile and rail wood doors. Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data, including those for stiles, rails, panels, and moldings (sticking); and other pertinent data, including the following: 1. Dimensions of doors for factory fitting. 2. Locations and dimensions of mortises and holes for hardware. 3. Undercuts. 4. Requirements for veneer matching. 5. Doors to be factory finished, and finish requirements. 6. Fire ratings for fire-rated doors. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors. D. Samples for Verification: Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), with door faces and edgings representing typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and solid lumber required. Finish Sample with same materials proposed for factory- finished doors. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 081433 - 2 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of door, from manufacturer. B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. C. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of stile and rail wood door from single manufacturer. C. Source Limitations: Custom stile and rail wood doors may be from same fabricator as work in Division 06 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork." D. Source Limitations: Provide custom stile and rail wood doors finished in same shop as work in Division 06 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork." E. Safety Glass: Provide products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201, for Category II materials, unless those of Category I are expressly indicated and permitted. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in opaque plastic bags or cardboard cartons. C. Mark each door on top and bottom edge with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship, or have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch (1067-by-2134-mm) section. 1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 081433 - 3 2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial Completion: a. Interior Doors: Life of Installation. b. Insulating Glass Vision Panels: Five years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain stile and rail wood doors from single manufacturer 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: Use only materials that comply with referenced standards and other requirements specified. 1. Assemble interior doors, frames, and sidelites, including components, with either dry-use or wet-use adhesives complying with ASTM D 5572 for finger joints and with ASTM D 5751 for joints other than finger joints. B. Panel Products: Any of the following: 1. Particleboard made from wood particles, complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 2. Medium-density fiberboard made from wood fiber, complying with ANSI A208.2, Grade 130. 3. Hardboard, complying with AHA A135.4. 4. Veneer core plywood. 2.3 INTERIOR STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS A. Interior Stile and Rail Wood Doors: Custom interior doors complying with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards," and with other requirements specified. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Craftsmen in Wood, Mfg. or comparable product by one of the following: a. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. b. Artistic Doors and Windows, Inc. c. Belentry Doors LLC. d. Buell Door Company. e. Dimension Millworks. f. Eggers Industries. g. Enjo Architectural Millwork. h. Harring Doors. i. Ideal Architectural Doors & Plywood. j. Maiman Company (The). k. Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc. l. McPhillips Manufacturing Company. m. Pinecrest, Inc. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 081433 - 4 n. Select Interior Door, Ltd. o. Sun-Dor-Co. p. Woodtech Trading Company. 2. Panel Designs: Indicated by Drawings. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. 3. Grade: Premium. 4. Finish: Transparent. 5. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Species indicated in Interior (Millwork) specification sheets. 6. Door Construction for Transparent Finish: a. Stile and Rail Construction: Clear lumber; may be edge glued for width. Select lumber for similarity of grain and color, and arrange for optimum match between adjacent pieces. b. Stile and Rail Construction: Veneered, structural composite lumber or veneered, edge- and end-glued clear lumber. Select veneers for similarity of grain and color, and arrange for optimum match between adjacent pieces. Use veneers not less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick. c. Flat-Panel Construction: Veneered, wood-based panel product. 7. Stile and Rail Widths: As indicated. 8. Flat-Panel Thickness: As indicated. 9. Molding Profile (Sticking): Recessed square. 10. Glass: Uncoated, clear, fully tempered float glass, 5.0 mm thick, complying with Division 08 Section "Glazing." 11. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels or an AWI letter of licensing for Project indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified. 2.4 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOOR FABRICATION A. Fabricate stile and rail wood doors in sizes indicated for field fitting. B. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels unless otherwise indicated: 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/2 inch (13 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide not more than 3/8 inch (10 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold. a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge edges. C. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W Series standards, and hardware templates. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 081433 - 5 1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. D. Glazed Openings: Trim openings indicated for glazing with solid wood moldings, with one side removable. Miter wood moldings at corner joints. E. Prehung Doors: Provide stile and rail doors as prehung units including doors, frames, weather stripping, and hardware. 1. Provide wood door frames that comply with Division 06 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork." 2. Provide hardware, including weather stripping and thresholds, that complies with Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." 2.5 SHOP PRIMING A. Doors for Transparent Finish: Shop prime doors with stain (if required), other required pretreatments, and first coat of finish as specified in Division 09 Section "Staining and Transparent Finishing." Seal all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with first coat of finish. 2.6 FINISHING A. For doors indicated to have transparent finish, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards," and with other requirements specified. 1. Finish wood doors at factory or woodworking shop to match adjacent trim and millwork. 2. Finish faces and all four edges of doors, including mortises and cutouts. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. B. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium to match millwork and trim. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and substrates, with Installer present, for suitable conditions where wood stile and rail doors will be installed. 1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 081433 - 6 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install wood door frames level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 1. Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand smooth. B. Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." C. Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, WDMA I.S.6, "Industry Standard for Wood Stile and Rail Doors," or AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards,"and other requirements specified. D. Field-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch (3 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless undercut is inidcated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold. a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge edges. 3. Bevel non- doors to receive pivots as recommended by manufacturer. E. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. F. Factory or Shop-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 081433 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 1 SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for heating and air-conditioning duct access doors. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, fire ratings, materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Samples: For each door face material, at least 3 by 5 inches (75 by 125 mm) in size, in specified finish. C. Product Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to access door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics according to the following test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. NFPA 252 or UL 10B for fire-rated access door assemblies installed vertically. 2. NFPA 288 for fire-rated access door assemblies installed horizontally. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 2 2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Access Panel Solutions. 2. Acudor Products, Inc. 3. Alfab, Inc. 4. Babcock-Davis. 5. Cendrex Inc. 6. Elmdor/Stoneman Manufacturing Co.; Div. of Acorn Engineering Co. 7. Jensen Industries; Div. of Broan-Nutone, LLC. 8. J. L. Industries, Inc.; Div. of Activar Construction Products Group. 9. Karp Associates, Inc. 10. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 11. Maxam Metal Products Limited. 12. Metropolitan Door Industries Corp. 13. MIFAB, Inc. 14. Milcor Inc. 15. Nystrom, Inc. 16. Williams Bros. Corporation of America (The). B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door and frame from single source from single manufacturer. C. Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges at all back of house locations not visible to the general public unless fire rate assemblies. 1. Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame. Provide manufacturer's standard-width exposed flange, proportional to door size. 2. Locations: Wall and ceiling as necessary to accommodate access to mechanical or electrical equipment for maintenance or service. 3. Door Size: As necessary to accommodate access to mechanical or electrical equipment for maintenance or service. 4. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060 inch (1.52 mm), 16 gage. a. Finish: Factory finish. 5. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door. 6. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard. 7. Hardware: Latch. D. Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges: 1. Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame. Provide frame with gypsum board beads for concealed flange installation. 2. Locations: Walls of public bathrooms indicated to receive tile. 3. Door Size: As necessary to accommodate access to mechanical or electrical equipment for maintenance or service. 4. Stainless-Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.062 inch (1.59 mm), 16 gage. a. Finish: No. 4. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 3 5. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard concealed hinges. 6. Hardware: Latch. E. Recessed Access Doors with Concealed Flanges: 1. Assembly Description: Fabricate door in the form of a pan recessed 1/2 inch (13 mm) gypsum board or wood infill. Provide frame with gypsum board bead for concealed flange and no bead for wood infill installation. 2. Locations: Walls and ceilings Public Spaces other than areas indicated to receive Tile. 3. Door Size: As necessary to accommodate access to mechanical or electrical equipment for maintenance or service. 4. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060 inch (1.52 mm), 16 gage. a. Finish: Factory prime. 5. Frame Material: Same material and thickness as door. 6. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard. 7. Hardware: Latch. F. Exterior Flush Access Doors 1. Assembly Description: Fabricate door to be weatherproof and fit flush to frame. Provide manufacturer's standard 2-inch- (50-mm-) thick fiberglass insulation and extruded door gaskets. Provide manufacturer's standard-width frame for surface mounting, proportional to door size. 2. Locations: Walls as necessary to accommodate access for maintenance of equipment. 3. Door Size: As necessary to accommodate access for maintenance of equipment. 4. Stainless-Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.062 inch (1.59 mm), 16 gage. a. Finish: No. 4. 5. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door. 6. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard. 7. Hardware: Latch. G. Fire-Rated, Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges at all back of house locations not visible to the general public to maintain integrity of fire rated assemblies: 1. Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame, uninsulated. Provide self- latching door with automatic closer and interior latch release. Provide manufacturer's standard-width exposed flange, proportional to door size. 2. Locations: Wall and ceiling as necessary to accommodate access to mechanical or electrical equipment for maintenance or service. 3. Door Size: As necessary to accommodate access to mechanical or electrical equipment for maintenance or service. 4. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction. 5. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.036 inch (0.91 mm), 20 gage. a. Finish: Factory finish. 6. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door. 7. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard. 8. Hardware: Latch. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 4 H. Hardware: 1. Latch: Slam latch operated by screwdriver with interior release. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D. C. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed. D. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating. E. Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793, manufacturer's standard finish. F. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 304. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. G. Frame Anchors: Same type as door face. H. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation. B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports indicated. 1. For concealed flanges with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum board securely attached to perimeter of frames. 2. Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal or wood framing. 3. Provide mounting holes in frame for attachment of masonry anchors. D. Recessed Access Doors: Form face of panel to provide recess for application of applied finish. Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling. E. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 5 1. For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device. Furnish plastic grommets and install in holes cut through finish. 2.5 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. D. Steel and Metallic-Coated-Steel Finishes: 1. Factory Prime: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. 2. Factory Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry-film thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm) for topcoat. E. Stainless-Steel Finishes: 1. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. 2. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches. a. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece. b. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. c. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames. B. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 6 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation. B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION 083113 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 - 1 SECTION 083323 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Service doors. 2. Insulated service doors. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports. 2. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for finish painting of factory-primed doors. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. B. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles for slats, and finishes. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories. C. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies, and indicate dimensions, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include points of attachment and their corresponding static and dynamic loads imposed on structure. 4. For exterior components, include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for excluding and draining moisture to the exterior. 5. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's finish charts showing full range of colors and textures available for units with factory-applied finishes. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 - 2 1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection. E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish on the following components, in manufacturer's standard sizes: 1. Curtain slats. 2. Bottom bar with sensor edge. 3. Guides. 4. Brackets. 5. Hood. 6. Locking device(s). 7. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For overhead coiling doors to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS, GENERAL A. Source Limitations: Provide doors, tracks, motors, and accessories from one manufacturer. Provide secondary components from source acceptable to manufacturer of primary components. 1. Obtain operators and controls from overhead coiling door manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance, Exterior Doors: Capable of withstanding the design wind loads. 1. Design Wind Load: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Deflection Limits: Design overhead coiling doors to withstand design wind load without evidencing permanent deformation or disengagement of door components. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 - 3 2.3 EXTERIOR (INSULATED) DOOR ASSEMBLY A. Insulated Service Door: Overhead coiling door formed with curtain of interlocking metal slats. 1. Basis of Design: Stormtite Insulated Model 625, Overhead Door Corp., 2501 S. State Hwy. 121, Suite 200, Lewisville, TX 75067. ASD. Tel. Toll Free: (800) 275-3290. Phone: (469) 549-7100. Fax: (972) 906-1499. Web Site: www.overheaddoor.com. E- mail: info@overheaddoor.com B. Operation Cycles: Door components and operators capable of operating for not less than 100,000. One operation cycle is complete when a door is opened from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position. C. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate of 0.08 cfm/sq. ft. (0.406 L/s per sq. m) at 15 and 25 mph (24.1 and 40.2 km/h) when tested according to ASTM E 283 or DASMA 105. D. STC Rating: 21. E. Curtain R-Value: 7.7 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu. F. Door Curtain Slats: Interlocking roll-formed slats as specified following. Endlocks shall be attached to each end of alternate slats to prevent lateral movement, Flat profile type F-265i slats of 2-5/8-inch (67-mm) center-to-center height. 1. Insulated- Front Slat fabricated of: 18 gauge galvanized steel. 2. Insulated- Back Slat fabricated of: 18 gauge galvanized steel. 3. Gasket Seal. Manufacturer's standard continuous gaskets between slats. G. Slat cavity filled with CFC-free foamed-in-place, polyurethane insulation. H. Bottom Bar: Two angles, each not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8 inch (38 by 38 by 3 mm) thick; fabricated from hot-dip galvanized steel and finished to match door. I. Curtain Jamb Guides: Galvanized steel with exposed finish matching curtain slats. J. Hood: Match curtain material and finish. 1. Shape: Manufacturer’s Standard. 2. Mounting: Interior Face of wall. K. Locking Devices: Equip door with Cylinder lock for electric operation with interlock switch. L. Electric Door Operator: 1. Provide UL listed electric operator, size as recommended by manufacturer to move door in either direction at not less than 2/3 foot nor more than 1 foot per second. 2. Usage Classification: Standard duty, up to 25 cycles per hour and up to 90 cycles per day 3. Operator Location: Wall. 4. Safety: Listed according to UL 325 by a qualified testing agency for commercial or industrial use. 5. Motor Exposure: Interior. 6. Emergency Manual Operation: Push-up type. 7. Obstruction-Detection Device: Automatic pneumatic sensor edge on bottom bar. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 - 4 a. Sensor Edge Bulb Color: Black. 8. Operator Controls: a. Push-button (interior) and key operated control (exterior) stations with open, close, and stop buttons. 1) Interior Controls surface mounted. 2) Exterior Controls flush mounted. 9. Other Equipment: Portable radio-control system. a. Provide separate codes for each door. b. Provide 3 controllers for exterior each door. M. Curtain Accessories: Equip door with weatherseals, push/pull handles, and automatic closing device. N. Door Finish: 1. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coated Finish: Color as indicated by manufacturer's designations. 2. Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Match finish of exterior curtain-slat face. 2.4 INTERIOR (UN-INSULATED) DOOR ASSEMBLY A. Service Door: Overhead coiling door formed with curtain of interlocking metal slats. 1. Basis of Design: Overhead Door Corporation Model 610 Service Door, Overhead Door Corp., 2501 S. State Hwy. 121, Suite 200, Lewisville, TX 75067. ASD. Tel. Toll Free: (800) 275-3290. Phone: (469) 549-7100. Fax: (972) 906-1499. Web Site: www.overheaddoor.com. E-mail: info@overheaddoor.com B. Operation Cycles: Door components and operators capable of operating for not less than 20,000. One operation cycle is complete when a door is opened from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position. C. Brackets: Hot rolled steel to support counterbalance, curtain and hood D. Door Curtain Material: 22 gauge galvanized steel. 1. 18 gauge galvanized steel at Trash Enclosure. E. Door Curtain Slats: Flat profile type F-265 profile slats of 2-5/8-inch (67-mm) center-to-center height. F. Bottom Bar: Manufacturer’s Standard aluminum extrusions and finished to match door. G. Curtain Jamb Guides: Galvanized steel with exposed finish matching curtain slats. H. Hood: Aluminum hood with intermediate supports as required. 1. Shape: Manufacturer’s Standard. 2. Mounting: Between jambs. I. Locking Devices: Two interior bottom bar slide bolts for manually operated doors. 1. Provided Exterior slide bolts at Trash Enclosure. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 - 5 J. Manual Door Operator: Push-up operation. K. Curtain Accessories: Equip door with push/pull handles. L. Door Finish: 1. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coated Finish: Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.5 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.6 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION A. Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling-door curtain of interlocking metal slats, designed to withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows: 1. Steel Door Curtain Slats: Zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled structural steel sheet; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90 (Z275) zinc coating; nominal sheet thickness (coated) of 0.028 inch (0.71 mm); and as required. 2. Insulation: Fill slats for insulated doors with manufacturer's standard thermal insulation complying with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84 or UL 723. Enclose insulation completely within slat faces. 3. Metal Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Match metal of exterior curtain-slat face, with minimum steel thickness of 0.010 inch (0.25 mm). B. Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard angles or channels and angles of same material and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise indicated, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain, and a continuous bar for holding windlocks. 2.7 HOODS A. General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Form closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting that projects beyond wall face. Equip hood with intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging. 1. Galvanized Steel: Nominal 0.028-inch- (0.71-mm-) thick, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet with G90 (Z275) zinc coating, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 - 6 2.8 LOCKING DEVICES A. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side. B. Locking Device Assembly: Fabricate with cylinder lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, operating handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage through slots in tracks. 1. Lock Cylinders: Cylinders standard with manufacturer. 2. Keys: Three for each cylinder. C. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when door is locked. 2.9 CURTAIN ACCESSORIES A. Weatherseals for Exterior Doors: Equip each exterior door with weather-stripping gaskets fitted to entire exterior perimeter of door for a weather-resistant installation unless otherwise indicated. 1. At door head, use 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick, replaceable, continuous-sheet baffle secured to inside of hood or field- installed on the header. 2. At door jambs, use replaceable, adjustable, continuous, nylon brushes. B. Push/Pull Handles: Equip each push-up-operated with lifting handles on each side of door, finished to match door. C. Pull-Down Strap: Provide pull-down straps for doors more than 84 inches (2130 mm) high. 2.10 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self- lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members. B. Counterbalance Exterior Door Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of manufacturer's standard hot- formed, structural-quality, seamless carbon-steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support rolled-up curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 in./ft. (2.5 mm/m) of span under full load. C. Counterbalance Interior Door Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of manufacturer's standard hot- formed, structural-quality, welded carbon-steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support rolled-up curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 in./ft. (2.5 mm/m) of span under full load D. Counterbalance Spring: One or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel. Secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft with cast-steel barrel plugs. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 - 7 E. Torsion Rod for Counterbalance Shaft: Fabricate of manufacturer's standard cold-rolled steel, sized to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load. F. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate. 2.11 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS A. General: Equip door with manual door operator by door manufacturer. B. Push-up Door Operation: Lift handles for raising and lowering doors, with counterbalance mechanism designed so that required lift or pull for door operation does not exceed 25 lbf (111 N). 2.12 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS A. General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and operation-cycles requirement specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation. 1. Basis of Design: Model RSX Commercial Standard Duty Door Operator; Overhead Door Corp., 2501 S. State Hwy. 121, Suite 200, Lewisville, TX 75067. ASD. Tel. Toll Free: (800) 275-3290. Phone: (469) 549-7100. Fax: (972) 906-1499. Web Site: www.overheaddoor.com. E-mail: sales@overheaddoor.com. 2. Comply with NFPA 70. 3. Control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6, with NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V ac or dc. B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than number of cycles per hour indicated for each door. C. Door Operator Location(s): Operator location indicated for each door. 1. Wall Mounted: Operator is mounted to the inside front wall on the left or right side of door and connected to door drive shaft with drive chain and sprockets. Side room is required for this type of mounting. Wall mounted operator can also be mounted above or below shaft; if above shaft, headroom is required. D. Motors: Reversible-type motor with controller (disconnect switch) for motor exposure indicated. 1. Electrical Characteristics: a. Phase: Single phase or Polyphase. b. Volts: Manufacturer’s Standard. c. Hertz: 60. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 - 8 2. Motor Size: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at a speed not less than 8 in./sec. (203 mm/s) and not more than 12 in./sec. (305 mm/s), without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor. 3. Operating Controls, Controllers, Disconnect Switches, Wiring Devices, and Wiring: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated. 4. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors and other electrical devices with building electrical system and each location where installed. E. Limit Switches: Equip each motorized door with adjustable switches interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions. F. Obstruction Detection Devices: External entrapment protection consisting of indicated automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. For non-fire-rated doors, activation of device immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. 1. Pneumatic Sensor Edge: Automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal or weather stripping mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor activates device. G. Control Station: Three-button control station in fixed location with momentary-contact push- button controls labeled "Open" and "Stop" and sustained- or constant-pressure push-button control labeled "Close." 1. Interior-Mounted Units: Full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general- purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure. 2. Exterior-Mounted Units: Full-guarded, standard-duty, surface-mounted, weatherproof type, NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure, key operated. H. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip each electrically powered door with capability for emergency manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for door operation does not exceed 30 lbf (133 N). I. Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand-operated disconnect mechanism for automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount mechanism so it is accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged. J. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation. K. Portable Radio-Control System: Consisting of three of the following per door operator: 1. Three-channel universal coaxial receiver to open, close, and stop door. 2. Portable control device to open and stop door may be momentary-contact type; control to close door shall be sustained- or constant-pressure type. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 - 9 2.13 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM/NOMMA's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products (AMP 500-06)" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.14 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Mill Finish: Manufacturer's standard. 2.15 STEEL AND GALVANIZED-STEEL FINISHES A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine locations of electrical connections. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install overhead coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified. B. Install overhead coiling doors, hoods, controls, and operators at the mounting locations indicated for each door. C. Accessibility: Install overhead coiling doors, switches, and controls along accessible routes in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility. D. Power-Operated Doors: 1. Install automatic garage doors openers according to UL 325. 2. Coordinate installation of electrical service with Section 16150. Complete wiring from disconnect to unit components Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 - 10 3.3 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion. 1. Adjust exterior doors and components to be weather-resistant. B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer. C. Adjust seals to provide tight fit around entire perimeter. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors. END OF SECTION 083323 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 1 SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior and interior storefront framing. 2. Storefront framing for window walls. 3. Exterior and interior manual-swing entrance doors and door-frame units. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 072700 “Air Barriers” for materials used to bridge between aluminum storefront system and building intersection. 2. Division 079200 “Joint Sealants” for joint sealants installed as part of the aluminum storefront system. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior. 2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum- framed entrances and storefronts, showing the following: a. Joinery, including concealed welds. b. Anchorage. c. Expansion provisions. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 2 d. Glazing. e. Flashing and drainage. 3. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes. E. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of assemblies, made from 12- inch (300-mm) lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following: 1. Joinery, including concealed welds. 2. Anchorage. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Glazing. 5. Flashing and drainage. F. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware. G. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Energy Performance Certificates: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each aluminum- framed entrance and storefront. C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to include in maintenance manuals. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 3 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. 1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. 1.8 MOCKUPS A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas. e. Failure of operating components. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 4 c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. 1. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Failure also includes the following: a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. b. Glass breakage. c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. e. Failure of operating units. C. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. D. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows: 1. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch (3.2 mm), whichever is smaller 2. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m). E. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows: 1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area: a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.30 L/s per sq. m) at a static-air- pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa). 2. Entrance Doors: a. Pair of Doors: Maximum air leakage of 1.0 cfm/sq. ft. (5.08 L/s per sq. m) at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa). Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 5 b. Single Doors: Maximum air leakage of 0.5 cfm/sq. ft. (2.54 L/s per sq. m) at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa). F. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows: 1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind- load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa). G. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: Test according to AAMA 501.1 as follows: 1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested at dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa). 2. Maximum Water Leakage: According to AAMA 501.1 No uncontrolled water penetrating assemblies or water appearing on assemblies' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. Water leakage does not include water controlled by flashing and gutters, or water that is drained to exterior. H. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows: 1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-factor of not more than 0.36 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to NFRC 100. 2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat gain coefficient of no greater than 0.35 as determined according to NFRC 200. 3. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC-certified condensation resistance rating of no less than 45 as determined according to NFRC 500. I. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes: 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. 2. Thermal Cycling: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing, anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5. a. High Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior metal- surface temperature of 160 deg F. b. Low Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: minus 30 deg F. c. Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 75 deg F. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design Product: EFCO, Series 403 Thermal Storefront Framing System, Screw Spline. B. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of aluminum-framed entrance and storefront system, including framing doors, venting windows and accessories, from single manufacturer. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 6 2.3 FRAMING A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Construction: Thermally broken. 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 3. Glazing Plane: Interior. 4. Finish: Baked-enamel or powder-coat finish. 5. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system. B. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction. C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. D. Materials: 1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M. d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. 2. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. a. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. b. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. c. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M. 2.4 VENTING WINDOWS A. Aluminum Windows: Manufacturer's standard units, complying with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440, with self-flashing mounting fins, and as follows: 1. Window Type: Awning as may be indicated on Drawings. 2. Minimum Performance Class: AW. 3. Minimum Performance Grade: 40. 4. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish, but not less than 0.064-inch (1.63-mm) thickness at any location for main frame and sash members. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 7 a. Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate window units with an integral, concealed, low-conductance thermal barrier; located between exterior materials and window members exposed on interior side; in a manner that eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact. 5. Mullions: Between adjacent windows, fabricated of extruded aluminum matching finish of window units. 6. Fasteners, Anchors, and Clips: Nonmagnetic stainless steel, aluminum, or other noncorrosive material, compatible with aluminum window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components of window units. Fasteners shall not be exposed, except for attaching hardware. a. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw-anchor into aluminum less than 0.128 inch (3.26 mm) thick, reinforce interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide standard, noncorrosive, pressed-in, spline grommet nuts. 7. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard; of aluminum, stainless steel, die-cast steel, malleable iron, or bronze; including the following: a. Cam-action sweep sash lock and keeper at meeting rails. b. Spring-loaded, snap-type lock at jambs. c. Pole-operated, cam-action locking device on meeting rail where rail is more than 72 inches (1830 mm) above floor. d. Steel or bronze operating arms. B. Glazing: Same as adjacent aluminum-framed entrances and storefront glazing. C. Finish: Match adjacent aluminum-framed entrances and storefront finish. 2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation. 1. Basis of Design: EFCO 2” Thermastile Series D302 Medium Stile Aluminum Swing Entrance Doors. 2. Door Construction: 2-inch (50.8-mm) overall thickness, with minimum 0.188-inch- (4.8- mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. a. Thermal Construction: 1) High-performance thermal struts, consisting of glass reinforced polyamide nylon, mechanically crimped in raceways extruded in the exterior and interior extrusions separate aluminum members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior. 3. Door Design: Medium stile; 3-1/2-inch (88.9-mm) nominal width. 4. Finish: Match adjacent aluminum-framed entrances and storefront finish Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 8 5. Glazing: Same as adjacent aluminum-framed entrances and storefront glazing 6. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: a. All units shall be dry glazed with extruded pressure fitting aluminum glazing stops, and EPDM gaskets b. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door. 2.6 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE A. Entrance Door Hardware: Hardware not specified in this Section is specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware." B. General: Provide entrance door hardware and entrance door hardware sets indicated in door and frame schedule for each entrance door to comply with requirements in this Section. 1. Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products equivalent in function and comparable in quality to named products. 2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated. 3. Opening-Force Requirements: a. Egress Doors: Not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch and not more than 30 lbf (133 N)to set the door in motion and not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to open the door to its minimum required width. b. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N) to fully open door. C. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of entrance door hardware are indicated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article. Products are identified by using entrance door hardware designations as follows: 1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article. D. Pivot Hinges: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1. 1. Offset-Pivot Hinges: Provide top, bottom, and intermediate offset pivots at each door leaf. 2. Quantities: a. For doors up to 87 inches (2210 mm) high, provide three hinges per leaf. b. For doors more than 87 and up to 120 inches (2210 and up to 3048 mm) high, provide four hinges per leaf. E. Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1. F. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1. G. Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 9 H. Panic Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1, listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. I. Cylinders: As specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware." J. Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for aluminum framing. K. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6. L. Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, with accessories required for a complete installation, sized as required by door size, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use; adjustable to comply with field conditions and requirements for opening force. M. Concealed Overhead Holders: BHMA A156.8, Grade 1. N. Door Stops: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1, floor or wall mounted, as appropriate for door location indicated, with integral rubber bumper. O. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components. 1. Compression Type: Made of ASTM D 2000, molded neoprene, or ASTM D 2287, molded PVC. 2. Sliding Type: AAMA 701/702, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing. P. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed fasteners on mounting strip. Q. Silencers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1. R. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21, raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1:2, with maximum height of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). S. Finger Guards: Manufacturer's standard collapsible neoprene or PVC gasket anchored to frame hinge-jamb at center-pivoted doors. 2.7 GLAZING A. Glazing: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing." B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers. C. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 10 2.8 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing system. B. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch (25.4 mm) that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer. C. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat. 2.9 FABRICATION A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior. 6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. E. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using screw-spline system. F. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware. 1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 11 2. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install three silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames for pairs of doors. G. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. 1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable strip and mortised into door edge. 2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms. H. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes. I. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 2.10 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF or FEVE resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare surfaces that are in contact with structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 12 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. 6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or by installing nonconductive spacers. 2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation. D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades. E. Install operable units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust weather-stripping contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation. F. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing." G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping. 2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3.2 mm in 3 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6.35 mm in 12.2 m). 2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet (3.2 mm in 6 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6.35 mm in 12.2 m). 3. Alignment: a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch (12.7 to 25.4 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch (25.4 mm) wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch (6 mm). 4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m); 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) over total length. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 13 3.5 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Entrance Door Hardware: 1. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of entrance door hardware. 3.6 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE SETS END OF SECTION 084113 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1 SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Mechanical door hardware for the following: a. Swinging doors. 2. Cylinders for door hardware. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 06 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for cabinet door hardware provided as part of architectural woodwork. 2. Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames". 3. Division 08 Section "Stile and Rail Wood Doors". 4. Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames" for access door hardware, including cylinders. 5. Division 08 Section "Overhead Coiling Doors" for door hardware provided as part of overhead door assemblies. 6. Division 08 Section "Automatic Entrances" for entrance door hardware cylinders. 7. Division 12 Sections for cabinet door hardware provided as part of casework. 8. Division 26 Sections for connections to electrical power system and for low-voltage wiring work. 9. Division 28 Section "Access Control" for access control devices installed at door openings and provided as part of a security system. 10. Division 28 Section "Intrusion Detection" for detection devices installed at door openings and provided as part of an intrusion-detection system. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For plastic protective trim units in each finish, color, and texture required for each type of trim unit indicated. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 2 C. Samples for Verification: For exposed door hardware of each type required, in each finish specified, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. Tag Samples with full description for coordination with the door hardware schedule. Submit Samples before, or concurrent with, submission of door hardware schedule. 1. Sample Size: Full-size units or minimum 2-by-4-inch (51-by-102-mm) Samples for sheet and 4-inch (102-mm) long Samples for other products. a. Full-size Samples will be returned to Contractor. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final check of operation, be incorporated into the Work, within limitations of keying requirements. D. Other Action Submittals: 1. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. a. Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. b. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." Double space entries, and number and date each page. c. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in the Contract Documents. d. Content: Include the following information: 1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each door and frame. 2) Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor plans and to door and frame schedule. 3) Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product. 4) Description of electrified door hardware sequences of operation and interfaces with other building control systems. 5) Fastenings and other pertinent information. 6) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. 7) Mounting locations for door hardware. 8) List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame. 2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations that are coordinated with the Contract Documents. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 3 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and Architectural Hardware Consultant. B. Product Certificates: For electrified door hardware, from the manufacturer. 1. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire-rated doors complies with listed fire-rated door assemblies. C. Product Test Reports: For compliance with accessibility requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for door hardware on doors located in accessible routes. D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. Include final hardware and keying schedule. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. 1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity. 2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. 3. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently certified by DHI as follows: 1. For door hardware, an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC). C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from a single manufacturer. 1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable. D. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated door assemblies are indicated in the drawings, provide door hardware rated for use in assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C, unless otherwise indicated. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 4 E. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that meet requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. 1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. (3 cu. m per minute/sq. m) at the tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg (75 Pa) of water. F. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. G. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. H. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines, and ICC/ANSI A117.1. 1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N). 2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements: a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to door. b. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high. 4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. I. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." In addition to Owner, Construction Manager, Contractor, and Architect, conference participants shall also include Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant and Owner's security consultant. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for future expansion. 2. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. 3. Requirements for key control system. 4. Requirements for access control. 5. Address for delivery of keys. J. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 2. Inspect and discuss preparatory work performed by other trades. 3. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in for electrified door hardware. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 5 4. Review sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware. 5. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package. C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of floor-recessed door hardware with floor construction. Cast anchoring inserts into concrete. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. B. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. C. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's security consultant. D. Electrical System Roughing-In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems. E. Existing Openings: Where hardware components are scheduled for application to existing construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to provide proper door operation. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. b. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 6 2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated. a. Electromagnetic Locks: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door and door hardware operation. Provide parts and supplies that are the same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original products. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article to comply with requirements in this Section. 1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named manufacturers' products. 2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated. B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article. 2.2 HINGES A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow- metal doors and hollow-metal frames. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Baldwin Hardware Corporation. b. Bommer Industries, Inc. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 7 c. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. d. Hager Companies. e. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company. f. Lawrence Hardware Inc. g. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. h. PBB, Inc. i. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works. 2.3 SELF-CLOSING HINGES AND PIVOTS A. Self-Closing Hinges and Pivots: BHMA A156.17. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Baldwin Hardware Corporation. b. Bommer Industries, Inc. c. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. d. Hager Companies. e. Lawrence Hardware Inc. f. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. g. PBB, Inc. h. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works. 2.4 CENTER-HUNG AND OFFSET PIVOTS A. Center-Hung and Offset Pivots: BHMA A156.4. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America. b. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company. c. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 2.5 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule. B. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors, and as follows: 1. Bored Locks: Minimum 1/2-inch (13-mm) latchbolt throw. 2. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch (19-mm) latchbolt throw. 3. Deadbolts: Minimum 1-inch (25-mm) bolt throw. C. Lock Backset: 2-3/4 inches (70 mm), unless otherwise indicated. D. Lock Trim: Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 8 1. Description: As indicated in by manufacturer and model number Schedule. 2. Levers: As indicated in by manufacturer and model number Schedule. 3. Escutcheons (Roses): As indicated in by manufacturer and model number Schedule. 4. Dummy Trim: Match lock trim and escutcheons. 5. Operating Device: As indicated in by manufacturer and model number Schedule with escutcheons (roses). E. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch. 1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing. 4. Rabbet Front and Strike: Provide on locksets for rabbeted meeting stiles. F. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2; Grade 1; Series 4000. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. b. Best Access Systems; Div. of Stanley Security Solutions, Inc. c. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. d. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; n ASSA ABLOY Group Company. e. Falcon Lock; An Ingersoll-Rand Company. f. K2 Commercial Hardware; a Black & Decker Corp. company. g. Marks USA. h. Medeco Security Locks, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. i. PDQ Manufacturing. j. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. k. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand company. l. Weiser Lock Corp.; a Black & Decker Corp. company. m. Yale Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. G. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13; Grade 1; stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; Series 1000. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Accurate Lock & Hardware Co. b. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. c. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. d. Best Access Systems; Div. of Stanley Security Solutions, Inc. e. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. f. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. g. Falcon Lock; an Ingersoll-Rand company. h. Marks USA. i. PDQ Manufacturing. j. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 9 k. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand company. l. Yale Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 2.6 AUXILIARY LOCKS A. Bored Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5: Grade 1; with strike that suits frame. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. b. Best Access Systems; Div. of Stanley Security Solutions, Inc. c. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. d. Falcon Lock; an Ingersoll-Rand company. e. Hager Companies. f. K2 Commercial Hardware; a Black & Decker Corp. company. g. Marks USA. h. Medeco Security Locks, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. i. PDQ Manufacturing. j. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. k. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand company. l. Weiser Lock Corp.; a Black & Decker Corp. company. m. Yale Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. B. Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5; Grade 1; with strike that suits frame. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Accurate Lock & Hardware Co. b. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. c. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. d. Best Access Systems; Div. of Stanley Security Solutions, Inc. e. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. f. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand company. g. Yale Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 2.7 ELECTROMAGNETIC LOCKS A. Electromagnetic Locks: BHMA A156.23; electrically powered; with electromagnet attached to frame and armature plate attached to door; full-exterior or full-interior type, as required by application indicated. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Door Controls International, Inc. b. Dortronics Systems, Inc. c. DynaLock Corp. d. Rutherford Controls Int'l. Corp. e. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand company. f. Securitron Magnalock Corporation; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 10 g. Security Door Controls. 2.8 ELECTROMECHANICAL LOCKS 2.9 SELF-CONTAINED ELECTRONIC LOCKS A. Self-Contained Electronic Locks: BHMA A156.25, mortise; with internal, battery-powered, self-contained electronic locks; consisting of complete lockset, motor-driven lock mechanism, and actuating device; enclosed in zinc-dichromate-plated, wrought-steel case, and strike that suits frame. Provide key override, low-battery detection and warning, LED status indicators, and ability to program at the lock. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Best Access Systems; Div. of Stanley Security Solutions, Inc. b. Kaba Ilco Corp.; a Kaba Group company. c. Marks USA. d. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. e. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand company. f. Yale Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 2.10 MANUAL FLUSH BOLTS A. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16; minimum 3/4-inch (19-mm) throw; designed for mortising into door edge. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. b. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated. c. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. d. Door Controls International, Inc. e. Hiawatha, Inc. f. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company. g. Trimco. 2.11 EXIT DEVICES AND AUXILIARY ITEMS A. Exit Devices and Auxiliary Items: BHMA A156.3. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. b. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. c. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. d. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. e. Detex Corporation. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 11 f. Door Controls International, Inc. g. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America. h. Dor-O-Matic; an Ingersoll-Rand company. i. K2 Commercial Hardware; a Black & Decker Corp. company. j. Monarch Exit Devices & Panic Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company. k. Precision Hardware, Inc.; Division of Stanley Security Solutions, Inc. l. Rutherford Controls Int'l. Corp. m. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. n. Von Duprin; an Ingersoll-Rand company. o. Yale Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 2.12 LOCK CYLINDERS A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver. 1. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locking devices. 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. b. ASSA, Inc.; An ASSA ABLOY Group Company. c. Best Access Systems; Div. of Stanley Security Solutions, Inc. d. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. e. Falcon Lock; an Ingersoll-Rand company. f. Medeco Security Locks, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. g. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. h. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand company. i. Yale Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. B. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5; Grade 1 permanent cores that are interchangeable; face finished to match lockset. C. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Provide 10 construction master keys. 2.13 KEYING A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference. 1. Existing System: a. Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system. b. Re-key Owner's existing master key system into new keying system. 2. Keyed Alike: Key all cylinders to same change key. B. Keys: Nickel silver. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 12 1. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the following: a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three. b. Master Keys: Five. c. Grand Master Keys: Five. d. Great-Grand Master Keys: Five. 2.14 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM A. Key Control Cabinet: BHMA A156.5; metal cabinet with baked-enamel finish; containing key- holding hooks, labels, 2 sets of key tags with self-locking key holders, key-gathering envelopes, and temporary and permanent markers; with key capacity of 150 percent of the number of locks. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Key Boxes and Cabinets. b. GE Security, Inc. c. HPC, Inc. d. Lund Equipment Co., Inc. e. MMF Industries. f. Tri Palm International. 2. Portable Cabinet: Tray for mounting in file cabinet, equipped with key-holding panels, envelopes, and cross-index system. B. Key Lock Boxes: Designed for storage of two keys. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. GE Security, Inc. b. HPC, Inc. c. Knox Company. 2.15 OPERATING TRIM A. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6; stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated. b. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. c. Forms + Surfaces. d. Hager Companies. e. Hiawatha, Inc. f. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company. g. Rockwood Manufacturing Company. h. Trimco. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 13 2.16 SURFACE CLOSERS A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. b. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. c. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America. d. Dor-O-Matic; an Ingersoll-Rand company. e. K2 Commercial Hardware; a Black & Decker Corp. company. f. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand company. g. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. h. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. i. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. j. Yale Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 2.17 MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Wall- and Floor-Mounted Stops: BHMA A156.16; polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum base metal. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc. b. Baldwin Hardware Corporation. c. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated. d. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. e. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. f. Door Controls International, Inc. g. Hager Companies. h. Hiawatha, Inc. i. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company. j. Rockwood Manufacturing Company. k. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works. l. Trimco. 2.18 OVERHEAD STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA A156.8. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 14 b. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand company. c. Rockwood Manufacturing Company. d. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 2.19 DOOR GASKETING A. Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; air leakage not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot (0.000774 cu. m/s per m) of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Hager Companies. b. M-D Building Products, Inc. c. National Guard Products. d. Pemko Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. e. Reese Enterprises, Inc. f. Sealeze; a unit of Jason Incorporated. g. Zero International. 2.20 THRESHOLDS A. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Hager Companies. b. M-D Building Products, Inc. c. National Guard Products. d. Pemko Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. e. Reese Enterprises, Inc. f. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. g. Sealeze; a unit of Jason Incorporated. h. Zero International. 2.21 METAL PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS A. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; fabricated from 0.050-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick bronze or stainless steel; with manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screw fasteners. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Baldwin Hardware Corporation. b. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated. c. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. d. Hiawatha, Inc. e. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems, Inc.; Div. of InPro Corporation. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 15 f. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company. g. Pawling Corporation. h. Rockwood Manufacturing Company. i. Trimco. 2.22 AUXILIARY DOOR HARDWARE A. Auxiliary Hardware: BHMA A156.16. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Baldwin Hardware Corporation. b. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. c. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. d. Hager Companies. e. Rockwood Manufacturing Company. f. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works. g. Trimco. 2.23 AUXILIARY ELECTRIFIED DOOR HARDWARE A. Auxiliary Electrified Door Hardware: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. DynaLock Corp. b. GE Security, Inc. c. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. d. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand company. e. Securitron Magnalock Corporation; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. f. Security Door Controls. 2.24 FABRICATION A. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18. B. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 16 of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 2. Fire-Rated Applications: a. Wood or Machine Screws: For the following: 1) Hinges mortised to doors or frames; use threaded-to-the-head wood screws for wood doors and frames. 2) Strike plates to frames. 3) Closers to doors and frames. b. Steel Through Bolts: For the following unless door blocking is provided: 1) Surface hinges to doors. 2) Closers to doors and frames. 3) Surface-mounted exit devices. 3. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors. 4. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors." 5. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. 2.25 FINISHES A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 17 3.2 PREPARATION A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6. B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors." 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831. 3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided. D. Intermediate Offset Pivots: Where offset pivots are indicated, provide intermediate offset pivots in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than one intermediate offset pivot per door and one additional intermediate offset pivot for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door height greater than 90 inches (2286 mm). E. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period. 1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as directed by Owner. F. Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule. G. Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above accessible ceilings or in equipment room. Verify location with Architect. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 18 1. Configuration: Provide least number of power supplies required to adequately serve doors with electrified door hardware. a. Circuits may or may not be identified in electrical documents. Contractor to identify required circuitry in submittal. H. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." I. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. J. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. K. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. L. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely from an open position of 30 degrees. 2. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt. 3. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust each item of door hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 19 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." 3.7 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. A schedule is furnished for whatever assistance it may afford the Contractor; do not consider it as entirely inclusive. Should any particular door or item be omitted in any scheduled hardware group, provide door or item with hardware same as required for similar purposes. Quantities listed are for each pair of doors, or for each single door. Zehren and Associates, Inc. 20112145.07 Vail Clubhouse 7/13/2015 Hardware Set No.1 Doors: Guest - Exterior Single Doors (Non-Egress): 104A, 104B, 105A Item Qty.Basis of Design Product Finish Comments Hinges (Top, Bottom, Intemediate)3*Door Manufacturer Offset Pivot Polyester Powder Coat to Match Door *Provide (2) intermediate pivots on each leaf over 120" tall and (1) on all others as Engineered by Manufacturer Lockset 1 Door Manufacturer Deadlock - Hook Bolt N/A - Concealed Adams Rite 1850-050 Lock Cylinder 1 Door Manufacturer Thumbturn Polyester Powder Coat to Match Door Interior side only - No blank cylinder (cover) on exteriorThreshold1Door Manufacturer Offset Pivots Mill Finish Aluminum Coordinate with Door Hinge, Match width of FrameDoor Gasket (Weather Stripping)1 Door Manufacturer Tubular Thermoplastic Black Thermoplastic Kerf-in Weatherstrip Head and Jambs Closer 1 Door Manufacturer LCN 2030 Concealed Overhead N/A - Concealed Confirm Compatibility with Door Size and Weight, Field Adjustable Hold open degrees Metal Protective Units (Pull)1 Door Manufacturer Architect's Classic #40 Dark Bronze Annodize 1" Wire Pull - CPII - 48" Tall - Mount Vertically on Stile Metal Protective Units (Push Bar)1 Door Manufacturer Architect's Classic #40 Dark Bronze Annodize 1" Wire Pull - CPII - 48" Tall - Mount Vertically on Stile Metal Protective Trim Units (Kick)1 Rockwood K1062 CSK, B4E US 32D/630 Satin Stainless Steel Confirm 8" vertical dimension -(ADA Compatibility 10" Door Bottom Rail) - Width of Door Minus 2" Door Stop 1 Rockwood 495 US26D Satin Chromium Spring Loaded Kick down stop Hardware Set No.2 Doors: Guest - Exterior Double Doors (Non-Egress): 000A, 20.3A,101A,104C, 104D, 104E, 104F, 107A, 107B Item Qty.Basis of Design Product Finish Comments Hinges (Top, Bottom, Intemediate)3*Door Manufacturer Offset Pivot Polyester Powder Coat to Match Door *Provide (2) intermediate pivots on each leaf over 120" tall and (1) on all others as Engineered by Manufacturer Lockset 1 Door Manufacturer Deadlock - Hook Bolt N/A - Concealed Adams Rite 1850-050Lock Cylinder 1 Door Manufacturer Thumbturn Polyester Powder Coat to Match Door Interior side only - No blank cylinder (cover) on exterior Threshold 1 Door Manufacturer Offset Pivots Mill Finish Aluminum Coordinate with Door Hinge, Match width of Frame Door Gasket (Weather Stripping)1 Door Manufacturer Tubular Thermoplastic Black Thermoplastic Kerf-in Weatherstrip Head and Jambs Door Gasket -Center Astragal 1 Adjustable Pile Door Manufacturer Dark Aluminum/Black Pile Mortise Application Each Side Closer 2 Door Manufacturer LCN 2030 Concealed Overhead N/A - Concealed Confirm Compatibility with Door Size and Weight, Field Adjustable Hold open degrees Metal Protective Units (Pull)2 Door Manufacturer Architect's Classic - CP II #40 Dark Bronze Annodize 1" Wire Pull - CPII - 48" Tall - Mount Vertically on Stile Metal Protective Units (Push Bar)2 Door Manufacturer Architect's Classic #40 Dark Bronze Annodize 1" Wire Pull - CPII - 48" Tall - Mount Vertically on Stile Metal Protective Trim Units (Kick)2 Rockwood K1062 CSK, B4E US 32D/630 Satin Stainless Steel Confirm 8" vertical dimension -(ADA Compatibility 10" Door Bottom Rail) - Width of Door Minus 2" Door Stop 2 Rockwood 495 US26D Satin Chromium Spring Loaded Kick down stop Surface Bolt 2 Rockwood 528-8 US32D/630 Satin Stainless Steel Top and Bottom - Inactive Leaf Hardware Set No.3Doors: Guest - Interior Vestibule Double Doors: 001A, 020A, 102A,Item Qty.Basis of Design Product Finish Comments Hinges (Top, Bottom, Intemediate)3*Door Manufacturer Offset Pivot Polyester Powder Coat to Match Door *Provide (2) intermediate pivots on each leaf over 120" tall and (1) on all others as Engineered by Manufacturer Threshold 1 Door Manufacturer Offset Pivots Mill Finish Aluminum Coordinate with Door Hinge, Match width of Frame Door Gasket (Weather Stripping)1 Door Manufacturer Tubular Thermoplastic Black Thermoplastic Kerf-in Weatherstrip Head and Jambs Door Gasket -Center Astragal 1 Adjustable Pile Door Manufacturer Dark Aluminum/Black Pile Mortise Application Each Side Closer 1 Door Manufacturer LCN 2030 Concealed Overhead N/A - Concealed Confirm Compatibility with Door Size and Weight, Field Adjustable Hold open degrees Metal Protective Units (Pull)1 Door Manufacturer Architect's Classic - CP II #40 Dark Bronze Annodize 1" Wire Pull - CPII - 48" Tall - Mount Vertically on Stile Metal Protective Units (Push Bar)2 Door Manufacturer Architect's Classic - CP II #40 Dark Bronze Annodize 1" Wire Pull - CPII - 48" Tall - Mount Vertically on Stile Metal Protective Trim Units (Kick)2 Rockwood K1062 CSK, B4E US 32D/630 Satin Stainless Steel Confirm 8" vertical dimension -(ADA Compatibility 10" Door Bottom Rail) - Width of Door Minus 2" Door Stop 2 Rockwood 495 US26D Satin Chromium Spring Loaded Kick down stop Hardware Set No.4Doors: Guest - Exterior Double Doors (Egress): 000B Item Qty.Basis of Design Product Finish Comments Hinges (Top, Bottom, Intemediate)3 Door Manufacturer Offset Pivot Polyester Powder Coat to Match Door *Provide (2) intermediate pivots on each leaf over 120" tall and (1) on all others as Engineered by Manufacturer Panic Hardware 2 Door Manufacturer Paneline Concealed Rod Match Doors Adams Rite 1850-050 Lock Cylinder 2 Door Manufacturer Hex Key Dogging Lock Lock Cylinder 2 Door Manufacturer Exterior Keyed Cylider N/A - Standard Provide Cylinder Guard Threshold 1 Door Manufacturer Offset Pivots Mill Finish Aluminum Coordinate with Door Hinge, Match width of Frame Door Gasket (Weather Stripping)1 Door Manufacturer Tubular Thermoplastic Black Thermoplastic Kerf-in Weatherstrip Head and Jambs Door Gasket -Center Astragal 1 Adjustable Pile Door Manufacturer Dark Aluminum/Black Pile Mortise Application Each Side Closer 2 Door Manufacturer LCN 2030 Concealed Overhead N/A - Concealed Confirm Compatibility with Door Size and Weight, Field Adjustable Hold open degrees Metal Protective Units (Pull)2 Door Manufacturer Architect's Classic - CP II #40 Dark Bronze Annodize 1" Wire Pull - CPII - 48" Tall - Mount Vertically on Stile Metal Protective Trim Units (Kick)2 Rockwood K1062 CSK, B4E US 32D/630 Satin Stainless Steel Confirm 8" vertical dimension -(ADA Compatibility 10" Door Bottom Rail) - Width of Door Minus 2"Door Stop 2 Rockwood 495 US26D Satin Chromium Spring Loaded Kick down stop Hardware Set No.4A Doors: Guest - Interior Double Doors (Egress): 116 Item Qty.Basis of Design Product Finish Comments Hinges 6 Stanley FBB168-NRP US 26D/630 Satin Chrome Full Mortise, Heavy Weight, 5-Knuckle, 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" Ball Bearing, Non-Removable Pin Panic Hardware 1 Von Duprin CD-9975-L-07-F US26D Satin Chrome Egress, mortise lockset, classroom function, cylinder (keyed) dogging, exterior lever, grooved surface Trim 1 Von Duprin 07 Lever (Athens)US26D Satin Chrome Order with Panic Hardware Trim/Lockset 1 Schlage L0170 US26D Satin Chrome 1/2 Dummy Lever to Match Panic Hardware (07) Trim 2 Schlage B Wrought Rose 626 Satin Chrome 2 9/16" Diameter Rose Surface Closer 2 DORMA TS 9315 STH US 32D/630 Satin Stainless Steel ADA, Pull Side, (Pocket), Door Mount, Hold Open, Spring Stop, Cushion Stop Metal Protective Trim Units (Kick)2 Rockwood K1062 CSK, B4E US 32D/630 Satin Stainless Steel Reference Details for SizeFlush Bolt-Top - South Door 1 Rockwood 550 Extension Flush Bolt US26D Satin Chromium 24" rod Flush Bolt-Bottom - South Door 1 Rockwood 550 Extension Flush Bolt US26D Satin Chromium Standard 12" rod Strike 1 Schlage 10-091 Stainless Steel Armored Strike, 1-3/16" Lip Strike Box 1 Schlage Black DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE 087101-1 Zehren and Associates, Inc. 20112145.07 Vail Clubhouse 7/13/2015 Hardware Set No. 5 Doors: Egress (Lower Level): 029A Item Qty.Basis of Design Product Finish Comments Hinges 3 Stanley FBB168 US 32D Satin Stainless Steel Full Mortise, Heavy Weight, 5-Knuckle, 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" Ball Bearing Exit Device (Panic Hardware)1 Von Duprin CD-9975-L-07-F US26D Satin Chrome Egress, mortise lockset, classroom function, cylinder (keyed) dogging, exterior (Foyer115) lever, grooved surfaceTrim1Von Duprin 07 Lever (Athens)US26D Satin Chrome Order with Panic HardwareTrim2SchlageN Escutcheon 626 Satin Chrome 8" x 2 9/16" Strike 1 Schlage 10-091 Stainless Steel Armored Strike, 1-3/16" Lip Strike Box 1 Schlage Black Surface Closer 1 Norton CPS7500T 626 Satin Chrome ADA, Push Side, Door Mount, Thumbturn Hold Open, Buffer Sprin (10 degrees), Parallel Arm Threshold 1 Pemko 17**AK Pemkote Skid Resistant Aluminum ** Width and length to match door jamb Door Gasket 3 Pemko P50BL Black Thermoplastic Kerf-in Weatherstrip Head and Jambs Automatic Door Bottom 1 Pemko 411_NBL Mill Finish Aluminum/Dark Brush Brush Insert Metal Protective Trim Units (Kick)1 Rockwood K1062 CSK, B4E US 32D/630 Satin Stainless Steel 10" tall by full width minus two inches Knoxbox 1 Fully recessed Hardware Set No. 6 Doors: Exterior Controlled Access (Lower Level): 028A Item Qty.Basis of Design Product Finish Comments Hinges 3 Stanley FBB168 US 26D/630 Satin Chrome Full Mortise, Heavy Weight, 5-Knuckle, 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" Ball Bearing Electronic Keypad and Lockset 1 Schlage CO-100-MS-70-KP-ATH-626 626 Satin Chrome Stand alone programmable battery (coded) keypad, mortise lock w/ cylinder, classroom function Trim 2 Schlage 07 Lever (Athens)626 Satin Chrome Commercial Lever - Back of House Surface Closer 1 Norton CPS7500T 626 Satin Chrome ADA, Push Side, Door Mount, Thumbturn Hold Open, Buffer Spring (10 degrees), Parallel Arm, Metal Cover Threshold 1 Pemko 17**AK Pemkote Skid Resistant Aluminum ** Width and length to match door jamb Door Gasket 3 Pemko P50BL Black Thermoplastic Kerf-in Weatherstrip Head and Jambs Automatic Door Bottom 1 Pemko 411_NBL Mill Finish Aluminum/Dark Brush Brush Insert Metal Protective Trim Units (Kick)1 Rockwood K1062 CSK, B4E US 32D/630 Satin Stainless Steel Reference Details for Size Hardware Set No. 6A Doors: Interior Controlled Access (Lower Level): 011A, 011B Item Qty.Basis of Design Product Finish CommentsHinges3StanleyCB199US 26D/630 Satin Chrome Full Mortise, Heavy Weight, 5-Knuckle, 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" Electronic Keypad and Lockset 1 Schlage CO-100-MS-50-KP-ATH-626 626 Satin Chrome Stand alone programmable battery (coded) keypad, mortise lock w/ cylinder, Office function Trim 2 Schlage 07 Lever (Athens)626 Satin Chrome Commercial Lever - Back of House Surface Closer 1 Norton CPS7500T 626 Satin Chrome ADA, Pull Side, Door Mount, Thumbturn Hold Open, Buffer Spring (10 degrees), Parallel Arm, Metal Cover Threshold 1 Pemko 17**AK Pemkote Skid Resistant Aluminum ** Width and length to match door jamb Metal Protective Trim Units (Kick)1 Rockwood K1062 CSK, B4E US 32D/630 Satin Stainless Steel Reference Details for Size Silencers 3 Trimco 1229B Grey Hardware Set No.7 Doors: (Non-Locking) Restroom Entry: 021, 022, 110, 111 Item Qty.Basis of Design Product Finish CommentsHinges3StanleyFBB168US 26D/630 Satin Chrome Full Mortise, Heavy Weight, 5-Knuckle, 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" Ball BearingSurface Closer 1 DORMA TS 9315 STH US 32D/630 Satin Stainless Steel ADA, Pull Side, Door Mount, Hold Open, Spring Stop, Cushion Stop Metal Protective Trim Unit (Kick)2 Rockwood K1062 CSK, B4E US 32D/630 Satin Stainless Steel Reference Details for Size - One each Side Metal Protective Trim Unit (Push)1 Rockwood 70A (3x12)US 32D/630 Satin Stainless Steel Circulation 105 Side Metal Restroom Sign 1 Rockwood BF687/BF688 (8x8)US32D Satin Stainless/BlackLettering ADA, Braille Men/Women 60" AFF Door Pull 1 Rockwood RM2142 US32/629 Straight Pull, Gripzone, Heavy Duty (HD) Mount Ref: Door drawing for length and mounting locations Silencers 3 Trimco 1229B Grey Hardware Set No.8 Doors: (Locking) Restroom Entry: 21.3, 22.3 Item Qty.Basis of Design Product Finish Comments Hinges 3 Stanley FBB168 US 26D/630 Satin Chrome Full Mortise, Heavy Weight, 5-Knuckle, 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" Ball Bearing Lockset 1 Schlage L464 626 Satin Chrome One Sided Deadbolt - Key Cylinder 118 Side - Each DoorStrike1Schlage10-079 Stainless Steel Standard Strike Strike Box 1 Schlage K510-053 Standard Strike Box Surface Closer 1 DORMA TS 9315 STH US 32D/630 Satin Stainless Steel ADA, Pull Side, Door Mount, Hold Open, Spring Stop, Cushion Stop Metal Protective Trim Unit (Kick)2 Rockwood K1062 CSK, B4E US 32D/630 Satin Stainless Steel Reference Details for Size - One each Side Metal Protective Trim Unit (Push)1 Rockwood 70A (3x12)US 32D/630 Satin Stainless Steel Circulation 105 Side Metal Restroom Sign 1 Rockwood BF687/BF688 (8x8)US32D Satin Stainless/BlackLettering ADA, Braille Men/Women 60" AFF Door Pull 1 Rockwood RM2142 US32/629 Straight Pull, Gripzone, Heavy Duty (HD) Mount Ref: Door drawing for length and mounting locations Silencers 3 Trimco 1229B Grey Hardware Set No.9 Doors: Restroom Stalls: 017, 021.1, 021.2, 021.4, 022.2, 022.1, 112 Item Qty.Basis of Design Product Finish CommentsHinges3StanleyCB199US 26D/630 Satin Chrome Full Mortise, Heavy Weight, 5-Knuckle, 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" Trim 2 Schlage 07 Lever (Athens)626 Satin Chrome Lockset 1 Schlage L9496 626 Satin Chrome Privacy Function, "Occupied" Indicator Trim 2 Schlage B Wrought Rose 626 Satin Chrome 2 9/16" Diameter Rose DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE 087101-2 Zehren and Associates, Inc. 20112145.07 Vail Clubhouse 7/13/2015 Trim 1 Schlage L583-363 626 Satin Chrome EZ Turn Door Stop 1 Rockwood 406 US 32D/630 Satin Stainless Steel Convex Wall Bumper Strike Plate 1 Schlage 10-072 626 Satin Chrome Extened Lip Dustbox 1 Schlage 622 Black Comes standard with 10-072 Strike Plate Silencers 3 Trimco 1229B Grey Hardware Set No.10Coat Check Dutch Door: 103 Item Qty.Basis of Design Product Finish Comments Hinges 4 Stanley CB199 US 26D/630 Satin Chrome Full Mortise, Heavy Weight, 5-Knuckle, 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" Trim 2 Schlage 07 Lever (Athens)626 Satin Chrome Lockset 1 Schlage L9010/F01 626 Satin Chrome Passage latch Trim 2 Schlage B Wrought Rose 626 Satin Chrome 2 9/16" Diameter Rose Door Stop 1 Rockwood 528 NP Hinge Mounted Door Stop (Floor)1 Rockwood 495 US26D Satin Chromium Spring Loaded Kick down stop Dust Proof Strike 1 Rockwood 570 Dust Proof Strike US26D Satin Chromium Mount at top of each bottom leaf Flush Bolts 1 Rockwood 555 US26D Satin Chromium Mount in each top leaf (downward) Dust Proof Strike 1 Rockwood 570 US26D Satin Chromium Floor and head - inactive leaf Flush Bolts 1 Rockwood 555 or 557 US26D Satin Chromium Floor and head - inactive leafStrike Plate 1 Schlage 626 Satin Chrome Dustbox 1 Schlage Black Comes standard with 10-072 Strike Plate Door Stop w/ Keeper 1 Rockwood 476 US26D Satin Chromium Each Top Leaf Silencers 4 Trimco 1229B Grey Hardware Set No.11 (Locking) Waitstaff Access Doors: 107C, 107D Item Qty.Basis of Design Product Finish Comments Hinges 3 Stanley FBB168-NRP US 26D/630 Satin Chrome Full Mortise, Heavy Weight, 5-Knuckle, 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" Ball Bearing, Non-Removable Pin Surface Closer 1 DORMA TS 9315 STH US 32D/630 Satin Stainless Steel ADA, Pull Side, Door Mount, 90 Degree Hold Open, 90 Degree Spring Stop, Cushion Stop Lockset 1 Schlage L464 626 Satin Chrome One Sided Deadbolt - Key Cylinder 118 Side - Each Door Strike 1 Schlage 10-079 Stainless Steel Standard StrikeStrike Box 1 Schlage Standard Strike Box Included with StrikeMetal Protective Trim Unit (Kick)1 Rockwood K1062 CSK, B4E US 32D/630 Satin Stainless Steel Reference Details for Size Metal Protective Trim Unit (Push)1 Rockwood 70A (3x12)US 32D/630 Satin Stainless Steel Exterior Silencers 3 Rockwood Grey Sign 1 "Door to Remain Unlocked During Business Hours" West Door Hardware Set No.11a (Non-Locking) Catering Waitstaff Access Doors: 104G, 105B, 118A Item Qty.Basis of Design Product Finish Comments Hinges 3 Stanley FBB168 US 26D/630 Satin Chrome Full Mortise, Heavy Weight, 5-Knuckle, 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" Ball Bearing Surface Closer 1 DORMA TS 9315 STH US 32D/630 Satin Stainless Steel ADA, Kitchen Side, Door Mount, 90 Degree Hold Open, 90 Degree Spring Stop, Cushion Stop Metal Protective Trim Unit (Kick)2 Rockwood K1062 CSK, B4E US 32D/630 Satin Stainless Steel Reference Details for SizeMetal Protective Trim Unit (Push)2 Rockwood 70A (3x12)US 32D/630 Satin Stainless Steel ExteriorSilencers3RockwoodGrey Hardware Set No.12 Single Janitor/Storage Doors: E2, E3, 002, 007A, 007B, 012B, 012A, 013C-A, 015, 016, 023, 031, 025A, 027A, 114 Item Qty.Basis of Design Product Finish Comments Hinges 3 Stanley F179 US 26D/630 Satin Chrome Full Mortise, Standard Weight, 5-Knuckle, 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" High/Average Frequency Trim 2 Schlage 07 Lever (Athens)626 Satin Chrome Trim 2 Schlage B Wrought Rose 626 Satin Chrome 2 9/16" Diameter Rose Lockset 1 Schlage L9050-F04 626 Satin Chrome Office (Latchbolt) Lock - Single outside cylinder controls latchbolt, interior always open Strike Plate 1 Schlage 10-072 626 Satin Chrome Standard Lip Dustbox 1 Schlage Black Comes standard with 10-072 Strike Plate Door Stop 1 Rockwood 406 US 32D/630 Satin Stainless Steel Convex Wall BumperSilencers3Trimco1229BGrey Hardware Set No.13 Single Office/Storage Doors: 003, 018, 019, 024, 030, 108, 109, 113 Item Qty.Basis of Design Product Finish Hinges 3 Stanley F179 (- NRP)US 26D/630 Satin Chrome Full Mortise, Standard Weight, 5-Knuckle, 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" High/Average Frequency - Non Removable Pin (Outswing) Trim 2 Schlage 07 Lever (Athens)626 Satin Chrome Trim 2 Schlage B Wrought Rose 626 Satin Chrome 2 9/16" Diameter Rose Lockset 1 Schlage LV9456 626 Satin Chrome Corridor (Deadbolt) Function - Single outside cylinder controls deadbolt, interior always open, vandal resisant Door Stop 1 Rockwood 406 US 32D/630 Satin Stainless Steel Convex Wall Bumper Strike Plate 1 Schlage 10-091 Stainless Steel Armored Front Strike Plate Silencers 3 Trimco 1229A GreyGasketing1PemkoBlack Office Doors Only (Sound) Hardware Set No.14 Single Retail Door: 029B DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE 087101-3 Zehren and Associates, Inc. 20112145.07 Vail Clubhouse 7/13/2015 Item Qty.Basis of Design Product Finish Hinges 3 Stanley F179 US 26D/630 Satin Chrome Full Mortise, Standard Weight, 5-Knuckle, 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" High/Average Frequency Trim 2 Schlage 07 Lever (Athens)626 Satin Chrome Trim 2 Schlage B Wrought Rose 626 Satin Chrome 2 9/16" Diameter Rose Lockset 1 Schlage LV9466 626 Satin Chrome Store/Utility (Deadbolt) Function - Double cylinder controls deadbolt, Latchbolt controlled by lever each side. Door Stop 1 Rockwood 406 US 32D/630 Satin Stainless Steel Convex Wall BumperStrike Plate 1 Schlage 10-091 Stainless Steel Armored Front Strike PlateSilencers3Trimco1229AGrey Hardware Set No.15 Doors: Banquet Entry Doors: 102B, 102C Item Qty.Basis of Design Product Finish Hinges 8 Stanley CB199 US 26D/630 Satin Chrome Full Mortise, Heavy Weight, 5-Knuckle, 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" Trim 4 Schlage 07 Lever (Athens)626 Satin Chrome Trim 4 Schlage B Wrought Rose 626 Satin Chrome 2 9/16" Diameter Rose Lockset 2 Schlage L0172 626 Satin Chrome Dummy Hardware Lockset 1 Schlage L464 626 Satin Chrome One Sided Deadbolt - Key Cylinder 118 Side - Each Door Strike 1 Schlage 10-079 Stainless Steel Standard Strike Strike Box 1 Schlage K510-053 Standard Strike BoxMetal Protective Trim Units (Kick)2 Rockwood K1062 CSK, B4E US 32D/630 Satin Stainless Steel Interior Flush Bolt-Top -South Door 1 Rockwood 550 Extension Flush Bolt US26D Satin Chromium 48" rod Flush Bolt-Bottom -South Door 1 Rockwood 550 Extension Flush Bolt US26D Satin Chromium Standard 12" rod Dust Strike 1 Rockwood 570 Bottom Bolt Closer 2 DORMA 8916 -- S-DST MJ FMC US 32D/630 Satin Stainless Steel Confirm ADA Compatibility with Door Size and Weight, 90 Degree Hold Open, Thumbturn Door Gasket -Center Astragal 2 Pemko 369DP Dark Aluminum/Black Pile Mortise Application Each Side Door Stop 2 Rockwood 470 US26D Satin Chromium Floor Mount Door Hold-Open 2 Rockwood 495 US26D Satin Chromium Spring Loaded Kick down stop Silencers 2 Trimco 1229B Grey Gasketing 1 Pemko Black Doors (Sound) Hardware Set No.16Double Storage Doors: 005, 006, 010Item Qty.Basis of Design Product Finish Comments Hinges 6 Stanley F179 US 26D/630 Satin Chrome Full Mortise, Standard Weight, 5-Knuckle, 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" High/Average Frequency Trim 2 Schlage 07 Lever (Athens)626 Satin Chrome Trim 4 Schlage B Wrought Rose 626 Satin Chrome 2 9/16" Diameter Rose Lockset 1 Schlage L9050-F04 626 Satin Chrome Office (Latchbolt) Lock - Single outside cylinder controls latchbolt, interior always open Strike Plate 1 Schlage 10-072 626 Satin Chrome Standard Lip Dustbox 1 Schlage Black Comes standard with 10-072 Strike Plate Surface Bolt 2 Rockwood 528-8 US32D/630 Satin Stainless Steel Top and Bottom - Inactive Leaf Silencers 2 Trimco 1229B Grey Hardware Set No.17Single Doors: 04.1 Item Qty.Basis of Design Product Finish Hinges 3 Stanley F179 (- NRP)US 26D/630 Satin Chrome Full Mortise, Standard Weight, 5-Knuckle, 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" High/Average Frequency - Non Removable Pin (Outswing) Trim 2 Schlage 07 Lever (Athens)626 Satin Chrome Trim 2 Schlage B Wrought Rose 626 Satin Chrome 2 9/16" Diameter Rose Lockset 1 Schlage LV9456 626 Satin Chrome Corridor (Deadbolt) Function - Single outside cylinder controls deadbolt, interior always open, vandal resisant Surface Closer 1 DORMA TS 9315 STH US 32D/630 Satin Stainless Steel ADA, Pull Side, Door Mount, Hold Open, Spring Stop, Cushion Stop Door Stop 1 Rockwood 406 US 32D/630 Satin Stainless Steel Convex Wall Bumper Strike Plate 1 Schlage 10-091 Stainless Steel Armored Front Strike Plate Silencers 3 Trimco 1229A Grey Gasketing 1 Pemko Black Office Doors Only (Sound) Hardware Set No.18Double Guest Doors: 004, 014A-A, 026A Item Qty.Basis of Design Product Finish Comments Hinges 6 Stanley F179 US 26D/630 Satin Chrome Full Mortise, Standard Weight, 5-Knuckle, 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" High/Average Frequency Trim 2 Schlage 07 Lever (Athens)626 Satin Chrome Trim 4 Schlage B Wrought Rose 626 Satin Chrome 2 9/16" Diameter Rose Lockset 1 Schlage L9050-F04 626 Satin Chrome Office (Latchbolt) Lock - Single outside cylinder controls latchbolt, interior always open Strike Plate 1 Schlage 10-072 626 Satin Chrome Standard Lip Dustbox 1 Schlage Black Comes standard with 10-072 Strike Plate Surface Bolt 2 Rockwood 528-8 US32D/630 Satin Stainless Steel Top and Bottom - Inactive Leaf Door Hold-Open 2 Rockwood 495 US26D Satin Chromium Spring Loaded Kick down stop Silencers 2 Trimco 1229B Grey Hardware Set No.18Kitchen Pocket Door: 106A Item Qty.Basis of Design Product Finish Comments Track/Hardware 1 Hufcore Type 57 Standard Single Flush Steel Door (Panel) DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE 087101-4 Zehren and Associates, Inc. 20112145.07 Vail Clubhouse 7/13/2015 Lockset 1 Schlage L464 Stainless Steel Lock to Floor DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE 087101-5 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 GLAZING 088000 - 1 SECTION 088000 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Glass for storefront framing. 2. Glazing sealants and accessories. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches square. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 GLAZING 088000 - 2 insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS 1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined according to the International Building Code and ASTM E 1300. 1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within individual glass lites. B. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II. C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. 2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 3. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300. 2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: "Glazing Manual." 2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 GLAZING 088000 - 3 jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC. D. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum to be coordinated with the storefront framing system. Provide glass that complies with performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated. 2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3. B. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3. C. Heat-Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I, Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3. D. Pyrolytic-Coated, Low-Maintenance Glass: Clear float glass with a coating on first surface having both photocatalytic and hydrophilic properties that act to loosen dirt and to cause water to sheet evenly over the glass instead of beading. 1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2.5 LAMINATED GLASS A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation. 1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer, ionomeric polymer interlayer or cast-in-place and cured-transparent-resin interlayer to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with requirements. 3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 INSULATING GLASS A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190. 1. Sealing System: Dual seals. 2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. 3. Capillary Tubes: Manufacturer’s standard capillary tube for high altitude installations. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 GLAZING 088000 - 4 2.7 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: 1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT. 1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2.8 GLAZING TAPES A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. B. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. C. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. D. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 GLAZING 088000 - 5 E. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance. C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. 3.2 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 GLAZING 088000 - 6 F. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.3 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains. 1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings. C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period. 3.5 INSULATING GLASS SCHEDULE A. Glass Type GL-1: Pyrolytic-coated, self-cleaning, low-maintenance, low-E coated, clear insulating glass. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Cardinal Glass Industries; Neat LoE, Pilkington North America Inc.; Activ Energy Advantage or Saint-Gobain Corporation; Bioclean Cool-Lite. 2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 3. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 5 mm. 4. Outdoor Lite: Pyrolytic-coated, self-cleaning, low-maintenance, clear annealed float glass. 5. Interspace Content: Air. 6. Indoor Lite: Annealed float glass. 7. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic or sputtered on third surface. END OF SECTION 088000 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1 SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For firestop tracks, from ICC-ES. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs and runners. 1. Steel Studs and Runners: a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch (0.68 mm). b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Dimpled Steel Studs and Runners: a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.025 inch (0.64 mm). Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 2 b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. c. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1) Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. 2) MBA Building Supplies; FlatSteel Deflection Track or Slotted Deflecto Track. 3) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD or VertiTrack VTD Series. 4) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT). 5) Telling Industries; Vertical Slip Track or Vertical Slip Track II. C. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch (0.68 mm). D. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges. 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.72-mm-) thick, galvanized steel. E. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch (0.45 mm). 2. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). F. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped. G. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges. 1. Depth: 3/4 inch (19 mm). 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum uncoated-steel thickness of 0.033 inch (0.8 mm). 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59- mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire. H. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm), wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22 mm), minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.018 inch (0.45 mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 3 B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch (4.12 mm) in diameter. C. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch (25 by 5 mm) by length indicated. D. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.053 inch (1.34 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges. 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). E. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Grid System. c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following: 1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated. 2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel stud size. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 4 structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. Multilayer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. D. Direct Furring: 1. Screw to wood framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. E. Z-Furring Members: 1. Erect insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches (610 mm)o.c. 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches (305 mm) from corner and cut insulation to fit. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 5 F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Hangers: 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c. 3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 5. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. END OF SECTION 092216 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 1 SECTION 092400 - CEMENT PLASTERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior vertical plasterwork (stucco). 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and installation of control and expansion joints, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of factory-prepared finish coat and for each color and texture specified, 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm), and prepared on rigid backing. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups for each substrate and finish texture indicated for cement plastering, including accessories. a. Size: 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) in surface area. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover, and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 2 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements. B. Exterior Plasterwork: 1. Apply and cure plaster to prevent plaster drying out during curing period. Use procedures required by climatic conditions, including moist curing, providing coverings, and providing barriers to deflect sunlight and wind. 2. Apply plaster when ambient temperature is greater than 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). 3. Protect plaster coats from freezing for not less than 48 hours after set of plaster coat has occurred. C. Factory-Prepared Finishes: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for environmental conditions for applying finishes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL LATH A. Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C 847, cold-rolled carbon-steel sheet with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized-zinc coating. 1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Diamond-Mesh Lath: Self-furring, 3.4 lb/sq. yd. (1.8 kg/sq. m). B. Paper Backing: FS UU-B-790a, Type I, Grade D, Style 2 vapor-permeable paper. 1. Provide paper-backed lath at exterior locations. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063, and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required. B. Metal Accessories: 1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Foundation Weep Screed: Fabricated from hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) zinc coating. 3. Cornerite: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized-zinc coating. 4. External- (Outside-) Corner Reinforcement: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized-zinc coating. 5. Cornerbeads: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel. a. Smallnose cornerbead with expanded flanges; use unless otherwise indicated. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 3 6. Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; square-edged style; with expanded flanges. 7. Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel, one-piece-type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories. B. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch (13 mm) long, free of contaminants, manufactured for use in cement plaster. C. Bonding Compound: ASTM C 932. D. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: ASTM C 1063. E. Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, not less than 0.0475-inch (1.21- mm) diameter unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 PLASTER MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I. 1. Color for Finish Coats: Gray. B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91, Type N. 1. Color for Finish Coats: Gray. C. Plastic Cement: ASTM C 1328. D. Colorants for Job-Mixed Finish Coats: Colorfast mineral pigments that produce finish plaster color to match Architect's sample. E. Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; or ASTM C 207, Type S. F. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897. 1. Color for Job-Mixed Finish Coats: In color matching Architect's sample. G. Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings: Factory-mixed acrylic-emulsion coating systems formulated with colorfast mineral pigments and fine aggregates; for use over cement plaster base coats. Include manufacturer's recommended primers and sealing topcoats for acrylic-based finishes. 1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 4 2.5 PLASTER MIXES A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated. 1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least two minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in mixes, but do not exceed 1 lb of fiber/cu. yd. (0.6 kg of fiber/cu. m) of cementitious materials. B. Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat plasterwork as follows: 1. Portland Cement Mixes: a. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1- 1/2 parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material. b. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1- 1/2 parts lime. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material, but not less than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat. C. Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Concrete: Single base (scratch) coat for two-coat plasterwork on low-absorption plaster bases as follows: 1. Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 0 to 3/4 part lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material. 2. Portland and Masonry Cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 1 part masonry cement. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material. 3. Plastic Cement Mix: Use 1 part plastic cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate. D. Factory-Prepared Finish-Coat Mixes: For acrylic-based finish coatings, comply with manufacturer's written instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects caused by plastering. B. Prepare smooth, solid substrates for plaster according to ASTM C 926. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 5 3.3 INSTALLING METAL LATH A. Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063. 1. Partition Framing and Vertical Furring: Install flat-diamond-mesh lath. 2. On Solid Surfaces, Not Otherwise Furred: Install self-furring, diamond-mesh lath. 3.4 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings. B. Reinforcement for External (Outside) Corners: 1. Install lath-type, external-corner reinforcement at exterior locations. 2. Install cornerbead at interior locations. C. Control Joints: Locate as approved by Architect for visual effect and as follows: 1. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) of the following maximum sizes: a. Vertical Surfaces: 144 sq. ft. (13.4 sq. m). 2. At distances between control joints of not greater than 18 feet (5.5 m) o.c. 3. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) with length-to-width ratios of not greater than 2-1/2:1. 4. Where control joints occur in surface of construction directly behind plaster. 5. Where plasterwork areas change dimensions, to delineate rectangular-shaped areas (panels) and to relieve the stress that occurs at the corner formed by the dimension change. 3.5 PLASTER APPLICATION A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926. 1. Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m) from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces when measured by a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge placed on surface. 2. Finish plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster ground unless otherwise indicated. Where casing bead does not terminate plaster at metal frame, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove finish coat at junctures with metal. 3. Provide plaster surfaces that are ready to receive field-applied finishes indicated. B. Bonding Compound: Apply on concrete substrates for direct application of plaster. C. Walls; Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: For scratch and brown coats, for three-coat plasterwork with 3/4-inch (19-mm) total thickness, as follows: 1. Portland cement mixes. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 6 D. Plaster Finish Coats: Apply to provide float finish to match Architect's sample. E. Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings: Apply coating system, including primers, finish coats, and sealing topcoats, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.6 PLASTER REPAIRS A. Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed. 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work after plastering is complete. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces not indicated to be plastered. Repair floors, walls, and other surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during plastering. END OF SECTION 092400 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1 SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels. 3. Fire Resistant Backing Panels behind Foodservice Equipment. 4. Texture finishes. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 09 Section "Tiling" for cementitious backer units installed as substrates for ceramic tile. 2. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels. 3. Section 093013 "Ceramic Tiling" for cementitious backer units installed as substrates for ceramic tile. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For the following products: 1. Textured Finishes: 36 inch long by 36 inch wide for each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Install mockups for the following: a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations. b. Each texture finish indicated. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 2 2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups. 3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 3 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. American Gypsum. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 4. Lafarge North America Inc. 5. National Gypsum Company. 6. PABCO Gypsum. 7. Temple-Inland. 8. USG Corporation. B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling. C. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered. D. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Core: As indicated. 4. Long Edges: Tapered. 5. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10. 2.4 TILE OR STONE BACKING PANELS A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. C-Cure; C-Cure Board 990. b. CertainTeed Corp.; FiberCement BackerBoard. c. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. d. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer. e. James Hardie Building Products, Inc.; Hardiebacker 500. f. National Gypsum Company, Permabase Cement Board. g. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board. 2. Thickness: As indicated. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 4 B. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Gypsum. b. CertainTeed Corp. c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. d. Lafarge North America Inc. e. PABCO Gypsum. f. Temple-Inland. g. USG Corporation. 2. Core: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Thickness: As indicated. 4. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10. 2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. 2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Tile or Stone Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 5 a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer. 2. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer. 3. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting- type, sandable topping compound. 2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. D. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b. Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC. c. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR or AIS-919. d. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. e. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation." F. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation." Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant. G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 7 I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Wallboard Type: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type X: As indicated on Drawings where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 4. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings including behind all areas indicated to receive Tile and FRP sanitary panels. 5. Cementitious Backer Units: Applied to Metal Studs as indicated on Drawings including behind all areas indicated to receive Foodservice (Cooking) Equipment. B. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, and underside of structure apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. 3.4 APPLYING EXTERIOR GYPSUM PANELS FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS A. Apply panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports. 1. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) open space where panels abut other construction or structural penetrations. 2. Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws. 3.5 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at locations indicated. B. Water-Resistant Backing Board: Install at locations indicated to receive tile with 1/4-inch (6.4- mm) gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 8 C. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces. 3.6 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 2. Bullnose Bead: Use where indicated. 3. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 4. L-Bead: Use where indicated. 3.7 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: At all back of house panel surfaces that are substrate for tile, stone, plywood backing or FRP Sanitary Panels. At back of house mechanical, electrical 3. Level 3: At all back of house panel surfaces scheduled to receive orange peel texture unless otherwise noted. 4. Level 4: At all front of house panel surfaces scheduled to receive wall coverings unless otherwise noted. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections. 5. Level 5: At all front of house (public) panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. E. Glass-Mat Faced Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 9 3.8 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth. B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture matching approved mockup and free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns. C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture-finish manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.9 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 092900 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 1 SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Warranty B. Product Data: For each type of product. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches (150 mm) in size. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color finishes. E. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch- (150-mm-) square corner Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Exposed Suspension-System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 6-inch- (150-mm-) long Samples of each type, finish, and color. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached. 3. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 2 c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. B. Warranty: 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Acoustical Panel: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace acoustical panels that fail within the warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to: 1. Acoustical Panels: Sagging and warping. 2. Grid System: Rusting and manufacturer's defects. B. Warranty Period Standard: 1. Acoustical panels and grid systems (with HumiGuard Max performance) supplied by one source manufacturer is fifteen (15) years from date of substantial completion 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of typical ceiling area as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 3 B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class C materials. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL A. Source Limitations: 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel and Suspension System: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer. B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated. C. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type. 1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 4 2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS ACT-1/ACT-2 A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated in Interior Specification Sheets or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 4. Tectum Inc. 5. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation. B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows: C. Thickness: As indicated in a schedule. D. Modular Size: As indicated in a schedule. E. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21. 2.4 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M. 1. High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635/C 635M requirements for "Coating Classification for Severe Environment Performance". B. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper pre-stretched. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.135-inch- (3.5-mm-) diameter wire. C. Hanger Rods or Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint. D. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide; formed with 0.04-inch- (1-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch- (8-mm-) diameter bolts. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 5 2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Interior Specification Sheets or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 4. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation. B. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 (Z90) coating designation; with prefinished 15/16-inch- (24-mm-) wide metal caps on flanges. 1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: butt-edge type. 3. Face Design: Flat, flush. 4. Cap Material: aluminum cold-rolled sheet. 5. Cap Finish: Natural finish for aluminum. C. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners. 1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners unless otherwise indicated. 2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly. 2.6 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: c. Henkel Corporation; OSI Pro-Series SC-175 Acoustical Sound Sealant. d. Pecora Corporation; AIS-919. e. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant. B. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 6 1. Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant. 2. Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 7 appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 6. When framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 7. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends of each member. 8. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. D. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows: a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans. 2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension-system runners and moldings. 3. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having jurisdiction, and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 095113 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SANITARY PANELS 097205 - 1 SECTION 097205 – SANITARY WALL AND CEILING PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior sanitary wall and ceiling panels. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for preparation of wall surfaces. 2. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sealant between adjacent materials. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and flame-resistance characteristics. B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of each wall-covering type. Indicate thickness and dimension of parts, fastening and anchoring methods, detail and location of joints, including joints necessary to accommodate thermal movement. C. Samples for Verification: 1. 3-inch x 5 inch section of wall and ceiling coverings. 2. 6 linear inches of molding and trim. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for wall and ceiling panels. B. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. C. Warranties: Sample of standard warranties Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SANITARY PANELS 097205 - 2 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For wall coverings to include in maintenance manuals. B. Warranties: Manufacturer’s standard warranties with appropriate registrations. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Wall-Covering Materials: For each type, full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain all panel molding and trim materials for each system from the same manufacturer. B. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed FRP system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical wall panels applied with identical adhesives to substrates according to test method indicated below by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows, per ASTM E 84: a. Flame-Spread Index: 200 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockups for each type of wall and ceiling panels on each substrate required indicating typical vertical joint, inside corner, outside corner, base and ceiling interface. 2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Furnish panel manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to and not a limitation of other rights Owner may have under the Contract Documents. 1. Panel Lamination Warranty: One (1) year commencing on Date of Substantial Completion. 2. Finish Warranty: Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP): One (1) year commencing on Date of Substantial Completion. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SANITARY PANELS 097205 - 3 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information. 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Application instructions. 5. Color name and number. 6. VOC content. B. Storage and Protection: Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable ventilated covering. Do not store panels to accumulate water or be in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting or other surface damage. C. Store materials not in use in ventilated packaging on platforms or pallets in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Do not store panels to accumulate water or be in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting or other surface damage Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application of adhesives. 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install panels until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1. Apply adhesives only when ambient temperatures and conditions comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for no less than 48 hours prior to installation 2. Do not apply adhesives in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. B. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time recommended by wall-covering manufacturer for full drying or curing of adhesives. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide panels, adhesives, moldings, and accessories that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SANITARY PANELS 097205 - 4 2.2 PANEL MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated in Interior Specification Sheet or comparable product by one of the following 1. Crane Composites, (Kemlite) 2. Citadel Architectural Products, Inc. 3. Nudo Products, Inc. 2.3 PANEL PRODUCTS A. Interior Wall and Ceiling Panel Systems: .10” (2.5mm) fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP). 1. Height: As necessary for one continuous panel to finished ceiling with no horizontal joints. 2. Width: 48 inches. 3. Finish Material Classification: Class C. 4. Absorption: 0.16% maximum. 5. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Moldings: Manufacturer’s standard non-surface applied, one or two piece vinyl moldings and trim including, but not limited to divider bars (battens), top coves, base coves, outside angles, inside angles and end caps intended to provide a moisture resistant seal at panel joints and ends. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range to match panels. 2. Length: Maximum available to provide continuously sealed joint. B. Mechanical Fasteners: Manufacturer’s standard or recommended non-corroding plastic pin rivets, one-piece nylon rivets, nylon head screws or stainless nails. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range to match panels. C. Adhesives: Mildew-resistant, non-staining, non-flamable adhesive, for use with specific panel and substrate application; as recommended in writing by panel manufacturer. D. Sealants: Manufacturer’s standard or recommended non-flammable silicone sealant as intended for to the indicated substrate. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for levelness, wall plumbness, maximum moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Do not begin to apply panels until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SANITARY PANELS 097205 - 5 2. Start of panel application will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. 3. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over incompatible substrates by others B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with each poduct manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. B. Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation C. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and installation. D. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of wall covering, including dirt, oil, grease, mold, mildew, and incompatible primers. E. Prepare materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Gypsum Board: Prime with primer as recommended in writing by adhesive and panel manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with panel manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated except where more stringent requirements apply. 1. Do not apply adhesives over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable bond 2. Apply panels to all "exposed surfaces" including areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend panels in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 3. Apply panels behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces B. Panels should be set true and plumb with building lines. 1. Maximum deviation from vertical and horizontal alignment of erected panels shall be no more than1/4" in 20'-0" 2. Maximum deviation in panel flatness shall be 0.6% of the assembled units 3. Install joints vertical and plumb at least 6 inches (150 mm) from outside corners and 6 inches (150 mm) from inside corners. 4. No horizontal joints are permitted. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 SANITARY PANELS 097205 - 6 5. Allow for expansion of panels when cutting and fitting panels into molding channels. Allow ¼” minimum expansion within ceiling and base end caps and 1/8” at division bars and corners. C. Install panels with adhesive and mechanical fasteners as recommended by manufacturer to ensure a watertight installation. 1. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions regarding method of application, spread rate, drying time, open time, and temperature and/or humidity limitations Fully bond wall covering to substrate with adhesive. 2. Align and plumb sheets before allowing glue lines to come together. Apply sheet slowly from one side to the other to expel air. Roll uniformly with hard rubber roller Firmly tamp or roll panels in place. 3. Install mechanical fasteners in patterns and with offsets as recommended by manufacturer. D. Install panels with sealant and moldings as recommended by manufacturer to ensure a moisture resistant installation. 1. Apply at all seams, corners and terminations. Install division bars, terminations, and corners with sealants according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Exposed panels edges will not be accepted. Align and plumb all accessories. Trim moldings in longest available length accommodating ceiling and base moldings, minimizing horizontal and vertical joints. 2. Place sealant into channel of each molding before installing. E. Match approved samples and mockups for color, and texture. Remove and replace panels not securely adhered, installed with air pockets, not installed plumb or aligned with walls, floors, ceilings, or other panels. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive and sealant at finished moldings, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. B. Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by panel manufacturer. C. Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. END OF SECTION 097205 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1 SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates including: 1. Steel. 2. Galvanized metal. 3. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated). 4. Concrete floors. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 03 Sections for concrete placement. 2. Division 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section 3. Division 09 Section "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates. 4. Division 09 Section "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for surface preparation and the application of wood stains and transparent finishes on interior wood substrates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. G. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 2 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m). b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 3 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C). B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Behr Process Corporation. 2. Benjamin Moore & Co. 3. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Canada). 4. Bennette Paint Manufacturing Company, Inc. 5. Betonel Ltd. 6. BLP Mobile Paint Manufacturing. 7. California Paints. 8. Cloverdale Paint. 9. Color Wheel Paints & Coatings. 10. Columbia Paint & Coatings. 11. Conco Paints. 12. Coronado Paint. 13. Davis Paint Company. 14. Diamond Vogel Paints. 15. Dunn-Edwards Corporation. 16. Durant Performance Coatings. 17. Duron, Inc. 18. Envirocoatings Canada Inc. 19. Euclid Chemical Company. 20. Farrell-Calhoun. 21. Frazee Paint. 22. General Paint. 23. Hallman Lindsay Paints. 24. Hirshfield's, Inc. 25. ICI Paints. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 4 26. ICI Paints (Canada). 27. Insl-x. 28. Kelly-Moore Paints. 29. Kwal Paint. 30. M.A.B. Paints. 31. McCormick Paints. 32. Microblend Technologies Inc. 33. Miller Paint. 34. Mills Paint. 35. PARA Paints. 36. Parex LaHabra Inc. 37. Parker Paint Mfg. Co. Inc. 38. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 39. Pratt & Lambert. 40. Rodda Paint Co. 41. Scott Paint. 42. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 43. Sico, Inc. 44. Southern Diversified Products, LLC. 45. Smith Paint Products. 46. Vista Paint. 47. Zinsser. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 1. 20 percent of surface area will be painted with deep tones. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 5 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Gypsum Board:12 percent 2. Concrete: 12 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 6 1. Clean surfaces with pressurized water. Use pressure range of 1500 to 4000 psi (10 350 to 27 580 kPa) at 6 to 12 inches (150 to 300 mm). E. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following: 1. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal." F. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces. G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. H. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Steel, Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint all exposed steel. 2. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms: Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 7 a. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. 3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces: 1. Water-Based Clear Sealer System: a. Prime Coat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors, MPI #99. b. Intermediate Coat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors, MPI #99. c. Topcoat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors, MPI #99. B. Steel Substrates: 1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive, for metal, MPI #79 or primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal, MPI #76. b. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Division 05 Section where substrate is specified. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 8 c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #138. C. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #138. D. Aluminum (Not Anodized or Otherwise Coated) Substrates: 1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum, MPI #95. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #138. E. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System at all exposed public gypsum board substrates visible to the general public (Grid D West, Grid 3.75 North): a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, MPI #149. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #143. 2. High-Performance Architectural Latex System at all back of house exposed gypsum board surfaces unless otherwise noted: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #138. END OF SECTION 099123 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 1 SECTION 099300 - STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and application of wood finishes on the following substrates: 1. Exterior Substrates: a. Exposed glued-laminated beams and columns. b. Exposed dimension lumber (rough carpentry). c. Dressed lumber (finish carpentry). d. Exposed wood panel products. 2. Interior Substrates: a. Exposed glued-laminated beams and columns. b. Exposed dimension lumber (rough carpentry). c. Dressed lumber (finish carpentry). d. Exposed wood panel products. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" for standard paint systems on exterior substrates. 2. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for stains and transparent finishes on concrete floors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. C. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. D. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. E. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 2 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. LEED Submittals: C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of finish system and in each color and gloss of finish indicated. 1. Submit Samples on representative samples of actual wood substrates, 8 inches (200 mm) square. 2. Label each Sample for location and application area. E. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to finish system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the product proposed for use highlighted. 3. VOC content. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Stains and Transparent Finishes: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each finish system indicated and each color selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each type of finish system and substrate. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m). b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of stain color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary stain color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional stain colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 3 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply finishes only when temperature of surfaces to be finished and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C). B. Do not apply finishes when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. C. Do not apply exterior finishes in snow, rain, fog, or mist. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS 1. Behr Process Corporation. 2. Benjamin Moore & Co. 3. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Canada). 4. Bennette Paint Mfg. Co., Inc. 5. BLP Mobile Paint Manufacturing. 6. California Paints. 7. Cloverdale Paint. 8. Color Wheel Paints & Coatings. 9. Columbia Paint & Coatings. 10. Conco Paints. 11. Coronado Paint. 12. Davis Paint Company. 13. Diamond Vogel Paints. 14. Dunn-Edwards Corporation. 15. Durant Paints Inc. 16. Duron, Inc. 17. Euclid Chemical Company. 18. Farrell-Calhoun. 19. Frazee Paint. 20. General Paint. 21. Hallman Lindsay Paints. 22. Hirshfield's, Inc. 23. ICI Paints. 24. ICI Paints (Canada). 25. Insl-x. 26. Kelly-Moore Paints. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 4 27. Kwal Paint. 28. Life Paint Corp. 29. M.A.B. Paints. 30. McCormick Paints. 31. Miller Paint. 32. Mills Paint. 33. PARA Paints. 34. Parex LaHabra Inc. 35. Parker Paint Mfg. Co. Inc. 36. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 37. Pratt & Lambert. 38. Rodda Paint Co. 39. SaverSystems. 40. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 41. Sico, Inc. 42. Target Coatings. 43. Vista Paint. 44. Zinsser. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each finish system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a finish system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in finish system and on substrate indicated. C. Stain Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample wood finishing materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying wood finishes if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying materials from Project site, pay for testing, and refinish surfaces finished with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously finished surfaces before refinishing with complying materials if the two Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 5 finishes are incompatible or produce results that, in the opinion of the Architect, are aesthetically unacceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Exterior Wood Substrates: 15 percent, when measured with an electronic moisture meter. C. Maximum Moisture Content of Interior Wood Substrates: 10 percent, when measured with an electronic moisture meter. D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. E. Proceed with finish application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Beginning finish application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and finishing. 1. After completing finishing operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C. Clean and prepare surfaces to be finished according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Remove dust, dirt, oil, and grease by washing with a detergent solution; rinse thoroughly with clean water and allow to dry. Remove grade stamps and pencil marks by sanding lightly. Remove loose wood fibers by brushing. 2. Remove mildew by scrubbing with a commercial wash formulated for mildew removal and as recommended by stain manufacturer. D. Exterior Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 6 a. For solid hide stained wood, stain edges and ends after priming. b. For varnish coated stained wood, stain edges and ends and prime with varnish. Prime undersides and backsides with varnish. 3. Countersink steel nails, if used, and fill with putty or plastic wood filler tinted to final color. Sand smooth when dried. E. Interior Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Apply wood filler paste to open-grain woods, as defined in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual," to produce smooth, glasslike finish. 3. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view and dust off. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply finishes according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for finish and substrate indicated. 2. Finish surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. 3. Do not apply finishes over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. B. Apply finishes to produce surface films without cloudiness, holidays, lap marks, brush marks, runs, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing finish application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered materials by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from finish application. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced finished wood surfaces. 3.5 EXTERIOR WOOD-FINISH-SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Wood substrates, non-traffic surfaces, including wood trim architectural, woodwork, wood siding and wood-based panel products. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 7 1. Semitransparent Stain System: a. Prime Coat: Stain, exterior, solvent based, semi-transparent, matching topcoat. b. Topcoat: Stain, exterior, solvent based, semi-transparent, MPI #13. B. Wood substrates non-traffic surfaces including non-clad doors, glued-laminated construction exposed joists, and exposed beams. 1. Semitransparent Stain System: a. Prime Coat: Stain, exterior, solvent based, semi-transparent, matching topcoat. b. Topcoat: Stain, exterior, solvent based, semi-transparent, MPI #13. 2. Varnish over Semitransparent Stain System: a. Stain Coat: Stain, exterior, solvent based, semi-transparent, MPI #13. b. First Intermediate Coat: Varnish matching topcoat. c. Second Intermediate Coat: Varnish matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Varnish, with UV Inhibitor, Exterior, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #30. 3.6 INTERIOR WOOD-FINISH-SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Wood substrates, non-traffic surfaces, including wood trim, architectural woodwork, doors, windows, wood-based panel products, ceiling and wall siding, exposed joists, and exposed beams. 1. Semitransparent Stain System: a. Prime Coat: Stain, semi-transparent, matching topcoat. b. Topcoat: Stain, semi-transparent, for interior wood, MPI #90. 2. Polyurethane Varnish over Stain System: a. Stain Coat: Stain, semi-transparent, for interior wood, MPI #90. b. First Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane varnish matching topcoat. c. Second Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane varnish matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Varnish, interior, polyurethane, oil-modified, satin (Gloss Level 4), MPI #57. B. Alternate - Wood substrates, non-traffic surfaces, including ceiling and wall siding. 1. Semitransparent Stain System: a. Prime Coat: Stain, semi-transparent, matching topcoat. b. Topcoat: Stain, semi-transparent, for interior wood, MPI #90. 2. Water-Based Varnish over Stain System: a. Stain Coat: Stain, semi-transparent, for interior wood, MPI #90. b. First Intermediate Coat: Water-based varnish matching topcoat. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 8 c. Second Intermediate Coat: Water-based varnish matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Varnish, water based, clear, satin (Gloss Level 4), MPI #128. END OF SECTION 099300 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413 - 1 SECTION 104413 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire protection cabinets for the following: a. Portable fire extinguishers. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguishers." 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire protection cabinets. 1. Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of fire protection cabinet indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Size: 6 by 6 inches (150 by 150 mm) square. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For fire protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413 - 2 B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, and as follows: 1. Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). 2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. D. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick, Class 1 (clear). 2.2 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Fire End & Croker Corporation; 1624SS-DV- Clear Tempered. 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated or pre-approved comparable product by one of the following manufacturers: a. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group;. b. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division, Subsidiary of Kidde plc;. c. Larsen's Manufacturing Company; d. Modern Metal Products, Division of Technico Inc.; e. Moon-American; f. Potter Roemer LLC; g. Watrous Division, American Specialties, Inc.; B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated. C. Cabinet Material: Aluminum sheet. D. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for recessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth to accommodate semirecessed cabinet installation. 1. Square-Edge Trim: 1-1/4- to 1-1/2-inch (32- to 38-mm) backbend depth. 2. Rolled-Edge Trim: 4-inch (102-mm) backbend depth. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413 - 3 E. Cabinet Trim Material: Stainless-steel sheet. F. Door Material: Stainless-steel sheet. G. Door Style: Vertical duo panel with frame. H. Door Glazing: Tempered Float Glass Clear I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. 1. Provide recessed door pull and friction latch. 2. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open 180 degrees. J. Finishes: 1. Stainless Steel: No. 6. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. 1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick. 2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly. D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413 - 4 2.5 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches. 1. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. 2. Dull Satin Finish: No. 6. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed cabinets will be installed. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare recesses for semirecessed fire protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights indicated below: or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.] 1. Fire Protection Cabinets: 54 inches (1372 mm) above finished floor to top of cabinet. B. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. C. On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory- finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413 - 5 E. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 104413 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 1 SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguisher Cabinets." 2. Division 21 Section "Water-Based Fire-Suppression Systems" for hose systems, racks, and valves. 3. Division 23 Section "Commercial-Kitchen Hoods" for fire extinguishing systems provided as part of commercial-kitchen exhaust hoods. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and mounting brackets. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 2 1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. 2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet indicated. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Fire End & Croker Corporation; 4020. 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated or pre-approved comparable product by one of the following manufacturers: a. Amerex Corporation. b. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd. c. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company. d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. e. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. f. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc. g. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. h. Moon-American. i. Pem All Fire Extinguisher Corp.; a division of PEM Systems, Inc. j. Potter Roemer LLC. k. Pyro-Chem; Tyco Safety Products. 3. Valves: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 3 5. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging. B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 20-A:120-B:C, 20-lb (9.1-kg)] nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches (1372 mm) above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher. B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated. END OF SECTION 104416 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 WIRE MESH STORAGE LOCKERS 105143 - 1 SECTION 105143 - WIRE MESH STORAGE LOCKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes wire mesh storage lockers. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Intermediate Crimp: Wires pass over one and under the next adjacent wire in both directions, with wires crimped before weaving and with extra crimps between the intersections. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments. C. Samples: For units with factory-applied color finishes. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For wire mesh storage lockers indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria 1. Include analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Welding certificates. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 WIRE MESH STORAGE LOCKERS 105143 - 2 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver wire mesh storage lockers with cardboard protectors on perimeters of panels and doors and with posts wrapped to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Use vented plastic. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with wire mesh storage lockers by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Wire: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M). B. Steel Plates, Channels, Angles, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Steel Sheet: Cold-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. D. Panel-to-Panel Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard steel bolts, nuts, and washers. E. Post-Installed Anchors: Capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. F. Power-Driven Fasteners: ICC-ES AC70. G. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099123 "Interior Painting." H. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer, complying with MPI#79. 2.3 WIRE MESH STORAGE LOCKERS A. Unit Sizes: 1. Width: Approximately 112 inches. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 WIRE MESH STORAGE LOCKERS 105143 - 3 2. Depth: Approximately 138 inches. 3. Height: Approximately 96 inches (Attach to Blocking in Ceiling). B. Mesh: 0.135-inch- (3.5-mm-) diameter, intermediate-crimp steel wire woven into 1-by-2-inch (25-by-50-mm) rectangular mesh. C. Wall Panels: 1-1/4-by-1-1/4-by-1/8-inch (32-by-32-by-3-mm) steel angle framing on top, bottom, and back sides, and 3-by-1/8-inch (76-by-3-mm) cold-rolled steel flat bar framing on front side, with wire mesh welded to framing. 1. Horizontal Panel Stiffeners: 1-1/4-by-1-1/4-by-1/8-inch (32-by-32-by-3-mm) steel angles or 3/4-by-1/4-inch (19-by-6-mm) hot-rolled steel flat bars. D. Horizontal Dividers/Shelves: Fabricated from same framing as wall panels, with 0.192-inch- (5- mm-) diameter steel wire resistance welded into 1-1/2-by-2-1/2-inch (38-mm-by-63.5-mm) rectangular mesh. E. Doors: Fabricated from same mesh as wall panels, with framing fabricated from 1-1/4-by-1-1/4- by-1/8-inch (32-by-32-by-3-mm) steel angles on four sides with wire mesh welded to framing. Include padlock hasp. 1. Horizontal Stiffeners for Single-Tier Doors: 3/4-by-1/4-inch (19-by-6-mm) steel flat bars. 2. Hinges: Full-surface type, 2-1/2-by-2-1/2-inch (64-by-64-mm) steel, 1-1/2 pairs per door; bolted, riveted, or welded to door and jamb framing. F. Finish for Uncoated Ferrous Steel: Powder-coated finish unless otherwise indicated. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate wire mesh storage lockers from components of sizes not less than those indicated. Use larger size components as recommended by wire mesh manufacturer. Furnish bolts, hardware, and accessories required for complete installation with manufacturer's standard finishes. 1. Fabricate wire mesh storage lockers to be readily disassembled. 2. Welding: Weld corner joints of framing and grind smooth, leaving no evidence of joint. B. Wire Mesh Storage Lockers: Fabricate initial storage locker with front and intermediate dividers as indicated in Drawings. 1. Prehang doors in factory. 2.5 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard baked-on powder-coat finish, suitable for use indicated, with a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm). 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 WIRE MESH STORAGE LOCKERS 105143 - 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine floors for suitable conditions where wire mesh storage lockers will be installed. C. Examine walls to which wire mesh storage lockers will be attached for properly located blocking, grounds, and other solid backing for attachment of support fasteners. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 WIRE MESH STORAGE LOCKERS ERECTION A. Anchor wire mesh storage lockers to floor with 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter expansion anchors at 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. through bottom panel framing. Shim panel framing as required to achieve level and plumb installation. 1. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if indicated on Shop Drawings. B. Anchor wire mesh storage lockers to walls at 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. through back corner panel framing and as follows: 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use expansion anchors. 2. For wood stud partitions, use lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members. C. Attach adjacent wire mesh storage lockers to each other through side panel framing. D. Install doors complete with door hardware. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust doors to operate smoothly and easily without binding or warping. Adjust hardware to function smoothly. Confirm that hasps engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding. B. Remove and replace defective work, including doors and framing that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. END OF SECTION 105143 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400 - 1 SECTION 142400 - HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes hydraulic passenger elevator. 1. Standard pre-engineered hydraulic passenger elevators. 2. Elevator car enclosures, hoistway entrances and signal equipment. 3. Jack. 4. Operation and control systems. 5. Accessibility provisions for physically disabled persons. 6. Equipment, machines, controls, systems and devices as required for safely operating the specified elevators at their rated speed and capacity 7. Materials and accessories as required to complete the elevator installation. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary use of elevators for construction purposes. 2. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in concrete. 3. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for the following: a. Attachment plates, angle brackets, and other preparation of structural steel for fastening guide-rail brackets. b. Hoist beams. c. Structural-steel shapes for subsills that are part of steel frame. 4. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for the following: a. Attachment plates and angle brackets for supporting guide-rail brackets. b. Hoist beams. c. Structural-steel shapes for subsills. d. Pit ladders. 5. Division 9 Finishes: Providing elevator car finish flooring and field painting unfinished and shop primed ferrous materials a. Interior Design Drawings and Specifications for finish flooring in elevator cars. 6. Section 142404 "Hydraulic Wheelchair Lifts" for hydraulic wheelchair lifts generally inaccessible to the public. 7. Section 221429 "Sump Pumps" for sump pumps, sumps, and sump covers in elevator pits. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400 - 2 8. Division 22 Plumbing for oil interceptors, sump pumps, sumps, and sump covers in elevator pits. 9. Division 28 Electrical Sections: a. Providing electrical service to elevators. (note: fused disconnect switch to be provided as part of elevator manufacture product, see section 2.11 Miscellaneous elevator components for further details.) b. Emergency power supply, transfer switch and auxiliary contacts. c. For car light and fan feeder and branch wiring circuits to elevator control cabinet; d. For light fixture (200 lx / 19 fc) and convenience outlet in pit with switch located adjacent to the access door; e. For light fixture (200 lx / 19 fc), and convenience outlet in the hoistway at the landing where the elevator controller is located; f. For signal systems and power operated door ground and branch wiring circuits. 10. Division 27 for telephone service for elevators. 11. Division 28 for smoke detectors to initiate emergency recall operation and heat detectors in shafts to disconnect power from elevator equipment before sprinkler activation and for connection to elevator controllers. C. Work Not Included By Elevator Subcontractor: General contractor shall provide the following in accordance with the requirements of the Model Building Code and ANSI A17.1 Code. For specific rules, refer to ANSI A17.1, Section 300 for hydraulic elevators. State or local requirements must be used if more stringent. 1. Elevator hoist beam to be provided at top of elevator shaft. Beam must be able to accommodate proper loads and clearances for elevator installation and operation. 2. Supply in ample time for installation by other trades, inserts, anchors, bearing plates, brackets, supports and bracing including all setting templates and diagrams for placement. 3. Hoistway should be clear and plumb with variations not to exceed 1/2'' at any point. 4. Install bevel guards at 75° on all recesses, projections or setbacks over 2'' (4'' for A17.1 2000 areas) except for loading or unloading. 5. Provide rail bracket supports at pit, each floor and roof. 6. Pit floor shall be level and free of debris. Reinforce dry pit to sustain normal vertical forces from rails and buffers. 7. Where pit access is by means of the lowest hoistway entrance, a vertical ladder of non- combustible material extending 42'' minimum, (48'' minimum for A17.1-2000 areas) shall be provided at the same height, above sill of access door or handgrips. 8. All wire and conduit should run remote from the hoistways. 9. When heat, smoke or combustion sensing devices are required, connect to elevator control cabinet terminals. Contacts on the sensors should be sided for 12 volt D.C. 10. Install and furnish finished flooring in elevator cab. 11. Finished floors and entrance walls are not to be constructed until after sills and door frames are in place. Consult elevator contractor for rough opening size. The general contractor shall supply the drywall framing. 12. Where sheet rock or drywall construction is used for front walls, it shall be of sufficient strength to maintain the doors in true lateral alignment. Drywall contractor to coordinate with elevator contractor. 13. Before erection of rough walls and doors; erect hoistway sills, headers, and frames. After rough walls are finished; erect fascias and toe guards. Set sill level and slightly above finished floor at landings. 14. Locate a light fixture (200 lx / 19 fc) and convenience outlet in pit with switch located adjacent to the access door. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400 - 3 15. Provide telephone line, light fixture (200 lx / 19 fc), and convenience outlet in the hoistway at the landing where the elevator controller is located. Typically this will be at the landing above the 1st floor. Final location must be coordinated with elevator contractor. 16. As indicated by elevator contractor, provide a light outlet for each elevator, in center of hoistway. 17. For signal systems and power operated door: provide ground and branch wiring circuits. 18. For car light and fan: provide a feeder and branch wiring circuits to elevator control cabinet. 19. Controller landing wall thickness must be a minimum of 8 inches thick. This is due to the controller being mounted on the second floor landing in the door frame on the return side of the door. For center opening doors, the controller is located on the right hand frame (from inside the elevator cab looking out). These requirements must be coordinated between the general contractor and the elevator contractor. 20. Cutting, patching and recesses to accommodate hall button boxes, signal fixtures, etc. 21. Lockable three phase circuit breaker with auxiliary contact with shunt trip capability to be provided. Circuit breaker to be located behind locked panel (Group 2 security access) at controller landing entrance jamb and should be sized according to the National Electrical Code. 22. Lockable single phase 110V circuit breaker for cab light and fan to be provided. Circuit breaker to be located behind locked panel (Group 2 security access) at controller landing entrance jamb should be sized according to the National Electrical Code. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions in ASME A17.1/CSA B44 apply to work of this Section. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes, and similar information. Include product data for car enclosures, hoistway entrances, and operation, control, and signal systems. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at each landing, pit, hoistway, machine room layout, coordination with building structure, relationships with other construction, and locations of equipment. 2. Show floors served, travel distances, and including overhead and pit clearances. 3. Include large-scale layout of car-control station and standby power operation control panel. 4. Indicate elevator system capacities, sizes, performances, safety features, finishes and other pertinent information. 5. Indicate maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of support, and maximum and average power demands. 6. Indicate electrical power requirements and branch circuit protection device recommendations. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400 - 4 C. Samples for Verification: For exposed car, hoistway door and frame, and signal equipment finishes; 3-inch- (75-mm-) square Samples of sheet materials; and 4-inch (100-mm) lengths of running trim members. D. Operation and maintenance data. Include the following: 1. Owners Manual and Wiring Diagrams. 2. Parts list, with recommended parts inventory. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway, pit, and layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical service, as shown and specified, are adequate for elevator system being provided. C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For elevators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include diagnostic and repair information available to manufacturer's and Installer's maintenance personnel. B. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use. C. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Submit a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard two-year and five-year maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options. 1. Furnish maintenance and call back service for a period of 12 months for each elevator after completion of installation or acceptance thereof by beneficial use, whichever is earlier, during normal working hours, excluding callbacks. Service shall consist of periodic examination of the equipment, adjustment, lubrication, cleaning, supplies and parts to keep the elevators in proper operation. a. Manufacturer shall have a service office and full time service personnel within a 100 mile radius of the project site. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements 1. ASME/ANSI A17.1 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, latest edition or as required by the local building code. 2. Building Code: National. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400 - 5 3. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code. 4. Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) B. Manufacturer Qualifications: An approved manufacturer with minimum fifteen years experience in manufacturing, installing, and servicing commercial elevators. 1. Must be the manufacturer of the power unit, controller, signal fixtures, door operators cab, entrances, and all other major parts of the elevator operating equipment. 2. ISO-9001:2000 Manufacturer Certified 3. ISO-14001:2004 Environmental Management System Certified. C. Installer Qualifications: Elevator manufacturer or an authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer with not less than fifteen years of satisfactory experience installing elevators equal in character and performance to the project elevators. D. Inspection and testing: Elevator Installer shall obtain and pay for all required inspections, tests, permits and fees for elevator installation. 1. Arrange for inspections and make required tests. 2. Deliver to the Owner upon completion and acceptance of elevator work. E. Product Qualifications: 1. LCA data must be compatible with GaBI Software. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle materials, components and equipment in manufacturer's protective packaging. Store materials, components, and equipment off of ground, under cover, and in a dry location. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Prohibited Use: Elevators shall not be used for temporary service or for any other purpose during the construction period before Substantial Completion and acceptance by the purchaser unless agreed upon by Elevator Contractor and General Contractor with signed temporary agreement. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of sleeves, block outs, elevator equipment with integral anchors, and other items that are embedded in concrete or masonry for elevator equipment. Furnish templates, sleeves, elevator equipment with integral anchors, and installation instructions and deliver to Project site in time for installation. B. Coordinate locations and dimensions of other work relating to hydraulic elevators including pit ladders; sumps and floor drains in pits; entrance subsills; electrical service; and electrical outlets, lights, and switches in hoistways, pits, and/or machine rooms. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400 - 6 1.11 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair, restore, or replace elevator work that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, operation or control system failure, including excessive malfunctions; performances below specified ratings; excessive wear; unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes; unsafe conditions; need for excessive maintenance; abnormal noise or vibration; and similar unusual, unexpected, and unsatisfactory conditions. 2. Warranty Period: 1 year from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain elevator components from single manufacturer. 1. Major elevator components, including pump-and-tank units, plunger-cylinder assemblies, controllers, signal fixtures, door operators, car frames, cars, and entrances, shall be manufactured by single manufacturer. 2. Basis of Design: endura MRL, ThyssenKrupp Elevator. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44. B. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with Section 407 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC A117.1. C. Seismic Performance: Elevator system shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 and shall comply with elevator safety requirements for seismic risk Zone 2 or greater in ASME A17.1/CSA B44. 1. The term "withstand" means "the system will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified." 2. Affected peak velocity acceleration (Av) for Project's location is less than 0.10 (seismic risk Zones 0 and 1). 3. Provide earthquake equipment required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44. 2.3 ELEVATORS A. Elevator System, General: Manufacturer's standard elevator systems. Unless otherwise indicated, manufacturers' standard components shall be used, as included in standard elevator systems and as required for complete system. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400 - 7 B. Elevator Description: 1. Elevator Number: Elevator 1. 2. Type: Holeless, beside-the-car, one-stage. 3. Rated Load: 2500 lb (1135 kg). 4. Rated Speed: 75 or 80 fpm (0.38 or 0.41 m/s). 5. Operation System: Single automatic. 6. Auxiliary Operations: a. Battery-powered lowering. 7. Dual Car-Control Stations: Provide two car-control stations; equip only one with required keyswitches, if any. 8. Car Top Inspection: Provide a car top inspection station with an “Auto-Inspection” switch, an "emergency stop" switch, and constant pressure "up and down" direction and safety buttons to make the normal operating devices inoperative. The station will give the inspector complete control of the elevator. The car top inspection station shall be mounted in the door operator assembly. 9. Car Enclosures: a. Inside Width: 80 inches from side wall to side wall. b. Inside Depth: 51 1/2 inches from back wall to front wall (return panels). c. Inside Height: 88 inches to underside of ceiling. d. Front Walls (Return Panels): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish with integral car door frames. e. Car Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. f. Side and Rear Wall Panels: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. g. Reveals: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. h. Door Faces (Interior): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. i. Door Sills: Aluminum, mill finish. j. Ceiling: Downlight type, metal pans with suspended LED downlights. k. Handrails: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) round satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish of car. l. Floor prepared to receive resilient flooring. m. Floor Thickness, Including Setting Materials: ¼” above plywood subfloor. 10. Hoistway Entrances: a. Width: 42 inches (1067 mm). b. Height: 84 inches (2134 mm). c. Type: Single-speed center opening. d. Frames: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. e. Doors: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. f. Sills: Aluminum, mill finish. 11. Hall Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. 12. Additional Requirements: a. Provide inspection certificate in each car, mounted under acrylic cover with frame made from satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. b. Provide hooks for protective pads and two complete set(s) of full-height protective pads. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400 - 8 2.4 HOISTWAY EQUIPMENT A. Platform: Fabricated frame of formed or structural steel shapes, gusseted and rigidly welded with a wood subfloor. Underside of the platform shall be fireproofed. The car platform shall be designed and fabricated to support one-piece loads weighing up to 25% of the rated capacity. B. Sling: Steel stiles affixed to a steel crosshead and bolstered with bracing members to remove strain from the car enclosure. C. Guide Rails: Steel, omega shaped, fastened to the building structure with steel brackets D. Guide Shoes: Slide guides shall be mounted on top and bottom of the car. E. Buffers: Provide substantial buffers in the elevator pit. Mount buffers on a steel template that is fastened to the pit floor. Provide extensions if required by project conditions. F. Jack: Jack unit shall be of sufficient size to lift the gross load the height specified. Factory test jack to insure adequate strength and freedom from leakage. Brittle material, such as gray cast iron, is prohibited in the jack construction. Provide the following jack type: Twin post holeless. Two jacks piped together, mounted one on each side of the car with a polished steel hydraulic plunger housed in a sealed steel casing having sufficient clearance space to allow for alignment during installation. Each plunger shall have a high pressure sealing system which will not allow for seal movement or displacement during the course of operation. Each Jack Assembly shall have a check valve built into the assembly to allow for automatically re-syncing the two plunger sections by moving the jack to its fully contracted position. The jack shall be designed to be mounted on the pit floor or in a recess in the pit floor. Each jack section shall have a bleeder valve to discharge any air trapped in the section. G. Automatic Self-Leveling: Provide each elevator car with a self-leveling feature to automatically bring the car to the landings and correct for overtravel or undertravel. Self-leveling shall, within its zone, be automatic and independent of the operating device. The car shall be maintained approximately level with the landing irrespective of its load. H. Wiring, Piping, and Oil: Provide all necessary hoistway wiring in accordance with the National Electrical Code. All necessary code compliant pipe and fittings shall be provided to connect the power unit to the jack unit. Provide proper grade readily biodegradable oil as specified by the manufacturer of the power unit. I. Pit moisture/water sensor located approximately 1 foot above the pit floor to be provided. Once activated, elevator will perform “flooded pit operation”, which will run the car up to the designated floor, cycle the doors and shut down and trip the circuit breaker shunt to remove 3 phase power from all equipment, including pit equipment. J. Motorized oil line shut-off valve shall be provided that can be remotely operated from the controller landing service panel. Also a means for manual operation at the valve in the pit is required. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400 - 9 2.5 POWER UNIT A. Pump Units: Positive displacement type pump specifically manufactured for oil-hydraulic elevator service. Pump shall be designed for steady discharge with minimum pulsation to give smooth and quiet operation. Output of pump shall not vary more than 10 percent between no load and full load on the elevator car. 1. Pump shall be submersible type with submersible squirrel-cage induction motor, and shall be suspended inside oil tank from vibration isolation mounts or shall be tank-top- mounted type with fan-cooled, squirrel-cage induction motor, and shall be mounted on oil tank with vibration isolation mounts and enclosed in prime-painted steel enclosure lined with 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, glass-fiber insulation board. 2. Motor shall have solid-state starting. 3. Motor shall have variable-voltage, variable-frequency control 4. Motor: Standard manufacture motor specifically designed for oil-hydraulic elevator service. Duty rating – motors shall be capable of 80 starts per hour with a 30% motor run time during each start. B. Power Unit (Oil Pumping and Control Mechanism): A self-contained unit located in the elevator pit consisting of the following items: 1. NEMA 4/Sealed Oil reservoir with tank cover including vapor removing tank breather 2. An oil hydraulic pump 3. An electric motor 4. Electronic oil control valve with the following components built into single housing; high pressure relief valve, check valve, automatic unloading up start valve, lowering and leveling valve, and electro-magnetic controlling solenoids. C. Oil Control Unit: The following components shall be built into a single housing. Welded manifolds with separate valves to accomplish each function are not acceptable. Adjustments shall be accessible and be made without removing the assembly from the oil line. 1. Relief valve shall be adjustable and be capable of bypassing the total oil flow without increasing back pressure more than 10 percent above that required to barely open the valve. 2. Up start and stop valve shall be adjustable and designed to bypass oil flow during start and stop of motor pump assembly. Valve shall close slowly, gradually diverting oil to or from the jack unit, ensuring smooth up starts and up stops. 3. Check valve shall be designed to close quietly without permitting any perceptible reverse flow. 4. Lowering valve and leveling valve shall be adjustable for down start speed, lowering speed, leveling speed and stopping speed to ensure smooth "down" starts and stops. The leveling valve shall be designed to level the car to the floor in the direction the car is traveling after slowdown is initiated. 5. Provided with constant speed regulation in both up and down direction. Feature to compensate for load changes, oil temperature, and viscosity changes. D. Hydraulic Silencers: System shall have hydraulic silencer containing pulsation-absorbing material in blowout-proof housing at pump unit. E. Piping: Size, type, and weight of piping as recommended by elevator manufacturer, with flexible connectors to minimize sound and vibration transmissions from power unit. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400 - 10 F. Hydraulic Fluid: Nontoxic, biodegradable fluid made from vegetable oil with antioxidant, anticorrosive, antifoaming, and metal-passivating additives and approved by elevator manufacturer for use with elevator equipment. G. Inserts: Furnish required concrete and masonry inserts and similar anchorage devices for installing guide rails, machinery, and other components of elevator work. Device installation is specified in another Section. H. Car Frame and Platform: Welded or bolted steel units. I. Guides: Roller guides; polymer-coated, nonlubricated sliding guides; or sliding guides with guide-rail lubricators. Provide guides at top and bottom of car and counterweight frames. 2.6 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES A. Integrated Control System: the elevator controller to be mounted to hoistway entrance above 1st landing. The entrance at this level, shall be designed to accommodate the control system and provide a means of access to critical electrical components and troubleshooting features. B. At the controller landing, the hoistway entrance frame shall have space to accommodate and provide a lockable means of access (group 2 security) to a 3 phase circuit breaker. C. Interlocks: Equip each hoistway entrance with an approved type interlock tested as required by code. Provide door restriction devices as required by code. D. Door Hanger and Tracks: Provide sheave type two point suspension hangers and tracks for each hoistway horizontal sliding door. 1. Sheaves: Polyurethane tires with ball bearings properly sealed to retain grease. 2. Hangers: Provide an adjustable device beneath the track to limit the up-thrust of the doors during operation. 3. Tracks: Drawn steel shapes, smooth surface and shaped to conform to the hanger sheaves. E. Hoistway Sills: Extruded metal, with groove(s) in top surface. Provide mill finish on aluminum F. Doors and Frames: Provide complete hollow metal type hoistway entrances at each hoistway opening bolted\knock down construction 1. Manufacturer's standard entrance design consisting of hangers, doors, hanger supports, hanger covers, fascia plates, sight guards, and necessary hardware 2. Main landing door & frame finish: Stainless steel panels, no. 4 brushed finish 3. Typical door & frame finish: Stainless steel panels with no. 4 brushed finish. 2.7 CAR ENCLOSURE A. General: Provide steel-framed car enclosures with nonremovable wall panels, with car roof, access doors, power door operators, and ventilation. 1. Provide standard railings complying with ASME A17.1/CSA B44 on car tops where required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400 - 11 B. Car Top Inspection: Provide a car top inspection station with an “Auto-Inspection” switch, an "emergency stop" switch, and constant pressure "up and down" direction and safety buttons to make the normal operating devices inoperative. The station will give the inspector complete control of the elevator. The car top inspection station shall be mounted in the door operator assembly. C. Materials and Finishes: Manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following: 1. Subfloor: Exterior, underlayment grade plywood, not less than 5/8-inch (15.9-mm) nominal thickness. 2. Subfloor: Exterior, C-C Plugged grade plywood, not less than 7/8-inch (22.2-mm) nominal thickness. 3. Floor Finish: Specified in Drawings and Interior Specifications. 4. Canopy: Cold-rolled steel with hinged exit. 5. Stainless-Steel Wall Panels: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainless- steel sheet. 6. Fabricate car with recesses and cutouts for signal equipment. 7. Fabricate car door frame integrally with front wall of car. 8. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainless-steel sheet or by laminating stainless-steel sheet to exposed faces and edges of enameled cold- rolled steel doors using adhesive that fully bonds metal to metal without telegraphing or oil-canning, no. 4 brushed finish. 9. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on car doors. 10. Sills: Extruded aluminum, mill finish, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick. 11. Metal Pan Ceiling: Manufacturer’s Standard Flush panels, with suspended LED downlights. 12. Handrails: Manufacturer's standard 1.5'' diameter cylindrical metal on side walls of front and rear opening cars. Handrails shall have a stainless steel, no. 4 brushed finish. 13. Ventilation: Manufacturer’s standard exhaust fan, mounted on the car top. 2.8 DOOR OPERATION A. Infrared Array: Provide door reopening device with uniform array of 36 or more microprocessor-controlled, infrared light beams projecting across car entrance. Interruption of one or more light beams shall cause doors to stop and reopen. B. Door Operation: Provide a direct current motor driven heavy duty operator designed to operate the car and hoistway doors simultaneously. Door movements shall be electrically cushioned at both limits of travel and the door operating mechanism shall be arranged for manual operation in event of power failure. Doors shall automatically open when the car arrives at the landing and automatically close after an adjustable time interval or when the car is dispatched to another landing. Closed-loop, microprocessor controlled motor-driven linear door operator, with adjustable torque limits, also acceptable. AC controlled units with oil checks or other deviations are not acceptable. 1. No Un-Necessary Door Operation: The car door shall open only if the car is stopping for a car or hall call, answering a car or hall call at the present position or selected as a dispatch car. 2. Door Open Time Saver: If a car is stopping in response to a car call assignment only (no coincident hall call), the current door hold open time is changed to a shorter field programmable time when the electronic door protection device is activated. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400 - 12 3. Double Door Operation: When a car stops at a landing with concurrent up and down hall calls, no car calls, and no other hall call assignments, the car door opens to answer the hall call in the direction of the car's current travel. If an onward car call is not registered before the door closes to within 6 inches of fully closed, the travel will reverse and the door will reopen to answer the other call. 4. Nudging Operation: The doors shall remain open as long as the electronic detector senses the presence of a passenger or object in the door opening. If door closing is prevented for a field programmable time, a buzzer will sound. When the obstruction is removed, the door will begin to close at reduced speed. If the infra-red door protection system detects a person or object while closing on nudging, the doors will stop and resume closing only after the obstruction has been removed. 5. Limited Door Reversal: If the doors are closing and the infra-red beam(s) is interrupted, the doors will reverse and reopen partially. After the obstruction is cleared, the doors will begin to close. 6. Door Open Watchdog: If the doors are opening, but do not fully open after a field adjustable time, the doors will recycle closed then attempt to open six times to try and correct the fault. 7. Door Close Watchdog: If the doors are closing, but do not fully close after a field adjustable time, the doors will recycle open then attempt to close six times to try and correct the fault. 8. Door Close Assist: When the doors have failed to fully close and are in the recycle mode, the door drive motor shall have increased torque applied to possibly overcome mechanical resistance or differential air pressure and allow the door to close. 2.9 CAR OPERATING STATION A. Swing-Return Car-Control Stations: Provide car-control stations mounted on rear of hinged return panel adjacent to car door and with buttons, switches, controls, and indicator lights projecting through return panel but substantially flush with face of return panel. 1. Swing return shall have a brushed stainless steel finish. 2. The main car operating panel shall be mounted in the return and comply with handicap requirements. 3. Switches for car light and accessories shall be provided. 4. Pushbuttons that illuminate using long lasting LED’s shall be included for each floor served, and emergency buttons and switches shall be provided per code. a. Mark buttons and switches for function. Use both tactile symbols and Braille. B. Emergency Communication System: Two-way voice communication system, with visible signal, which dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station and does not require handset use. System is contained in flush-mounted cabinet, with identification, instructions for use, and battery backup power supply. C. Car Position Indicator: Provide illuminated, digital-type car position indicator, located above car door or above car-control station. Also, provide audible signal to indicate to passengers that car is either stopping at or passing each of the floors served. Include travel direction arrows if not provided in car-control station. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400 - 13 2.10 CONTROL SYSTEMS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation system as required to provide type of operation indicated. B. Service Panel – to be located outside the hoistway in the controller entrance jamb and shall provide the following functionality/features: 1. Access to main control board and CPU 2. Main controller diagnostics 3. Main controller fuses 4. Universal Interface Tool (UIT) 5. Remote valve adjustment 6. Electronic motor starter adjustment and diagnostics 7. Operation of pit motorized shut-off valve with LED feedback to the state of the valve in the pit 8. Operation of auxiliary pump/motor (secondary hydraulic power source) 9. Operation of electrical assisted manual lowering 10. Provide male plug to supply 110VAC into the controller 11. Run/Stop button C. Automatic Light and Fan shut down: The control system shall evaluate the system activity and automatically turn off the cab lighting and ventilation fan during periods of inactivity. The settings shall be field programmable. D. Auxiliary Operations: In addition to primary operation system features, provide the following operational features for elevators where indicated: 1. Emergency Power Operation: When the loss of normal power is detected, a battery lowering feature is to be activated. The elevator will lower to a predetermined level and open the doors. After passengers have exited the car, the doors will close and the car will shutdown. When normal power becomes available, the elevator will automatically resume operation. The battery lowering feature is included in the elevator contract and does not utilize a building-supplied standby power source. 2.11 HALL STATIONS A. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide one hall push-button station at each landing. 1. Provide units with flat faceplate for mounting with body of unit recessed in wall. a. Provide faceplates having a brushed stainless steel finish. 2. Equip units with buttons for calling elevator and for indicating applicable direction of travel. 3. Phase 1 firefighter’s service key switch, with instructions, shall be incorporated into the hall station at the designated level. B. Hall Annunciator: With each hall lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival and direction of travel. Signals sound once for up and twice for down. 1. At manufacturer's option, audible signals may be placed on cars. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400 - 14 C. Floor Identification Pads: Provide door jamb pads at each floor. Jamb pads shall comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements. D. Emergency Pictorial Signs: Fabricate from materials matching hall push-button stations, with text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction, indicating that in case of fire elevators are out of service and exits should be used instead. Provide one sign at each hall push- button station unless otherwise indicated. 2.12 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES A. Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Manufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding, door-and-frame hoistway entrances complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories. Frame size and profile shall accommodate hoistway wall construction. 1. Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, frames shall be self-supporting with reinforced head sections. B. Materials and Fabrication: Manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following: 1. Stainless-Steel Frames: Formed from stainless-steel sheet. 2. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainless-steel sheet or by laminating stainless-steel sheet to exposed faces and edges of enameled cold- rolled steel doors using adhesive that fully bonds metal to metal without telegraphing or oil-canning, no. 4 brushed finish. 3. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on doors matching door edges. 4. Sills: Extruded metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick. 5. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. C. Integrated Control System: the elevator controller to be mounted to hoistway entrance above 1st landing. The entrance at this level, shall be designed to accommodate the control system and provide a means of access to critical electrical components and troubleshooting features. D. At the controller landing, the hoistway entrance frame shall have space to accommodate and provide a lockable means of access (group 2 security) to a 3 phase circuit breaker. E. Interlocks: Equip each hoistway entrance with an approved type interlock tested as required by code. Provide door restriction devices as required by code. F. Door Hanger and Tracks: Provide sheave type two point suspension hangers and tracks for each hoistway horizontal sliding door. 1. Sheaves: Polyurethane tires with ball bearings properly sealed to retain grease. 2. Hangers: Provide an adjustable device beneath the track to limit the up-thrust of the doors during operation. 3. Tracks: Drawn steel shapes, smooth surface and shaped to conform to the hanger sheaves. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400 - 15 2.13 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call has been fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements with LEDs. 2.14 FINISH MATERIALS A. General: Provide the following materials for exposed parts of elevator car enclosures, car doors, hoistway entrance doors and frames, and signal equipment as indicated. B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed, matte finish. C. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, commercial steel, Type B, pickled. D. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304. E. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276, Type 304. F. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304. G. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine elevator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Verify critical dimensions and examine supporting structure and other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed. B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install elevator systems components and coordinate installation of hoistway wall construction. 1. Work shall be performed by competent elevator installation personnel in accordance with ASME A17.1, manufacturer's installation instructions and approved shop drawings. 2. Comply with the National Electrical Code for electrical work required during installation. B. Coordination: Coordinate elevator work with the work of other trades, for proper time and sequence to avoid construction delays. Use benchmarks, lines, and levels designated by the Contractor, to ensure dimensional coordination of the work Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400 - 16 C. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances with cars. Where possible, delay final adjustment of sills and doors until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum safe, workable dimensions at each landing. D. Lubricate operating parts of system where recommended by manufacturer. E. Install cylinder plumb and accurately centered for elevator car position and travel. Anchor securely in place, supported at pit floor and braced at intervals as needed to maintain alignment. Anchor cylinder guides at spacing needed to maintain alignment and avoid overstressing guides. F. Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installing elevator work where bolted connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, inspection, maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS workmanship and welding operator qualification standards. G. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts to minimize vibration transmission to structure and structure-borne noise due to elevator system. H. Lubricate operating parts of systems as recommended by manufacturers. I. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances with car. Where possible, delay installation of sills and frames until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe, workable dimension at each landing. J. Leveling Tolerance: 1/4 inch (6 mm), up or down, regardless of load and travel direction. K. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. L. Locate hall signal equipment for elevators as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. For groups of elevators, locate hall push-button stations between two elevators at center of group or at location most convenient for approaching passengers. 2. Place hall lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance. 3. Mount hall lanterns at a minimum of 72 inches (1829 mm) above finished floor. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting elevator use (either temporary or permanent), perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by ASME A17.1/CSA B44 and by governing regulations and agencies. B. Advise Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and times that tests are to be performed on elevators. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400 - 17 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Make necessary adjustments of operating devices and equipment to ensure elevator operates smoothly and accurately. 3.5 CLEANING A. Before final acceptance, remove protection from finished surfaces and clean and polish surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for type of material and finish provided. Stainless stall shall be cleaned with soap and water and dried with a non-abrasive surface; shall not be cleaned with bleached-based cleansers. B. At completion of elevator work, remove tools, equipment, and surplus materials from site. Clean equipment rooms and hoistway. Remove trash and debris. 3.6 PROTECTION A. At time of Substantial Completion of elevator work, or portion thereof, provide suitable protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other such methods or procedures to protect elevator work from damage or deterioration. Maintain protective measures throughout remainder of construction period. 1. Provide car with temporary enclosure, either within finished car or in place of finished car, to protect finishes from damage. 2. Provide strippable protective film on entrance and car doors and frames. 3. Provide padded wood bumpers on entrance door frames covering jambs and frame faces. 4. Provide other protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, and procedures as needed to protect elevator and elevator equipment. 5. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to operate, adjust, and maintain elevator. B. Check operation of elevator with Owner's personnel present before date of Substantial Completion and again not more than one month before end of warranty period. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly. 3.8 MAINTENANCE A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of elevator Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 1. Perform maintenance during normal working hours. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400 - 18 2. Perform emergency callback service during normal working hours with response time of two hours or less. 3. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency callback service with response time of two hours or less. END OF SECTION 142400 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HYDRAULIC WHEELCHAIR LIFTS 142400 - 1 SECTION 142402 - HYDRAULIC WHEELCHAIR LIFTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes hydraulic passenger lifts. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011000 "Summary" for purchase contract for elevators negotiated by Owner and assigned to Contractor. 2. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary use of elevators for construction purposes. 3. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in concrete. a. Attachment plates, angle brackets, and other structural-steel preparations for fastening guide-rail brackets. b. Divider beams. c. Hoist beams. d. Structural-steel shapes for subsills that are part of steel frame. 4. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for the following: a. Attachment plates and angle brackets for supporting guide-rail brackets. 5. Section 06100 –“Rough Carpentry”: Hoistway framing, building-in hoistway door frames and overhead hoist beams. 6. Section 09260 –“Gypsum Board Assemblies”: Gypsum shaft walls 7. Section 09650 “Resilient Flooring” for finish flooring in elevator cars. 8. Section 142400 "Hydraulic Elevators" for hydraulic elevators that are used primarily accessible to the general public. 9. Division 16 Sections for electrical service for elevators to and including disconnect and fused switches at machine room 10. Division 27 Sections for telephone service for elevators and for Internet connection to elevator controllers for remote monitoring of elevator performance if required. 11. Division 28 Sections for Fire and smoke detectors and interconnecting devices 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions in ASME A17.1/CSA B44 apply to work of this Section. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HYDRAULIC WHEELCHAIR LIFTS 142400 - 2 B. Hydraulic Wheelchair Platform Lift: The lift described here, manufactured is a vertical wheelchair lift consisting of a roped hydraulic drive with a lifting platform. The platform is made to accommodate a wheelchair user or a person with impaired mobility 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes, and similar information. Include product data for car enclosures; hoistway entrances; and operation, control, and signal systems. 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at each landing; machine room layout; coordination with building structure; relationships with other construction; and locations of equipment. 2. Include large-scale layout of car-control station. 3. Indicate maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of support as well as maximum and average power demands. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For finishes involving color or finish selection, two complete sets of color charts representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. D. Samples for Verification: For exposed car, hoistway door and frame, and signal equipment finishes, 3-inch- (75-mm-) square Samples of sheet materials and 4-inch (100-mm) lengths of running trim members. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer, certifying that hoistway, pit, and machine room layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical service, as shown and specified, are adequate for elevator system being provided. C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For elevators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. Submit manufacturer's/installer's standard operation and maintenance manual, in accordance with ASME A17.1/CSA B44 including diagnostic and repair information available to manufacturer's and Installer's maintenance personnel. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HYDRAULIC WHEELCHAIR LIFTS 142400 - 3 B. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use. C. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Submit a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer to Owner with terms, conditions, and obligations as set forth in, and in same form as, "Draft of Elevator Maintenance Agreement" at end of this Section, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Elevator manufacturer or an authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle materials, components and equipment in manufacturer's protective packaging. Store materials, components, and equipment off of ground, under cover, and in a dry location. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of sleeves, block outs, elevator equipment with integral anchors, and other items that are embedded in concrete or masonry for elevator equipment. Furnish templates, sleeves, elevator equipment with integral anchors, and installation instructions and deliver to Project site in time for installation. B. Coordinate locations and dimensions of other work specified in other Sections that relates to hydraulic elevators, including floor drains in pits; entrance subsills; electrical service; and electrical outlets, lights, and switches in hoistways, pits, and machine rooms. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair, restore, or replace elevator work that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, operation or control system failure, including excessive malfunctions; performances below specified ratings; excessive wear; unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes; unsafe conditions; need for excessive maintenance; abnormal noise or vibration; and similar unusual, unexpected, and unsatisfactory conditions. 2. Warranty Period: 3 year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HYDRAULIC WHEELCHAIR LIFTS 142400 - 4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: Savaria Prolift SCL, Type 2-36”(x 48”), 2 Walker Drive, Brampton, ON, Canada, L6T 5E1; Toll Free Tel: 800-661-5112; Tel: 905-791-5555; Fax: 905-791-2222; Email: request info; Web: www.savaria.com B. Source Limitations: Obtain lifts from single manufacturer. 1. Major elevator components, including pump-and-tank units, plunger-cylinder assemblies, controllers, signal fixtures, door operators, car frames, cars, and entrances, shall be manufactured by single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A18.1/CSA B355. B. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with ADAAG Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC A117.1. 2.3 LIFTS A. Hydraulic Wheelchair Lift System, General: Manufacturer's standard systems. Unless otherwise indicated, manufacturers' standard components shall be used, as included in standard elevator systems and as required for complete system. B. Elevator 2 Description: 1. Type: Holeless, beside-the-car, 2:1 roped hydraulic. 2. Rated Load: 750 lbs (350 kg). 3. Rated Speed: 30 fpm (0.15 m/s). 4. Controller: Electronic. 5. Motor/Pump: 220VAC, 5HP max. 6. Levels Serviced: 3. 7. Travel: 12’-0”. 8. Pit Depth: 8 inches. 9. Platform Configuration: Enter/exit front/rear. 10. Auxiliary Operations: a. Battery-powered lowering. b. Manual Lowering: Located inside the lockable hydraulic tank in the machine room. 11. Car Enclosures: a. Inside Width: 36 inches (914 mm) from side wall to side wall. b. Inside Depth: 48 inches (1219 mm) from back wall to front wall. c. Inside Height: Manufacturer’s Standard. d. Floor prepared to receive epoxy flooring to match kitchen areas. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HYDRAULIC WHEELCHAIR LIFTS 142400 - 5 e. Wall Finish: Plastic Laminate Panels (To be selected from Manufacturers Standard Finishes). f. Car Trim: Clear anodized aluminum. g. Ceiling: White egg-crate ceiling with four recessed incandescent down lights. h. Handrail: A single stainless steel handrail, with 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) diameter rail and with both ends returned to the side guard, shall be located on the control wall of the cab. i. Control Panel: Stainless steel control panel with tactile identifications, metal push buttons and illuminated halos. 1) Provide key switch to turn cab controls on and off in order to limit the use to authorized persons only. 12. Hoistway Doors: a. Width: 36 inches (889 mm) clear opening. b. Height: 80”. c. Operation: Automatic, Concealed 24 volt door opener with battery back-up. d. Interlock: Concealed electro/mechanical. e. Hinges: Concealed. f. Frames Primed or powder-coated steel. g. Doors: Primed or powder-coated steel with manufacturer’s standard vision panel. h. Sills Aluminum. 1. Hall Call Station: Provide flush, surface or door frame mounted landing call/send stations. Stainless steel panel with tactile identifications, Constant Pressure metal push buttons and illuminated halos. a. Keyed (removable in on/off position). 2. Car Operating Panel: a. Car operating panel shall consist of constant pressure buttons, emergency stop/alarm button, on/off key switch (when applicable) and emergency light mounted on a removable stainless steel panel (Type 304 #4 Stainless Steel Finish). b. Digital floor indicator in cab. c. Emergency Operation - The car shall be equipped with a battery operated light fixture, emergency battery lowering device and alarm in case of normal building supply failure. The battery shall be the rechargeable type with an automatic recharging system. A manual lowering device shall be located inside the lockable hydraulic tank in the machine room. 3. Additional Requirements: a. Provide inspection certificate in car, mounted under acrylic cover with frame. C. Elevator 3 Description: 1. Type: Holeless, beside-the-car, 2:1 roped hydraulic. 2. Rated Load: 750 lbs (350 kg). 3. Rated Speed: 30 fpm (0.15 m/s). 4. Controller: Electronic. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HYDRAULIC WHEELCHAIR LIFTS 142400 - 6 5. Motor/Pump: 220VAC, 5HP max. 6. Levels Serviced: 2. 7. Travel: 9’-6”. 8. Pit Depth: 8 inches. 9. Platform Configuration: Enter/exit front/rear. 10. Auxiliary Operations: a. Battery-powered lowering. b. Manual Lowering: Located inside the lockable hydraulic tank in the machine room. 11. Car Enclosures: a. Inside Width: 36 inches (914 mm) from side wall to side wall. b. Inside Depth: 48 inches (1219 mm) from back wall to front wall. c. Inside Height: Manufacturer’s Standard. d. Floor: Prepared to receive epoxy flooring to match kitchen areas. e. Wall Finish: Plastic Laminate Panels (To be selected from Manufacturers Standard Finishes). f. Car Trim: Clear anodized aluminum. g. Ceiling: White egg-crate ceiling with four recessed incandescent down lights. h. Handrail: A single stainless steel handrail, with 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) diameter rail and with both ends returned to the side guard, shall be located on the control wall of the cab. i. Control Panel: Stainless steel control panel with tactile identifications, metal push buttons and illuminated halos. 12. Hoistway Doors: a. Width: 36 inches (889 mm) clear opening. b. Height: 80”. c. Operation: Automatic, Concealed 24 volt door opener with battery back-up. d. Interlock: Concealed electro/mechanical. e. Hinges: Concealed. f. Frames: Primed or powder-coated steel. g. Doors: Primed or powder-coated steel with manufacturer’s standard vision panel. h. Sills Aluminum. 13. Hall Call Station: Provide flush, surface or door frame mounted landing call/send stations. Stainless steel panel with tactile identifications, Constant Pressure metal push buttons and illuminated halos. a. Keyless 14. Car Operating Panel: a. Car operating panel shall consist of constant pressure buttons, emergency stop/alarm button and emergency light mounted on a removable stainless steel panel (Type 304 #4 Stainless Steel Finish). b. Digital floor indicator in cab. c. Emergency Operation - The car shall be equipped with a battery operated light fixture, emergency battery lowering device and alarm in case of normal building supply failure. The battery shall be the rechargeable type with an automatic Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HYDRAULIC WHEELCHAIR LIFTS 142400 - 7 recharging system. A manual lowering device shall be located inside the lockable hydraulic tank in the machine room. 15. Additional Requirements: a. Provide inspection certificate in car, mounted under acrylic cover with frame. 2.4 SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS A. Pumping Unit and Control: The pumping unit and control shall be in a separate machine room. The controller and pump unit shall be pre-wired and tested prior to shipment. Pump unit shall incorporate the following features: 1. Smooth stops at each landing 2. Submersible pump and motor 3. Adjustable pressure relief valve 4. Manually operable down valve to lower lift in the event of an emergency. This valve shall be activated from the machine room. 5. Pressure gauge isolating valve, manually operable 6. Gate valve to isolate cylinder from pump unit. 7. Electro Proportional valve for accurate and smooth starts and stops in both directions. 8. Emergency lowering by battery power, from the car control. B. Cylinder And Plunger: 1. The cylinder shall be constructed of a steel pipe of sufficient thickness and suitable safety margin. The top of the cylinder shall be equipped with a cylinder head with an internal guide ring and self-adjusting packing. 2. The plunger shall be constructed of a solid steel shaft of proper diameter machined true and smooth. The plunger shall be provided with a stop electrically welded to the bottom to prevent the plunger from leaving the cylinder. C. Aircraft Cable: Two, Minimum breaking strength 14,400 lb (6545 kg) each. D. Leveling Device: 1. The lift shall be provided with an anti-creep device which will maintain the carriage level within 1/2 inch (12 mm) of each landing. 2. All limit switch and leveling device switches shall be located in a position to be inaccessible to unauthorized persons. E. Guide Yoke: The 2:1 guide yoke assembly shall be supplied with one (1) sheaves, guide shoes, bearings and guards. F. Terminal Stopping Devices: Normal terminal stopping devices shall be provided at top and bottom of runway to stop the car positively and automatically. Micro switches shall not be used. G. Guide Rails: Steel 8 lb per foot guide rails to guide the platform and sling. H. Car Sling: Car sling shall be fabricated from steel with adequate bracing to support the platform and car enclosure. Guide shoes shall be mounted on the top and bottom of the car sling to engage the guide rails. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HYDRAULIC WHEELCHAIR LIFTS 142400 - 8 I. Wiring: All wiring and electrical connections shall comply with applicable codes. Insulated wiring shall have flame-retardant and moisture-proof outer covering and shall be run in conduit or electrical wire ways if located outside the unit enclosure. Quick disconnect harnesses shall be used when possible. J. Hydraulic Silencers: System shall have hydraulic silencer containing pulsation-absorbing material in blowout-proof housing at pump unit. K. Hydraulic Fluid: Elevator manufacturer's standard fluid with additives as needed to prevent oxidation of fluid, corrosion of cylinder and other components, and other adverse effects. L. Inserts: Furnish required concrete and masonry inserts and similar anchorage devices for installing guide rails, machinery, and other components of elevator work. Device installation is specified in another Section. M. Guides: Roller guides Polymer-coated, nonlubricated sliding guides or sliding guides with guide-rail lubricators. Provide guides at top and bottom of car frame. 2.5 OPERATION SYSTEMS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation system as required to provide type of operation indicated. B. Auxiliary Operations: 1. Single-Car Battery-Powered Lowering: When power fails, car is lowered to the lowest floor, opens its doors, and shuts down. System includes rechargeable battery and automatic recharging system. C. Security Features: Security features shall not affect emergency firefighters' service. 1. Keyswitch Operation: Push buttons are activated and deactivated by security keyswitches at car-control stations and hall push-button stations. Key is removable in either position. 2.6 CAR ENCLOSURES A. Materials and Finishes: Manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following: 1. Subfloor: Exterior, underlayment-grade plywood, not less than 5/8-inch (15.9-mm) nominal thickness. 2. Plastic-Laminate Wall Panels: Plastic laminate adhesively applied to manufacturer's standard honeycomb core manufacturer's standard protective edge trim. Panels have a flame-spread index of 75 or less, when tested according to ASTM E 84. Plastic-laminate color, texture, and pattern as selected by Architect from elevator manufacturer's full range. 3. Fabricate car with recesses and cutouts for signal equipment. 4. Enameled- or Powder-Coated-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. Provide with factory-applied enamel or powder-coat finish; colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HYDRAULIC WHEELCHAIR LIFTS 142400 - 9 5. Primed or Powder-Coated-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. Provide with factory-applied, rust-resistant primer or powder coating for field painting. 6. Sills: Extruded or machined metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick. 2.7 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES A. Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Manufacturer's standard swinging door-and-frame hoistway entrances complete with hardware, sills, and accessories. Frame size and profile shall accommodate hoistway wall construction. 1. Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, frames shall be self-supporting with reinforced head sections. B. Materials and Fabrication: Manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following: 1. Enameled- or Powder-Coated-Steel Frames: Formed from cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. Provide with factory-applied enamel or powder-coat finish; colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Primed or Powder-Coated-Steel Frames: Formed from cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. Provide with factory-applied, rust-resistant primer or powder coating for field painting. 3. Primed or Powder-Coated-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. Provide with factory-applied, rust-resistant primer or powder- coating for field painting. 4. Sills: Extruded or machined metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick. 2.8 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT A. Car-Control Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard recessed car-control stations. Mount in return panel adjacent to car door unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mark buttons and switches for required use or function. Use both tactile symbols and Braille. 2. Include Alarm button with hands free telephone, emergency light, door open, landing selection, emergency stop, and key switch where indicated. B. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide one hall push-button station at each landing. 1. Provide manufacturer's standard wall-mounted units. 2. Equip units with buttons for calling elevator and for indicating applicable direction of travel. C. Emergency Pictorial Signs: Fabricate from materials matching hall push-button stations, with text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction, indicating that in case of fire, elevators are out of service and exits should be used instead. Provide one sign at each hall push- button station unless otherwise indicated. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HYDRAULIC WHEELCHAIR LIFTS 142400 - 10 2.9 FINISH MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed, matte finish. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, commercial steel, Type B, pickled. C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304. D. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276, Type 304. E. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304. F. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063. G. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure type complying with NEMA LD 3, Type HGS or HGL for flat applications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine elevator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Verify critical dimensions and examine supporting structure and other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed. 1. Do not begin installation until hoistway and machine room has been properly prepared. 2. Site dimensions shall be taken to verify that tolerances and clearances have been maintained and meet local regulations. B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install the components of the elevator system that are required and that are required by jurisdictional authorities to license the elevator. C. Install cylinder plumb and accurately centered for elevator car position and travel. Anchor securely in place, supported at pit floor and braced at intervals as needed to maintain alignment. Anchor cylinder guides at spacing needed to maintain alignment and avoid overstressing guides. D. Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installing elevator work where bolted connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HYDRAULIC WHEELCHAIR LIFTS 142400 - 11 inspection, maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS workmanship and welding operator qualification standards. E. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts to minimize vibration transmission to structure and structure-borne noise due to elevator system. F. Install piping above the floor, where possible. Install underground piping in casing. 1. Excavate for piping and backfill encased piping according to applicable requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." G. Lubricate operating parts of systems as recommended by manufacturers. H. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances with car. Where possible, delay installation of sills and frames until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe, workable dimension at each landing. I. Leveling Tolerance: 1/4 inch (6 mm), up or down, regardless of load and travel direction. J. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. K. Locate hall signal equipment for elevators as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. Place hall lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting elevator use (either temporary or permanent), perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by ASME A17.1/CSA B44 and by governing regulations and agencies. B. Advise Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and times that tests are to be performed on elevators. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. Do not utilize for construction purposes. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to operate, adjust, and maintain elevator(s). B. Check operation of each elevator with Owner's personnel present before date of Substantial Completion and again not more than one month before end of warranty period. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 HYDRAULIC WHEELCHAIR LIFTS 142400 - 12 3.6 MAINTENANCE END OF SECTION 142400 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PARKING BUMPERS 321713 - 1 SECTION 321713 - PARKING BUMPERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes wheel stops. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples for Verification: For wheel stops, 6 inches (150 mm) long, showing color and cross section; with fasteners. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PARKING BUMPERS A. Resilient Wheel Stops: Solid, integrally colored, 96 percent postconsumer or commingled postconsumer and preconsumer recycled rubber or plastic; UV stabilized; 4 inches (100 mm) high by 6 inches (150 mm) wide by 42 inches long. Provide chamfered corners and a minimum of [two] [three] [four] factory-formed or -drilled vertical holes through wheel stop for anchoring to substrate. 1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Color: Black. 3. Embedded Markings: Molded-in, yellow reflective markings, permanently inset in exposed surface. 4. Mounting Hardware: Galvanized-steel lag screw, shield, and washers; 1/2-inch (13-mm) diameter, 8-inch (203-mm) minimum length. 5. Adhesive: As recommended by wheel-stop manufacturer for adhesion to pavement. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PARKING BUMPERS 321713 - 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that pavement is in suitable condition to begin installation according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install wheel stops according to manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated. B. Install wheel stops in bed of adhesive before anchoring. C. Securely anchor wheel stops to pavement with hardware in each preformed vertical hole in wheel stop as recommended in writing by manufacturer. Recess head of hardware beneath top of wheel stop. END OF SECTION 321713 Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 321723 - 1 SECTION 321723 - PAVEMENT MARKINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes painted markings applied to interior concrete pavement. B. Related Requirements: 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review methods and procedures related to marking pavement including, but not limited to, the following: a. Pavement aging period before application of pavement markings. b. Review requirements for protecting pavement markings, including restriction of traffic during installation period. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified; on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 55 deg F (12.8 deg C) for water-based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F (35 deg C). Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 321723 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2.2 PAVEMENT-MARKING PAINT A. Pavement-Marking Paint: Latex, waterborne emulsion, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying with FS TT-P-1952, Type II, with drying time of less than 45 minutes. 1. Color: Yellow. B. VOC Content: Pavement markings used on building interior shall have a VOC content of 150 g/L or less. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that pavement is dry and in suitable condition to begin pavement marking according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Proceed with pavement marking only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PAVEMENT MARKING A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect. B. Allow paving to age for a minimum of 30 days before starting pavement marking. C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions indicated, with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils (0.4 mm). 1. Apply graphic symbols and lettering with paint-resistant, die-cut stencils, firmly secured to pavement. Mask an extended area beyond edges of each stencil to prevent paint application beyond the stencil. Apply paint so that it cannot run beneath the stencil. 3.3 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect pavement markings from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. Zehren and Associates, Inc. Vail Golf and Nordic Clubhouse 7/13/2015 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 321723 - 3 B. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 321723